FS20 Fire detection system Configuration

Transcription

1 FS20 Fire detection system Configurtion MP Control Products nd Systems

2 Legl notice Legl notice Technicl specifictions nd vilbility subject to chnge without notice. Trnsmittl, reproduction, dissemintion nd/or editing of this document s well s utiliztion of its contents nd communiction thereof to others without express uthoriztion re prohibited. Offenders will be held lible for pyment of dmges. All rights creted by ptent grnt or registrtion of utility model or design ptent re reserved. Issued by: Siemens Switzerlnd Ltd. Division Interntionl Hedqurters Gubelstrsse 22 CH-6301 Zug Tel Edition: Document ID: Siemens Switzerlnd Ltd,

3 Tble of contents 1 About this document Applicble documents Downlod center Technicl terms nd bbrevitions Revision history Sfety Sfety instructions Sfety regultions for the method of opertion Stndrds nd directives complied with CPR conformity nd firmwre version Relese Notes Cyber security disclimer Instlltion System requirements Instlling the engineering tool set Instlltion vi the input prompt Instlltion nd uninstlltion with defult prmeter vlues Instlltion with modified prmeter vlues Uninstlltion with modified prmeter vlues Instlltion with initiliztion file Vlidtion nd error log file IP settings for severl network crds Strting Engineering Tool Exit Engineering tool Softwre dministrtion Engineering tool set: File nme nd version BDV: File nme nd version Firmwre: File nme nd version Pre-settings Generl Commissioning Assign Editing Firmwre pckge Help Internet LRC web server Periphery updte SintesoView Site BDV import Resources import

4 4.7 Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) Loding / renewing licenses Returning licenses Disply licensing informtion Instlling severl different engineering tool sets Sving prts list for the 'Site' License key Clling up log files of Engineering Tool GUI Overview of the progrm window Menu br Toolbr Help nd tooltips Templte for customer dt Tsk crds Tsk crd components Scroll brs nd window seprting lines Expnding nd collpsing the elements in the structure tree Multiselection Nvigting within the progrm window Nvigting with tsk crds Nvigting with hyperlinks Nvigting with shortcuts Sttus br Error indiction nd problem identifiction SintesoView Dynmic loding Progrm opertion Creting site Loding n existing 'site' Crete 'Site' bsed on n existing configurtion Creting new 'site' Editing 'site' properties Creting sttion Crete element Replcing element Delete element Editing elements Tble Copying properties in the tble Inserting text in columns Entering quicktext Copying, cutting, nd psting elements Moving n element Re-ddressing elements Assigning elements

5 6.13 Assignment with Dt Mtrix code Assigning elements severl times Assigning the effects of control Deleting links Finding Finding nd replcing Exporting n XML Exporting n SIB-X Exporting nd importing CSVs Exporting CSVs Editing the CSV file Importing CSVs Protocol of the CSV import Chnge disply logo Creting reports Customer text report Device report Dignostics report Event memory report Import informtion report Node report 'Peripherls test report' Soiling report Tree report Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Connecting the PC to the sttion Disconnecting the PC from the sttion Connecting SintesoView Lod dt to the sttion Initilizing the sttion Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion Loding configurtion from the sttion to the PC Loding event memory to PC Loding the site log files to the PC Merge two sites Hndover Updting the firmwre Updting the firmwre of the 'Sttion' 'Site' conversion Conversion log Updting the firmwre of the peripherl devices Converting sttion

6 9 Configurtion Overview With pre-configurtion Without pre-configurtion Customer text AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion System requirements Options nd limittions Supported sttions Supported lines nd limittions Number of chnnels per 'Zone' AlgoRex limittions SIGMASYS limittions Sequence of the import process Digrm of possible ssignment Overview of steps Exporting configurtion dt AlgoWorks export PLAND100 export Creting site for dt migrtion Creting sttion Creting line crds Creting FDnet/C-NET lines Importing configurtion dt Importing hrdwre Importing controls Error log Adpting configurtion Adpting the number of chnnels per zone Adpting controls Setting visibility AlgoRex: Creting bse sounders for FDnet/C-NET devices Correcting the AnlogPLUS ddress AnlogPLUS/Interctive: Correcting multiple verifiction DC1192c, DC1151, CB320A Interctive: Correcting DCW1151/DOW1171 ssignment Adpting properties Loding the configurtion in the 'sttion' Completing migrtion Exporting n SIB-X Deleting import informtion

7 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd 'Sttion' Intervention concept (IC) Configuring permnent ccess for SintesoView Onbord I/Os FDnet detector line Automtic fire detectors Detector prmeter sets Sensor mode with multi-sensor fire detectors Bse sounder Externl lrm indictor Alrm sounder nd interbse Aspirting smoke detector Input/output module FDCIO Zone module FDCI Power supply I/O crds LED indictor FTO Ethernet switch (modulr) FN Inputs/outputs Creting the line crd Collective detector line Creting 'Zones' nd ssigning them to collective detector lines Setting the properties of the collective detector line Setting the properties of the line devices MS9i detector line Creting nd ssigning line elements nd 'Zones' Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements Setting the properties of the MS9i detector line Setting the properties of the line elements AnlogPLUS detector line Creting nd ssigning line elements nd 'Zones' Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements Configuring the line type for n AnlogPLUS detector line Setting the properties of the AnlogPLUS detector line Configuring line element ddresses Setting the properties of the line elements Interctive detector line Creting 'Zones' nd ssigning them to n interctive detector line Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements Configuring the line type for n interctive detector line Setting the properties of the interctive detector line Setting the properties of the line elements

8 12 'Detection' tsk crd Creting 'Detection tree' 'Are' Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) Immedite globl lrming Alrm orgniztion mode Switching times for 'Unmnned opertion' 'Section' 'Zone' 'Automtic zone' 'Mnul zone' 'Technicl zone' 'Sub-system zone' 'Flow switch zone' 'Sprinkler zone' 'Gs zone' 'XC10 zone' 'FSE zone' [DE] Configuring the 'Zone' Multi-detector dependency Multi-detector dependency with ltching Two-zone dependency Additionl criteri for pre-stge nd min stge Assign hrdwre tree to the detection tree Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 or zone module Neurl fire detector FDOOTC Configuring fire detection Configuring gs detection Configuring environment monitoring Redux module [DE] Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone 'Control' tsk crd Dul CPU switchover nd degrded mode Creting control tree Alrming control group Automticlly isolting remote trnsmission Properties of the ssigned effect elements Universl control group Fire control Time control

9 13.5 Evc control group Assigning universl evc control Universl evc control properties Cuse of the phsed evc control Effect of the phsed evc control Properties of the phsed evc control stge evcution, specil cse [GB] Counter control group nd lrm counter control Dmper control group Creting nd configuring dmper control Dmper control sttes Assignment of effects dependent on wiring Fire dmper control properties Properties of the ssigned effects EDE export Configuring LEDs for dmper control Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] Externl lrm indictor Loop sounder, loop sounder/becon, nd bse sounder Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output Configuring monitored input Configuring monitored output Addressble lrm indictor FDCAI Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion System behvior Globl PIN configurtion Country settings Mster clock Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Bsic settings LEDs Stndrd keys Fvorites Configuring stndrd keys nd fvorites Toggle function Visibility Properties of the visibility Stndrd visibility Stndby visibility Expnded visibility Configuring visibility on FC Configuring visibility for Sinteso Mobile

10 14.4 Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT FT2010/FT2011 core nd configurtion groups Visibility LEDs Function keys Assigning the configurble keys nd LEDs LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT Element 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' Element 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' Configuring mimic disply driver FT Event printer Fire brigde periphery [DE] Key depot dpter FCI ESPA interfce (pger) EVAC pnel [NL] Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] Creting the 'UGA' nd 'UGA lrm zone' elements Assigning UGA to the RS485 module Configuring visibility UGA Mster-Slve principle CERLOOP gtewy [FR] Creting RS232 module Creting nd ssigning the CERLOOP gtewy Configuring visibility Entering CERLOOP group numbers Key sfe dpter [DE] Assigning LEDs 'Network' tsk crd Network prmeters Network configurtion Creting networked 'Sttions' Configuring 'Sttion' s router sttion Configuring 'Sttion' s GAP Configuring GAP with DHCP server Mnul lloction of ddresses in the sub-nets Entering routes for externl ccess to extended networks vi GAP Setting network speed for SAFEDLINK Configuring remote ccess with two GAPs Configuring remote ccess vi crsp Configuring redundncy mngement Estblishing connection from PC to FS20 network Setting up Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU) Monitoring Ethernet switch (MM) nd sfety module (firewll) Connecting mngement sttions vi BACnet/Ethernet Plnning BACnet configurtion

11 15.7 Globl BACnet configurtion Configuring globl BACnet settings Disbling switch-off nd switch-on messges Delegting multiple lrms for 'Zones' Configuring BACnet client Monitoring BACnet client Configuring 'Stndby visibility' for the mngement sttion BACnet device configurtion 'BACnet device object' Overview BBMD entry (BDT entry) BACnet Notifiction Clss Element Checklist for network nd BACnet configurtion Site configurtion, sttus MP Converting configurtion in ccordnce with BDV FG Glossry Index

12 12 406

13 About this document Applicble documents 1 1 About this document Gol nd purpose This document describes the configurtion of n FS20 fire detection system using the engineering tool set FX2030. Scope The informtion in documents nd is prerequisite for configurtion of the fire detection system with the engineering tool set FX2030. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. This document is vlid for mrket pckge MP6. Trget groups The informtion in this document is intended for the following trget groups: Trget group Activity Qulifiction Commissioning personnel Configure the product t the plce of instlltion ccording to customer-specific requirements. Check the product operbility nd relese the product for use by the opertor. Serches for nd corrects mlfunctions. Mintennce personnel Crries out ll mintennce work. Checks tht the products re in perfect working order. Serches for nd corrects mlfunctions. Hs obtined suitble specilist trining for the function nd for the products. Hs ttended the trining courses for commissioning personnel. Hs obtined suitble specilist trining for the function nd for the products. Source lnguge nd reference document The source/originl lnguge of this document is Germn (de). The reference version of this document is the interntionl version in English. The interntionl version is not loclized. Document identifiction The document ID is structured s follows: ID code ID_ModifictionIndex_Lnguge_COUN TRY -- = multilingul or interntionl Exmples A6V de_de A6V en_-- A6V _-- Dte formt The dte formt in the document corresponds to the recommendtion of interntionl stndrd ISO 8601 (formt YYYY-MM-DD)

14 1 About this document Applicble documents Conventions for text mrking Mrkups Specil mrkups re shown in this document s follows: Requirement for behvior instruction Behvior instruction with t lest two opertion sequences Version, option, or detiled informtion for behvior instruction Intermedite result of behvior instruction End result of behvior instruction Numbered lists nd behvior instructions with n opertion sequence [ X] Reference to pge number 'Text' <Key> Quottion, reproduced identiclly Identifiction of keys > Reltion sign nd for identifiction between steps in sequence, e.g., 'Menu br' > 'Help' > 'Help topics' Text Identifiction of glossry entry Supplementry informtion nd tips The 'i' symbol identifies supplementry informtion nd tips for n esier wy of working

15 About this document Applicble documents Applicble documents Document ID Title FDS221 Alrm sounder, Technicl mnul List of comptibility FS20 Fire Detection System, Description FS20 Fire Detection System, Product Dt FS20 Fire Detection System, Plnning FS20 Fire Detection System, Inscription Strips FS20 Fire Detection System Commissioning, Mintennce, Troubleshooting FDCIO223 input/output module, technicl documenttion FDS229 Alrm sounder becon, Technicl mnul A6V A6V A6V A6V FDOOTC241 Neurl fire detector, Technicl mnul FDCI221, FDCIO221 Input Module, Input/Output Module, Technicl Mnul FS20/FS720 Fire Detection System, Externl Printer, Appliction Note FS20 Fire Detection System, Site Conversion A6V XC10 Extinguishing control unit, XC1001-A / XC1005-A / XC1003-A, Instlltion / Commissioning / Mintennce A6V A6V A6V FG2020-D1, Technicl Mnul FDSB221, FDSB229 Sounder interbse, sounder becon interbse, Technicl mnul Technicl mnul for spirting smoke detectors FDA221 nd FDA FDCI222, FDCIO222, FDCIO224 Input module, Input/output module, Technicl mnul Additionl documents for AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Document ID Title Online help AlgoWorks sttion mngement Online help PLAND AlgoRex fire detection system, design nd plnning

16 1 About this document Downlod center 1.2 Downlod center You cn downlod vrious types of documents, such s dt sheets, instlltion instructions, nd license texts vi the following Internet ddress: Enter the document ID in the 'Find by keyword' input box. You will lso find informtion bout serch vrints nd links to mobile pplictions (pps) for vrious systems on the home pge. 1.3 Technicl terms nd bbrevitions Term BDV ES FDnet FSD RT Explntion Bse dt vrint Product version Addressed detector line Fire brigde key depot Remote trnsmission You will find detils of further technicl terms nd bbrevitions in the 'Glossry' chpter. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

17 About this document Revision history Revision history The reference document's version pplies to ll lnguges into which the reference document is trnslted. Version Edition dte Brief description The first edition of lnguge version or country vrint my, for exmple, be version 'd' insted of '' if the reference document is lredy this version. The tble below shows this document's revision history: q Edition for MP6 New: Configuring the opertion mode for SintesoView In chpter 'AlgoRex / SIGMASYS dt migrtion': Limittions nd informtion for control migrtion, importing controls, dpting controls, AlgoRex: Creting bse sounders for FDnet devices Ethernet switch (modulr) FN2012 Configuring redundncy mngement (with subchpters) Assigning elements severl times Editing the CSV file 'Peripherls test report' Time control (with subchpters) Inserting text in columns Instlltion vi the input prompt Soiling report Cyber security disclimer Configuring the key sfe dpter [DE]: 'Key sfe dpter [DE]', 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls', 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Technicl zone for LED', 'Assigning LEDs' Dmper control group, incl. 'EDE export' sub-chpter Network prmeters with reference to document 'Opening n XML file in Excel' in 'Creting reports'

18 1 About this document Revision history Version Edition dte Brief description Revised Referenced documents updted, screenshots updted throughout the document New structure in chpter 'AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion', chnges mde to chpters 'Instlling the engineering tool set', 'Clling up log files', 'Toolbr', 'Number of chnnels per 'Zone'', wrning dded regrding ssigning FDA241 sensors in chpters 'Aspirting smoke detector' nd 'Assigning hrdwre tree to the detection tree', notice dded regrding cuse link for sounder ssigned s n effect with ctive 'Activtion timeout 'mnned''/'activtion timeout 'unmnned'' property in chpters 'Alrming control group', 'Properties of the ssigned effect elements', 'Assigning the 'Universl evc control' element', 'Cuse of the 'Phsed evc control' element', nd 'Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO223', chpter 'Importing CSVs': Informtion dded regrding chrcter length of customer texts nd utomtic shortening on import, chpter 'Overview of the progrm window' revised, chpter 'Adpting the number of chnnels per zone' in 'AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion', chpters 'Input/output module FDCIO223' nd 'Inputs/outputs' updted nd option 'Enble temporry freeze of output position' dded, chpter 'Exporting nd importing CSVs' revised in terms of content nd structure, chpter 'Aspirting smoke detector', chpter 'Globl PIN configurtion' edited, chpter 'Settings for LRC web server': 'Trcebility' dded, chpter 'PLAND100 export', informtion on reserved IP ddresses dded to chpters 'Configuring 'Sttion' s router sttion' nd 'Mnul lloction of ddresses in the sub-nets, chpter 'Finding' updted, pre-settings updted, chpter 'Exporting n XML' updted, video fire controller FDV241 removed, chpter 'Assigning elements' updted, informtion on use s test site dded to chpter 'Creting new 'Site'', informtion on converting sttion dded to chpter 'Replcing n element', chpter 'Creting reports' nd sub-chpters updted, chpter 'Creting stndlone sttion' removed, chpter ''Network' tsk crd' updted, chpter 'BACnet Notifiction Clss element' updted Windows 8.1 nd 10.0 supported, Windows Vist nd Windows XP no longer supported p Revised: 'Toggle function': Note on switched-off 'Zones' dded

19 About this document Revision history 1 Version Edition dte Brief description o Edition for MP5 Chnge to dte formt ccording to ISO 8601 New: Templte for customer-specific 'Site' dt PIN configurtion Converting 'Sttion' 'Import informtion report' AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Setting up Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU) Resources import Hndover Configuring visibility for Sinteso Mobile AnlogPLUS detector line Interctive detector line Zone module FDCI223 Creting the line crd Revised: System requirements: Not comptible with Windows 2000 Configuring 'Sttion' s GAP The mximum vlue tht cn be set for the ddress of 'Sttion' is 252. 'Editing site properties': 1000 insted of 250 chrcters 'Pre-settings': New pre-settings 'Menu br': Chnges nd new menu items 'Export XML': User-defined XML export 'Expnding nd collpsing the elements in the structure tree': Filter function 'Assigning with the help of Dt Mtrix code': Automtic ssignment Notes bout license keys 'Settings for Dt Mtrix code reder': Note bout 'Seril communiction prmeters' for reding devices with USB-COM port Network ddresses in the chpter 'Tsk crd 'network'' 'Alrm verifiction concept': Settings for 'Alrming type 'therml'' FDV242 deleted 'Configurtion - Overview' revised 'Setting the properties of the collective detector line': Settings for 'Events' tb deleted 'Alrm verifiction concept (AVC)': Configuring the AVC settings for the line lrm 'Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 or zone module': Zone module FDCI223 'FDnet detector line': 'Events' tb 'Input/output module FDCIO223': Reference to document ''Hrdwre' tsk crd': Chpter restructured

20 1 About this document Revision history Version Edition dte Brief description n Edition for MP-EN 4.0 New: I/O crd (remote trnsmission) FCI2007-A1 I/O crd (horn/monitored) FCI2009-A1 Gs zone Multi-detector dependency with ltching CSV export/import Link to documenttion for the FG2020 SintesoView settings Clling up log files Input/output module FDCIO223 Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output Option to configure 252 devices per detector line 'Crete nd ssign' function for MS9i detector line New quicktext settings Mouse wheel settings Key sfe dpter Alrm counter vlue configurble Reding device for Dt Mtrix code Chnge disply logo LED indictor FTO2002 Dul CPU switchover nd degrded mode Alrm sounder nd interbse Aspirting smoke detector Support for Windows 7 Remote ccess with two GAPs Remote ccess vi crsp Text for fvorites Revised: I/O crds 'Zones' Configuring 'Zone' Reports File nme nd version of engineering tool set, firmwre, nd BDV Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO223 Entire chpter ''Hrdwre' tsk crd' Configuring collective detector line Configuring the MS9i detector line Onbord I/Os 'XC10 zone' 'Opertion' tsk crd: 'Globl system configurtion' chp. up to 'Visibility' CERLOOP gtewy Alrming equipment (UGA) 2-stge evcution Neurl fire detector FDOOTC241 m Chpter "Loding configurtion from the PC to the 'Sttion'" revised l Edition for MP3.0 Revision history redefined nd stndrdized, dynmic loding, merging two 'Sites', network configurtion, mngement sttions vi BACnet/Ethernet, route entries for instlltion, new FDCAI221, generl chpter structure k Chpter restructured New: Chpter nd j Modifictions for MP2.1 i Chpter "Line crd (collective)" revised h Modifictions for MP2.1 g Modifictions for MP2.1 f Modifictions for MP2.1 e Modifictions for MP

21 About this document Revision history 1 Version Edition dte Brief description d Modifiction for MP1.3 nd MP2.1 c Chpters 4 to 7 restructured nd modifictions for MP1.2 b Chpter Configurtion reworked nd modified for MP First edition

22 2 Sfety Sfety instructions 2 Sfety 2.1 Sfety instructions The sfety notices must be observed in order to protect people nd property. The sfety notices in this document contin the following elements: Symbol for dnger Signl word Nture nd origin of the dnger Consequences if the dnger occurs Mesures or prohibitions for dnger voidnce Symbol for dnger This is the symbol for dnger. It wrns of risks of injury. Follow ll mesures identified by this symbol to void injury or deth. Additionl dnger symbols These symbols indicte generl dngers, the type of dnger or possible consequences, mesures nd prohibitions, exmples of which re shown in the following tble: Generl dnger Voltge/electric shock Bttery Explosive tmosphere Lser light Het Signl word The signl word clssifies the dnger s defined in the following tble: Signl word DANGER WARNING CAUTION Dnger level DANGER identifies dngerous sitution, which will result directly in deth or serious injury if you do not void this sitution. WARNING identifies dngerous sitution, which my result in deth or serious injury if you do not void this sitution. CAUTION identifies dngerous sitution, which could result in slight to modertely serious injury if you do not void this sitution. NOTICE NOTICE identifies possible dmge to property tht my result from nonobservnce

23 Sfety Sfety instructions 2 How risk of injury is presented Informtion bout the risk of injury is shown s follows: WARNING Nture nd origin of the dnger Consequences if the dnger occurs Mesures / prohibitions for dnger voidnce How possible dmge to property is presented Informtion bout possible dmge to property is shown s follows: NOTICE Nture nd origin of the dnger Consequences if the dnger occurs Mesures / prohibitions for dnger voidnce

24 2 Sfety Sfety regultions for the method of opertion 2.2 Sfety regultions for the method of opertion Ntionl stndrds, regultions nd legisltion Siemens products re developed nd produced in complince with the relevnt Europen nd interntionl sfety stndrds. Should dditionl ntionl or locl sfety stndrds or legisltion concerning the plnning, mounting, instlltion, opertion or disposl of the product pply t the plce of opertion, then these must lso be tken into ccount together with the sfety regultions in the product documenttion. Electricl instlltions WARNING Electricl voltge Electric shock Work on electricl instlltions my only be crried out by qulified electricins or by instructed persons working under the guidnce nd supervision of qulified electricin, in ccordnce with the electrotechnicl regultions. Wherever possible disconnect products from the power supply when crrying out commissioning, mintennce or repir work on them. Lock volt-free res to prevent them being switched bck on gin by mistke. Lbel the connection terminls with externl externl voltge using 'DANGER Externl voltge' sign. Route mins connections to products seprtely nd fuse them with their own, clerly mrked fuse. Fit n esily ccessible disconnecting device in ccordnce with IEC outside the instlltion. Produce erthing s stted in locl sfety regultions. CAUTION Noncomplince with the following sfety regultions Risk of injury to persons nd dmge to property Complince with the following regultions is required. Specilist electricl engineering knowledge is required for instlltion. Only n expert is permitted to crry out instlltion work. Incorrect instlltion cn tke sfety devices out of opertion unbeknown to lyperson

25 Sfety Sfety regultions for the method of opertion 2 Mounting, instlltion, commissioning nd mintennce If you require tools such s ldder, these must be sfe nd must be intended for the work in hnd. When strting the fire control pnel ensure tht unstble conditions cnnot rise. Ensure tht ll points listed in the 'Testing the product operbility' section below re observed. You my only set controls to norml function when the product operbility hs been completely tested nd the system hs been hnded over to the customer. Testing the product operbility Prevent the remote trnsmission from triggering erroneously. If testing building instlltions or ctivting devices from third-prty compnies, you must collborte with the people ppointed. The ctivtion of fire control instlltions for test purposes must not cuse injury to nyone or dmge to the building instlltions. The following instructions must be observed: Use the correct potentil for ctivtion; this is generlly the potentil of the building instlltion. Only check controls up to the interfce (rely with blocking option). Mke sure tht only the controls to be tested re ctivted. Inform people before testing the lrm devices nd llow for possible pnic responses. Inform people bout ny noise or mist which my be produced. Before testing the remote trnsmission, inform the corresponding lrm nd fult signl receiving sttions. Modifictions to the system design nd the products Modifictions to the system nd to individul products my led to fults, mlfunctioning nd sfety risks. Written confirmtion must be obtined from Siemens nd the corresponding sfety bodies for modifictions or dditions. Modules nd spre prts Components nd spre prts must comply with the technicl specifictions defined by Siemens. Only use products specified or recommended by Siemens. Only use fuses with the specified fuse chrcteristics. Wrong bttery types nd improper bttery chnging led to risk of explosion. Only use the sme bttery type or n equivlent bttery type recommended by Siemens. Btteries must be disposed of in n environmentlly friendly mnner. Observe ntionl guidelines nd regultions. Disregrd of the sfety regultions Before they re delivered, Siemens products re tested to ensure they function correctly when used properly. Siemens disclims ll libility for dmge or injuries cused by the incorrect ppliction of the instructions or the disregrd of dnger wrnings contined in the documenttion. This pplies in prticulr to the following dmge: Personl injuries or dmge to property cused by improper use nd incorrect ppliction Personl injuries or dmge to property cused by disregrding sfety instructions in the documenttion or on the product Personl injury or dmge to property cused by poor mintennce or lck of mintennce

26 2 Sfety Stndrds nd directives complied with 2.3 Stndrds nd directives complied with A list of the stndrds nd directives complied with is vilble from your Siemens contct CPR conformity nd firmwre version In order to stisfy Ordinnce No. 305/2011 (the Construction Products Regultion CPR), the firmwre of newly instlled fire detection instlltion must be current mrket pckge version MP6 or higher. NOTICE Firmwre version of newly instlled fire detection instlltion not updted No CPR conformity Compre the firmwre version of newly instlled fire detection instlltion with the firmwre version MP6. Updte the firmwre if necessry. 2.4 Relese Notes Limittions to the configurtion or use of devices in fire detection instlltion with prticulr firmwre version re possible. WARNING Limited or non-existent fire detection Personl injury nd dmge to property in the event of fire. Red the 'Relese Notes' before you pln nd/or configure fire detection instlltion. Red the 'Relese Notes' before you crry out firmwre updte to fire detection instlltion. NOTICE Incorrect plnning nd/or configurtion Importnt stndrds nd specifictions re not stisfied. Fire detection instlltion is not ccepted for commissioning. Additionl expense resulting from necessry new plnning nd/or configurtion. Red the 'Relese Notes' before you pln nd/or configure fire detection instlltion. Red the 'Relese Notes' before you crry out firmwre updte to fire detection instlltion

27 Sfety Cyber security disclimer Cyber security disclimer Products, solutions nd services from Siemens include security functions to ensure the secure opertion of building utomtion nd control, fire sfety, security mngement, nd physicl security systems. The security functions on these products, solutions nd services re importnt components of comprehensive security concept. Drfting, implementing nd mnging comprehensive nd upto-dte security concept, customized to individul needs, is nevertheless necessry, nd my result in dditionl plnt- or site-specific preventive mesures to ensure secure opertion of your site regrding building utomtion nd control, fire sfety, security mngement, nd physicl security. These mesures my include, for exmple, seprting networks, physiclly protecting system components, user trining, multi-level defensive mesures, etc. For dditionl informtion on security s prt of building technology nd our product, solution nd service offerings, plese contct your Siemens sles representtive or project deprtment. We strongly recommend to lwys comply with our security dvisories on the ltest security threts, ptches nd other relted mesures

28 3 Instlltion System requirements 3 Instlltion 3.1 System requirements Hrdwre Component Minimum requirements Processor Pentium M1.6 Min memory 512 MB Hrd disk 400 MB, better still 1 GB of free memory Network connection Ethernet RJ45 Screen resolution 1024 x 768 Colors Softwre Operting system Windows 7 Windows 7 Windows 8.1 Windows 8.1 Windows 10.0 Windows 10.0 Version x86 (32-bit), SP1 x64 (64-bit), SP1 x86 (32-bit) x64 (64-bit) x86 (32-bit) x64 (64-bit) Erlier nd up to nd including MP-En 4.0 / IP4: Windows XP / Windows Vist (both 32-bit version only). Not comptible: Windows 2000 Component Acrobt Reder Browser Minimum requirements Version 6 or higher Internet Explorer or similr browser Administrtor rights to the OS of the PC re required for the instlltion of the softwre. Dt migrtion The following system requirements pply to dt migrtion: AlgoRex system version AlgoWorks softwre version V1.94 SIGMASYS system version XX_1140_830_YY XX:country code YY:version number xxx PLAND100 softwre version V9.0 SintesoWorks F-FX2030-XL_en_ R2 or lter version

29 Instlltion Instlling the engineering tool set Instlling the engineering tool set When the engineering tool set FX2030 is instlled, the following components re instlled too: Firmwre pckge FXS2001 SintesoWorks FXS2002 Bse dt vrint (BDV) FXS2004 Set of help documents FXS2006 Periphery updte pckge FXS2007 When the SintesoWorks is instlled, the two routes in the tble below re entered in the PC's network settings. Network ddress Network msk Gtewy ddress Metric Tble 1: Persistent routes Instlling the engineering tool set FX Run the instlltion file. The instlltion routine strts nd guides you through the instlltion. 2. Follow the instructions of the instlltion routine nd observe the instlltion pths. Instlltion pths During instlltion, you cn chnge the stndrd instlltion pths offered. You cn chnge vrious pths subsequently within the softwre, but you must then move the respective folder mnully to the new loction. We do not recommend tht you chnge the pths fter successful instlltion in the softwre. The pth for the log files cnnot be chnged fterwrds. If you instll version of the softwre with nother mjor or minor version, new stndrd instlltion pths re creted. The existing instlltion pths re retined. You cn lso open the directory for log files s follows vi the Strt menu: Strt > All Progrms > Siemens > F-FX2030 > [Version] 1 > Log files 1 [Version] = Version of the softwre, e.g., EN_en_1-V1 See lso 2 Engineering tool set: File nme nd version [ 37] 2 Instlling severl different engineering tool sets [ 53]

30 3 Instlltion Instlltion vi the input prompt 3.3 Instlltion vi the input prompt Instlltion vi the Commnd Prompt utomticlly uninstlls erlier engineering tool set versions nd instlls the required version utomticlly. When instlling vi the Commnd Prompt, no instlltion routine is executed, i.e., no dilog windows re displyed tht guide you through the instlltion. NOTICE Dt will be deleted Instlltion vi the Commnd Prompt utomticlly uninstlls erlier instlltions of the engineering tool set. This my led to dt being deleted, e.g., BDVs. Tke the defult uninstll prmeters into ccount nd chnge the prmeter vlues to prevent dt being deleted. The uninstll nd instlltion process cnnot be interrupted. Instlltion vi the input prompt is supported from engineering tool set version Older versions hve to be uninstlled mnully. The instructions below pply to instlltion in Windows 7 nd Instlltion nd uninstlltion with defult prmeter vlues The tbles below disply the defult prmeters. Instlltion prmeter Instlltion pth Dt pth Engineering Tool interfce lnguge on initil strt-up BDV lnguge on initil strt-up Lunch Engineering Tool fter instlltion Defult vlue C:\Progrm Files (x86)\siemens\f- FX2030\XL_en_x-Vx.x C:\ProgrmDt\Siemens\F-FX2030 English English Yes Uninstlltion prmeter Remove BDVs Remove dditionl documents Remove firmwre pckges Remove site configurtions Remove reports Remove proposed input texts Remove site property templtes Defult vlue Yes No No No No No No

31 Instlltion Instlltion vi the input prompt 3 Uninstlltion nd instlltion w The executble instlltion file for the engineering tool set is sved to your PC. 1. Windows 7: Open the Commnd Prompt: Click on the Strt button. Enter 'Commnd Prompt' in the serch field nd click on Commnd Prompt. The Commnd Prompt is opened. 2. Windows 8.1: Open the Commnd Prompt: Switch to the pp screen. Use the mouse to click on the rrow t the bottom edge of the screen. Nvigte to the 'Windows System' ctegory on the pp screen. Select the Windows System under 'Commnd Prompt'. The Commnd Prompt is opened. 3. In the Commnd Prompt, nvigte to the drive on which the executble instlltion file is sved, e.g., by entering 'C:'. 4. Enter 'cd' to nvigte to the file pth where the executble file is sved, e.g., 'cd Users\User1\Downlods'. 5. Run the instlltion file using the defult prmeters: Enter the chrcter '>', the nme of the instlltion file, nd the sequence of chrcters '/S', e.g., '>F-F-FX2030-GB_en_ R.exe /S'. The softwre strts to uninstll erlier versions nd instll the required engineering tool set. The progress is displyed on the Commnd Prompt. Engineering Tool lunches utomticlly following instlltion Instlltion with modified prmeter vlues Py ttention to the informtion regrding vlidtion nd the error log file when generting prmeter commnds. Link [ 34] You cn pre-configure the prmeter commnds with n instlltion file. Link [ 32] Proceed s for the defult instlltion nd enter the required prmeters fter the '/S' sequence of chrcters. Seprte ech prmeter commnd with spce. The tble below shows the commnds for chnging the individul prmeters. 'new vlue' represents the new prmeter vlue. Prmeters Instlltion pth Dt pth Engineering Tool interfce lnguge on initil strt-up BDV lnguge on initil strt-up Lunch Engineering Tool fter instlltion Commnd /INSTALL_DIR="new vlue" /SHARED_DATA_DIR="new vlue" /TOOL_LANGUAGE="new vlue" /BDV_LANGUAGE="new vlue" /START_TOOL=yes/no

32 3 Instlltion Instlltion vi the input prompt Vlues for Engineering Tool interfce lnguge nd BDV lnguge Bulgrin (bg), Chinese (zh_cn), Crotin (hr), Czech (cs), Dnish (d), English (en), English (en_ca), English (en_gb), English (en_ie), English (en_us), Estonin (et), Finnish (fi), Dutch; Flemish (nl), Flemish (nl_be), French (fr_be), French (fr_ca), French (fr_ch), French (fr_fr), Germn (de), Germn (de_at), Germn (de_ch), Germn (de_de), Greek (el), Hebrew (iw), Hungrin (hu), Itlin (it_ch), Itlin (it_it), Lithunin (lt), Norwegin (no), Polish (pl), Portuguese (pt), Portuguese (pt_br), Romnin (ro), Russin (ru), Serbin (sr), Slovk (sk), Slovenin (sl), Spnish (es), Spnish (es_es), Swedish (sv), Turkish (tr), Ukrinin (uk) Exmples /TOOL_LANGUAGE="French (fr_be)" /BDV_LANGUAGE="Dutch" See lso 2 Instlltion with initiliztion file [ 32] Uninstlltion with modified prmeter vlues Py ttention to the informtion regrding vlidtion nd the error log file when generting prmeter commnds. Link [ 34] You cn pre-configure the prmeter commnds with n instlltion file. Link [ 32] Proceed s for the defult instlltion nd enter the required prmeters for uninstlltion fter the '/S' sequence of chrcters. Seprte ech prmeter commnd with spce. The tble below shows the commnds for chnging the individul prmeters. 'new vlue' represents the new prmeter vlue. Prmeters Remove BDVs Remove dditionl documents Remove firmwre pckges Remove site configurtions Remove reports Remove proposed input texts Remove site property templtes Commnd /REMOVE_BDVS=yes/no /REMOVE_ADD_DOCTOS=yes/no /REMOVE_FIRMWARE=yes/no /REMOVE_SITES=yes/no /REMOVE_TRACES=yes/no /REMOVE_QUICKTEXTS=yes/no /REMOVE_SITEINFO=yes/no The sequence of the prmeter commnds is not importnt Instlltion with initiliztion file You cn pre-configure the prmeter commnds for the instlltion nd uninstlltion in n initiliztion file (.ini). The file is clled up during instlltion nd the commnds sved on it re executed

33 Instlltion Instlltion vi the input prompt Creting n initiliztion file NOTICE Dt will be deleted if the instlltion file is incorrect The prmeter commnds will be ignored if the instlltion file is not formulted correctly. No error messge will be shown. The defult prmeters will be used. Dt my be deleted during utomtic uninstlltion. Ensure tht the initiliztion file is correctly formulted. The exmple below shows the structure of n initiliztion file including ll the possible prmeter commnds nd defult vlues. [Remove components t uninstll] REMOVE_BDVS=yes REMOVE_ADD_DOCTOS=no REMOVE_FIRMWARE=no REMOVE_SITES=no REMOVE_TRACES=no REMOVE_QUICKTEXTS=no REMOVE_SITEINFO=no [Instll prmeters] INSTALL_DIR="C:\Progrm Files (x86)\siemens\f-fx2030\xl_en_x-vx.x" SHARED_DATA_DIR="C:\ProgrmDt\Siemens\F-FX2030" TOOL_LANGUAGE="English (en)" BDV_LANGUAGE="English (en)" START_TOOL=yes Tble 2: Exmple structure of n initiliztion file with defult vlues Proceed s follows to crete n initiliztion file. 1. Open text editor, e.g., the editor in Word. 2. Crete the required prmeter commnds s shown in the exmple nd enter the required prmeter vlues. 3. Sve the file s n ini file. Importnt informtion bout the initiliztion file: No slshes '/' must be used in front of prmeter commnds in the initiliztion file. If the sme prmeter commnds re trnsferred to the Commnd Prompt nd n initiliztion file is clled up t the sme time, only the prmeter commnds from the initiliztion file will be tken into ccount. You do not hve to define ll prmeters in the initiliztion file. The defult vlue is set for undefined prmeters. If there is no erlier version of the engineering tool set instlled on the PC, the prmeters for the 'Remove components t uninstll' section will be ignored

34 3 Instlltion Instlltion vi the input prompt Clling up n initiliztion file w You hve creted n initiliztion file tht includes ll the necessry prmeter commnds. Proceed s for the defult instlltion nd enter the commnd '/FILE="nswer file"' fter the '/S' sequence of chrcters, where 'nswer file' must contin the pth nd the nme of the initiliztion file, e.g., '>F-F-FX2030-GB_en_ R.exe /S /FILE="C:\Users\User1\nswerfile.ini"' Vlidtion nd error log file You must formulte the prmeter commnds correctly using the following rules: The pths must be correct nd complete. The instlltion pth nd the dt pth must end with the ID of the engineering tool set, e.g., XL_en-1-V1.0. The instlltion pth nd the dt pth must not be the sme. There must be sufficient memory for the instlltion files on the hrd disk. See the chpter 'System requirements [ 28]'. The Engineering Tool interfce lnguge nd the BDV lnguge must be vlid nd correctly formulted. If prmeter commnd contins n invlid vlue, e.g., n invlid pth or n invlid lnguge, the instlltion will be interrupted nd n error log file creted. The error log file is sved in the sme directory s the executble instlltion file. The Commnd Prompt will inform you if the instlltion hs filed. If the instlltion is interrupted due to n error, the pth for the error log file will be displyed

35 Instlltion IP settings for severl network crds IP settings for severl network crds To connect to 'Sttion' vi the FS20 network or directly to the 'Sttion', you cn use n dditionl network crd on the PC, for exmple, 'USB to Ethernet dpter'. If you use more thn one network crd on the PC nd ll re set for DHCP, you must observe the following points: Once the dt hs loded from the PC to 'Sttion', the stndrd gtewy for the Intrnet/Internet cn be overwritten when initilizing 'Sttion' or disconnecting connection to 'Sttion'. You cn specify the IP settings for the connection to the FS20 network mnully. For mnully specified IP settings for the FS20 network, there is no conflict with DHCP server in the FS20 network. Mnully specifying IP settings 1. Chnge the IP settings for the network crd with which you re estblishing the connection to the FS20 network from DHCP to mnul. 2. Enter one of the following IP ddresses. For direct connection to the 'Sttion': / For ccess vi the FS20 network: IP settings re mnully specified. Network settings for the Intrnet/Internet re not overwritten. If you hve mnully specified the IP settings for the FS20 network, you must lso chnge the mnully specified network settings when chnging the connection between direct connection to the 'Sttion' nd ccess vi FS20 network. 3.5 Strting Engineering Tool You cn strt Engineering Tool s follows: Click the softwre symbol on the desktop. In the tsk br, click on 'Strt' > 'Progrms' > 'Siemens' > 'FX2030' > [Version] 1 > 'F-FXS2002'. 1 [Version] = Version of the softwre If you re strting SintesoWorks for the first time, you will need to lod the license. Otherwise the functions of SintesoWorks re not vilble. License test The licenses re checked when SintesoWorks is strted. When no objection or wrning messges pper, the licenses re vlid. The following objection or wrning messges my occur: Wrning tht there re no vlid licenses. This wrning occurs fter SintesoWorks hs been strted for the first time. Wrning tht the vlidity hs expired. Wrning tht the vlidity will expire. Objection tht the licenses hve been mnipulted, e.g. dte chnged on the PC. See lso 2 Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) [ 47]

36 3 Instlltion Exit Engineering tool 3.6 Exit Engineering tool You cn exit Engineering Tool s follows: In the menu br, click on 'File' > 'Exit'. Click on the 'X' button in the title br. If you hve mde chnges to the softwre nd not sved these, you re sked if you wish to sve them

37 Softwre dministrtion Engineering tool set: File nme nd version 4 4 Softwre dministrtion 4.1 Engineering tool set: File nme nd version File nme formt: [Prefix]-[Country]_[Lnguge]_[Sles chnnel]-[met dt version].r.exe Exmple: F-FX2030-GB_en_ R.exe Designtion Prefix Country Coding F-FX2030 Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO ALPHA-2 Lnguge Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO 639-1:2002 Sles chnnel Single digit, numericl (1-4) Met dt version R.exe Three levels seprted by full stops: Mjor, minor, bugfix Numericl, ny number of points per level Relese File extension, upper-cse or lower-cse letters 4.2 BDV: File nme nd version File nme formt: [Prefix]-[Country]_[Lnguge]_[Sles chnnel]-[met dt version]_[ BDV version]([vrint]).ebdv Exmple: F-FXS2004-GB_en_ _01.eBDV Designtion Prefix Country Coding F-FXS2004 Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO ALPHA-2 Lnguge Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO 639-1:2002 Sles chnnel Single digit, numericl (1-4) Met dt version BDV version Vrints.eBDV Three levels seprted by full stops: Mjor, minor, bugfix Numericl, ny number of points per level Double digit, numericl with leding zero when pplicble Optionl, single digit, only CAPS Extension of every BDV, upper-cse or lower-cse letters The file nme of BDV must not be chnged by the user. BDVs with file nmes which do not correspond to the formt cnnot be used by the softwre. See lso 2 BDV import [ 46]

38 4 Softwre dministrtion Firmwre: File nme nd version 4.3 Firmwre: File nme nd version File nme formt: [Prefix]-[Country]_[Lnguge]_[Sles chnnel]-[met dt version]_([vrint])_[firmwre version].zip Exmple: F-FXS2001-XE_xx_x _00.zip Designtion Prefix Country Coding F-FXS2001 Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO ALPHA-2 XE: Severl countries Lnguge Double digit, in ccordnce with ISO 639-1:2002 xx: All lnguges Sles chnnel Single digit, numericl (1-4) x: All sles chnnels Met dt version Vrints Firmwre version.zip Three levels seprted by full stops: Mjor, minor, bugfix Numericl, ny number of points per level Optionl, multiple digits, upper-cse letters, lower-cse letters, numbers nd '-' Double digit, numericl with leding zero when pplicble Extension of every firmwre, upper-cse or lower-cse letters The file nme of the firmwre must not be chnged by the user. Firmwre with file nmes which do not correspond to the formt cnnot be used by the softwre. See lso 2 Resources import [ 47] 4.4 Pre-settings You cn specify presettings for the softwre in the 'Generl' window. The pre-settings re described in the following chpters. Specifying presettings 1. In the menu br, click on 'Options' > 'Preferences'. The 'Generl' window opens. 2. Click on view in the window on the left. The presettings for this view re displyed in the window on the right. 3. Select the presettings you wnt nd click on 'Apply'. The presettings re sved

39 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings 4 Restore defult settings 1. Click on the desired view on the left in the 'Generl' window. 2. Click on 'Restore defults'. The stndrd settings in the selected view re restored. Softwre pths If you chnge progrm pths then you must move the respective folder mnully to the new loction. If, during instlltion of the softwre, no other pth hs been entered, then the shred dt directory is in the following pth: C:\Documents nd Settings\All Users\ Appliction Dt\Siemens\F-FX2030\[Version] 1 1 [Version] = Version of the softwre, e.g., EN_en_1-V1 The common dt directory contins the following subfolders: 'Additionl_Documents' 'BDV' 'FS20_SW' 'Help' 'Logfiles' 'Sites' 'Techniclfiles' Generl The following cn be set in the 'Generl' view: 'Number of recently opened files:': Number of files tht were recently opened nd tht re displyed in the 'File'. 'Automticlly open lst site t tool strtup': If the checkbox is checked, the 'Site' tht ws opened lst is loded when the progrm strts. 'Additionl documents directory:': Pth to the folder where dditionl documents cn be stored, e.g., country-specific informtion, ppliction guidelines, or product informtion. 'Tool lnguge:': Selection of the lnguge for the progrm interfce. See lso 2 Assigning elements [ 85]

40 4 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings Commissioning The following cn be set in the 'Commissioning' view: 'Automtic bckup embedded configurtion': If the checkbox is ctivted, then the configurtion which is currently sved in the 'Site' will be loded into the PC nd sved s bckup. This procedure is crried out utomticlly ech time tht you lod configurtion from the PC into the 'Sttion' with the commnd 'Downlod site'. You will find dditionl informtion for the cretion of bckup file in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] Assign The following cn be set in the 'Assign' view: Assign dilog settings 'Auto-selection of the type in the Assign dilog': These settings relte to the behvior in the 'Assign dilog', 'New cuse dilog', nd 'New effect dilog' windows. If the checkbox is ctivted, the first ssignble element is found nd displyed in the window utomticlly. If the checkbox is dectivted, you must first select ctegory in the window on the left. Then the first ssignble element of this ctegory is displyed in the window on the right. 'Enble disply of errors nd wrnings in the ssign dilog tree': If the checkbox is checked, error messges nd wrnings re displyed in the 'Assign dilog'

41 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings 4 Dt Mtrix code reder settings 'Use Dt Mtrix Code reder': If the checkbox is ctivted, you cn use reding device to red in the Dt Mtrix codes on lyout pln. During this process, the device type nd the seril number of the devices re red-in. 'Port:': Port for the reding device The following cn be set in the 'Seril communiction prmeters' ctegory: 'Bud rte:': The bud rte specifies the symbols to be trnsferred per time unit. 'Prity bits:': Type of prity control coding 'Dt bits:': Amount of dt for trnsfer 'Stop bits:': Dt trnsfer stop bit 'enble DTR': If the checkbox is ctivted, the redy stte of the destintion dt terminl will be indicted by n interfce control signl. 'enble RTS': If the checkbox is ctivted, the redy stte of the sending dt terminl will be indicted by n interfce control signl being sent to the destintion dt terminl. The settings of the 'Seril communiction prmeters' do not pply for reding devices with USB-COM port. The settings only go into effect when you reopen the 'Assign dilog' window. See lso 2 Assignment with Dt Mtrix code [ 88]

42 4 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings Editing The following cn be set in the 'Editing' view: 'Quicktext proposls filtrtion style': To mke entering texts in SintesoWorks esier, texts tht hve lredy been entered re listed s proposed texts. 'first letters': First letters re compred. 'contin string': The letter sequence t ny position in the word is compred. 'Mximum proposls count': Number of proposed texts tht re sved. 'Reset proposls': Delete existing proposed texts. 'Edit proposls': Enter or edit proposed texts. 'Import proposls': Import proposed texts in the '.properties' formt. 'Export proposls': Export proposed texts in the '.properties' formt. 'Ignore mouse wheel': If you check this checkbox, the mouse wheel of the computer mouse will be dectivted. This prevents settings in drop-down list being unintentionlly chnged if you re scrolling in the detil editor with the mouse wheel. The setting 'Ignore mouse wheel' does not go into effect until you select new element in the structure tree. The setting is not yet dopted for the currently selected element. See lso 2 Entering quicktext [ 81] Firmwre pckge In the view 'Firmwre pckge', you cn define the pth to the folder in which firmwre files re sved. This folder lso stores files tht re imported using the 'Import new resource pckge' function. See lso 2 Resources import [ 47]

43 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings Help In the 'Help' view, you cn define the pth to the folder in which help files re sved. This folder lso stores files tht re imported using the 'Import new resource pckge' function. See lso 2 Resources import [ 47] Internet The 'Internet' view contins detils for Internet ccess to the LRC web server. The Internet ccess is used for loding, renewing or returning the licenses. You hve three options: Without proxy: The checkbox 'Enble proxy' is unchecked. Vi proxy: The checkbox 'Enble proxy' is checked. The informtion on 'Proxy host:' nd 'Proxy port:' is provided by the IT dministrtor. Vi proxy with uthentiction: The checkboxes 'Enble proxy' nd 'Enble proxy uthentiction' re checked. Plese sk your IT dministrtor bout the ccess method you should use nd whether 'MTU size for DSL connection:' needs to be dpted. See lso 2 Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) [ 47]

44 4 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings LRC web server The following cn be set in the 'LRC server' view: 'LRC server URL:': The URL for the LRC web server 'Server user nme:': The user nme for the LRC web server 'Server pssword:': The pssword for the LRC web server The user nme nd pssword re sved here by clicking on the 'Remember user nme nd pssword' option in the 'License wizrd' window. 'Trcebility' The following cn be set in the 'Trcebility' view: 'Alwys try uplod t strtup': If there is n Internet connection, LRC dt is loded to the LRC server utomticlly when the Engineering Tool strts. 'Enble bckground trce uplod': If there is n Internet connection, LRC dt is loded to the LRC server utomticlly in the bckground. See lso 2 Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) [ 47] Periphery updte In the 'Periphery updte' view, the ports for updting the peripherl devices cn be defined: For devices tht re connected directly to the COM port. For devices tht re connected vi USB or FDUZ22x. The settings re utomticlly set s stndrd when device is updted

45 Softwre dministrtion Pre-settings SintesoView The following cn be set in the 'SintesoView' view: 'Connect SintesoView utomticlly to the lst connected sttion when opening SintesoView tskcrd': If the checkbox is ctivted, then SintesoView will be connected utomticlly when you open the 'SintesoView' tsk crd. The connection is mde with the most recently connected 'Sttion'. The connection must be set up once mnully fter SintesoWorks hs strted. 'SintesoView fvorite list': In this list, you cn sve frequently used 'Sttions' with the connection detils. The 'Sttions' in the Fvorites list re listed in the 'SintesoView' > 'Connect to fvorite' menu. This mkes it possible for you SintesoView to connect quickly nd esily with 'Sttions'. 'Add new fvorite': Adding new 'Sttion' to the Fvorites list. 'Edit selected fvorite': Edit 'Sttion' in the Fvorites list. 'Delete selected fvorite': Delete 'Sttion' from the Fvorites list. Adding new 'Sttion' to the Fvorites list 1. Click on 'Add new fvorite'. The 'Add new fvorite sttion' window opens. 2. Enter the nme, IP ddress, 'Sttion' ID, nd PIN of the 'Sttion'

46 4 Softwre dministrtion BDV import 3. Click on 'OK'. The 'Sttion' is dded to the Fvorites list. In the tsk crd 'SintesoView', the 'Sttion' re listed in the 'SintesoView' > 'Connect to fvorite' menu. See lso 2 SintesoView [ 67] 2 Connecting SintesoView [ 112] Site The following cn be set in the 'Site' view: Pth to the folder where the 'Sites' re stored. Pth to the 'BDV' folder: This folder contins the BDV tht ws included when the softwre ws instlled or tht hs been imported using the 'Import new BDV' function. This folder my contin more thn one BDV. Preferred BDV lnguge: This selection determines which BDV lnguge is displyed if the BDV contins severl lnguges. If the preferred lnguge is not included in the current BDV, English is used s stndrd. 4.5 BDV import A BDV cn be mde vilble in File by clicking on the 'Import new BDV' > 'SintesoWorks' menu item. During this import process, the BDV is sved into the stndrd BDV pth from selectble loction. All imported BDVs re kept in list which indictes the BDVs permitted for producing new 'Site' or chnging n existing 'Site'. When importing new BDV, you will be sked whether you wish to delete old BDVs. Existing 'Sites' hve sved the BDV used with the 'Site' dt nd do not need ccess to the BDV in the forementioned stndrd BDV pth. You cn therefore delete old BDVs if you do not wish to crete ny 'Sites' with old BDVs or convert 'Sites' into n old BDV. See lso 2 BDV: File nme nd version [ 37]

47 Softwre dministrtion Resources import Resources import New resources cn be mde vilble in File by clicking the menu item 'Import new resource pckge' > 'SintesoWorks'. The following resources cn be imported: Firmwre Peripherl firmwre Help file The resources re identified by their file nme nd file extension nd sved in the corresponding stndrd directories. The stndrd directories cn be defined in the 'Options' > 'Generl' menu. See lso 2 Firmwre: File nme nd version [ 38] 4.7 Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) With the Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC), the licensing nd the 'Site' dt storge re regulted. For this, the LRC web dtbse is used, web ppliction in SintesoWorks. Licensing Ech orgniztionl unit receives its own licenses for its users of SintesoWorks. The user must be registered on the LRC web server. Users my lod their licenses using tool function. The licenses re vlid for three, six or twelve months. Before the expiry of the license, the user must renew it. Two licenses re required: The primry license mkes it possible to work with SintesoWorks. The defult license enbles the communiction between the 'Sttions'. 'Site' dt storge The user of SintesoWorks must regulrly, e.g. monthly, store prts list of the 'Sites' he hs creted on the LRC web server. There is function for this in SintesoWorks. See lso 2 Sving prts list for the 'Site' [ 53] Loding / renewing licenses You my lod licenses with the 'Retrieve your licenses.' option. The 'Renew your licenses.' option cn be used to renew licenses soon before or fter they expire. This option cn be selected t the erliest 60 dys before the licenses' expirtion dte. Loding or renewing licenses online w w w You hve n ccount on the LRC web server. You re member of registered orgniztionl unit. You hve received n e-mil with the required informtion (URL, user nme, pssword). 1. Lunch Engineering Tool. 2. In the menu br, click on 'File' > 'Mnge licenses'. The following window is opened:

48 4 Softwre dministrtion Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) 3. Select 'Mnge your licenses online (recommended).'. 4. Select 'Retrieve your licenses.' or 'Renew your licenses.'. 5. Click on 'Next'. The following window is opened:

49 Softwre dministrtion Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) 4 6. Enter your user nme nd the pssword nd click on 'Finish'. The connection with the LRC web server is estblished. The user nme nd the pssword re uthenticted. The licenses for the corresponding softwre version of SintesoWorks re generted. The following window opens nd the instlled licenses re listed: 7. Click on 'Restrt tool'. SintesoWorks is restrted

50 4 Softwre dministrtion Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) Loding or renewing licenses offline If you do not hve connection with the LRC web server you will hve to lod or renew the licenses off-line. w You know the instlltion code. You find the instlltion code under 'Help' > 'About'. 1. Contct the HQ Administrtor by phone or emil to pply for the licenses. The HQ Administrtor then checks the membership of your orgniztionl unit nd verifies whether other instlltion codes re registered with the sme user ccount. The HQ Administrtor cretes the identities, genertes the licenses nd sends you the files on CD or by e-mil. 2. In the menu br, click on 'File' > 'Mnge licenses'. The following window opens: 3. Select 'Mnge your licenses offline (for this option, plese contct your dministrtor).' nd 'Instll your licenses.'. 4. Click on 'Next'. The following window opens nd the instlltion code is displyed

51 Softwre dministrtion Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) 4 5. Click on 'Browse' nd select the license file. 6. Click on 'Finish'. The licenses for the corresponding softwre version of SintesoWorks re generted. The following window opens nd the instlled licenses re listed: 7. Click on 'Restrt tool'. SintesoWorks is restrted

52 4 Softwre dministrtion Lifecycle Responsibility Concept (LRC) Returning licenses If SintesoWorks is being instlled on new PC, the licenses on the previously used PC must be returned nd then reloded on the new PC. Returning licenses online w w SintesoWorks is still instlled nd the licenses hve not expired. The previously used PC is not defective. 1. In the menu br, click on 'File' > 'Mnge licenses'. The 'License wizrd' window opens. 2. Highlight 'Mnge your licenses online (recommended).'. 3. Highlight 'Uninstll the current licenses.'. 4. Click on 'Next'. The 'License wizrd' window for entering the pssword is opened. 5. Enter your user nme nd the pssword nd click on 'Finish'. The connection with the LRC web server is estblished. The user nme nd the pssword re uthenticted. The LRC web server is informed bout the return of the licenses. The instlltion code is deleted from the user profile. The license dt on the hrd disk is deleted. The 'License wizrd' window is opened long with the confirmtion messge. 6. Click on 'Restrt tool'. SintesoWorks is restrted with the messge 'Licence missing'. Returning licenses offline If you re not connected to the LRC web server or the previously used PC is defective, the licenses must be returned offline. 1. Inform the HQ Administrtor by phone or E-mil bout the PC chnge nd stte the instlltion code of the new PC. The HQ Administrtor ccepts the chnge nd chnges the instlltion code in the user profile on the LRC web server. 2. Uninstll SintesoWorks Disply licensing informtion You cn disply informtion bout the instlled licenses s follows: 1. Select 'Help' > 'About' from the menu br. 2. Click in the new window on the following button: The 'Instlled licenses' window opens. Informtion bout the instlled licenses is displyed, e.g. expirtion dte nd license keeper

53 Softwre dministrtion License key Instlling severl different engineering tool sets Severl engineering tool sets with different country or lnguge versions cn be instlled on one PC. w You hve downloded two engineering tool sets, A nd B, from the LRC web server or received them on dt crrier. 1. Instll engineering tool set A. 2. Lod the licenses for orgniztionl unit A from the LRC web server for engineering tool set A. 3. Instll engineering tool set B. 4. Lod the licenses for orgniztionl unit B from the LRC web server for engineering tool set B Sving prts list for the 'Site' You cn sve prts list of the currently loded 'Site' by loding the files on to the LRC web server. Select 'File' > 'Uplod trcebility report' from the menu br. SintesoWorks is connected with the LRC web server. The prts list of the currently loded 'Site' is loded on to the LRC web server. 4.8 License key License keys re needed to enble sttions for network functions. A mximum of one license key cn be instlled in ech 'Sttion'. Some exmples of network functions re: SintesoView BACnet for mngement sttions Sinteso Mobile Sinteso Touch PC You will find more informtion bout license keys in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 4.9 Clling up log files of Engineering Tool You cn open the directory contining the log files of Engineering Tool vi the strt menu: Strt > All Progrms > Siemens > F-FX2030 > [Version] 1 > Log files 1 [Version] = Version of the softwre

54 5 GUI Overview of the progrm window 5 GUI 5.1 Overview of the progrm window 1 Title br 6 Hyperlinks 2 Menu br 7 Sttus br 3 Tsk crds 8 Tree 4 Tble 9 Toolbr 5 Detil editor

55 GUI Menu br Menu br The menu structure nd menu items re fixed for ech tsk crd. Individul menu items my be shded out depending on the tsk crd selected. Menu items tht cn not be run re shded gry. There re the following min menus nd submenus: Min menu Submenu Description File New site Crete new 'Site' Open Sve Sve s... Site properties Close Mnge licenses Import new BDV Open the existing configurtion of 'Site' Sve the current configurtion of the 'Site' Sve the current configurtion under new nme Disply nd edit 'Site' properties Exit the currently open configurtion Lod, renew or return license Import BDV Import new resource pckge Import of the following pckges: Firmwre, help Uplod trcebility report SiB-X export Reports Site export (XML) Compre sites CSV import CSV export Show CSV import log [List of the most recently opened 'Sites'] Exit Lod the prts list of the currently loded 'Site' on the LRC server Export configurtion dt in SIB-X formt Crete reports vi the 'Site' Export the 'Site' in XML formt Compre configurtions or BDVs Import dt in CSV formt Export dt in CSV file Displying the protocol of the CSV import Open one of the most recently opened 'Sites' Exit SintesoWorks

56 5 GUI Menu br Min menu Submenu Description Edit New sttion Crete new 'Sttion' New sttion with ddress New element Undo Redo Copy Cut Pste Pste without children Delete Combi delete Replce element Show replce element log Chnge element ddress: -1 Chnge element ddress: +1 Merge sites Exchnge logo in site Convert site Show conversion log Import lines... Remove import informtion Show import log Creting new 'Sttion' with individul ddress entering Crete new element Undo the lst ction Restore the lst undo ction Copy elements or vlues Cut elements or vlues Pste elements or vlues Pste element without child elements Delete element Cn only be executed in the tsk crd 'Hrdwre'. Deletes element long with referenced logicl element. Replcing element Decrese the ddress of the selected element s well s ll higher elements by one Increse the ddress of the selected element s well s ll higher elements by one Merge two 'Sites' Chnge disply logo Convert the configurtion of the 'Site' Disply the conversion log Trnsferring lines from other existing systems Reset from migrtion mode to norml mode Shows the log file View Find Find elements by different serch criteri Find nd replce Find next Progress Show problems Show ll problems Find nd replce elements by different serch criteri Jump from one hit to the next Open the 'Progress' window Displying problems of n element Displying problems of the entire 'Site'

57 GUI Menu br 5 Min menu Submenu Description Commissioning Assign Open the 'Assign' window to ssign elements Unssign Crete nd Assign Disconnect Initilize sttion Downlod site Uplod site Crete bckup embedded configurtion Uplod site event memory Uplod site log files Dignostics report Hndover site Hndover sttion Delete ssignment Open the 'Crete nd Assign' window to simultneously crete nd ssign devices Interrupt communiction to 'Sttion' Initilize 'Sttion' Lod.the configurtion of the 'Site' in the 'Sttion' Lod configurtion of the 'Site' to the PC Crete bckup of the'site' configurtion Lod the event memory of the 'Site' to the PC Lod the log files from the selectble 'Sttions' to the PC Crete reports vi the 'Site' Trnsfer the configurtion of the 'Site' to third-prtysite' Trnsfer the identity of 'Sttion' to third-prtysttion' Updte Periphery updte wizrd Updte the firmwre of peripherl devices Disconnect FW updte min CPU FW updte dditionl CPUs FW updte min nd dditionl CPUs Disconnect the connection to the sttion Updte the firmwre of the min CPU SintesoView Connect Connect SintesoView Connect to fvorite Add to fvorites Disconnect Updte the firmwre of the dditionl CPUs Updting the firmwre of the min CPU nd the dditionl CPUs Connect SintesoView with 'Sttion' from the Fvorites list Add connected 'Sttion' to the Fvorites list Disconnect SintesoView Network Reset network configurtion Set stndrd vlues for the IP ddresses nd network msks of ll sub-nets. Overwrite ll mnul chnges to these vlues. Reset sub-net network configurtion Convert to GAP Convert to SAFEDLINK host Convert to ethernet host Crete GAP configurtion Set stndrd vlues for the IP ddresses nd network msks of ll selected sub-nets. Overwrite ll mnul chnges to these vlues. See chpter 'Site configurtion, sttus MP2.1 [ 394]' for site configurtion ( BDV <32) Options Preferences Set the softwre pre-settings Help Help Disply documenttion View dditionl documents &Show shortcuts About View dditionl documents Show keybord shortcut Disply detils of the instlled version

58 5 GUI Toolbr 5.3 Toolbr The toolbr llows the opertor to ccess functions quickly. The following functions cn be run directly vi the toolbr: Symbol Menu Item Description 'New site Opens the 'Crete new site' window 'Open' 'Sve' 'Reports' 'Copy' 'Cut' 'Pste' 'Pste without children' 'Delete' 'Undo' 'Redo' 'New sttion' 'New element' 'Open progress view' 'Find' 'Help' 'Downlod site' 'Uplod site' 'Assign' 'Crete nd Assign' Opens existing 'Site' Sves the current configurtion of the 'Site' Opens the 'Reports' window Copies selected elements or vlues Cuts selected elements or vlues Pstes copied elements or vlues Pstes copied elements without children elements Deletes selected elements/subtrees Undoes the lst ction Restores the most recent ction tht ws undone Opens nd closes the 'New sttion' window Opens nd closes the 'New element' window Opens nd closes the 'Progress' window Opens the 'Find' window Opens the documenttion overview Lods the configurtion of the 'Site' to the 'Sttion' Lods the configurtion of the 'Site' to the PC Opens nd closes the 'Assign' window for ssigning elements Opens nd closes the 'Crete nd Assign' window for simultneous creting nd ssigning of devices

59 GUI Help nd tooltips Help nd tooltips There re two sources of informtion in SintesoWorks: Help Tooltips Help There re three wys of clling up the Help function: Press <F1>. Select 'Help' > 'Help' from the menu br. Click on the symbol in the toolbr. A PDF document contining n overview of the documenttion opens. To open document, click on its nme in the overview. Tooltips Tooltips re windows within the softwre with context-sensitive detil informtion. Tooltips re shown when the mouse pointer is moved over element designtion or element property in the detil editor. Figure 1: Exmple for the Tooltip of n element property To disply the Tooltip of n element, proceed s follows: 1. Highlight n element in the tree view. The element nd its properties re displyed in the detil editor. 2. In the detil editor, move the mouse pointer over the element designtion in the uppermost tb. The Tooltip is displyed. Figure 2: Exmple for the Tooltip of n element

60 5 GUI Templte for customer dt 5.5 Templte for customer dt When creting new 'Site', form for entering customer-specific dt opens in the 'Crete new site' window. The dt tht is entered in the 'Cretor:' section cn be sved s the stndrd templte by clicking 'Set cretor vlues s defult'. See lso 2 Creting new 'site' [ 74] 5.6 Tsk crds The tsk crds show different perspectives of 'Site' in the progrm window. The 'Site' is configured in the perspectives. Every tsk crd hs nme nd its own icon. The prticulr perspective is shown when tsk crd is clicked. Figure 3: Tsk crds SintesoWorks hs the following tsk crds: 'Hrdwre': Configurtion nd disply of ll hrdwre components of 'Site' 'Detection': Configurtion nd disply of the detection pplictions 'Control': Configurtion nd disply of the control pplictions 'Opertion': Configurtion nd disply of the globl 'Site' settings nd of the operting properties of ll operting nd disply devices within the 'Site' 'Network': Configurtion nd disply of the network 'SintesoView': With 'SintesoView', 'Sttion' connected to the PC cn be viewed or viewed nd operted. See lso 2 Overview of the progrm window [ 54]

61 GUI Tsk crd components Tsk crd components Ech tsk crd hs the following components: Structure tree Tble Detil editor Hyperlinks Structure tree The disply nd function of the structure tree correspond to the structure tree in Windows Explorer. Ech element in the structure tree is displyed using n icon nd text. The elements contin configurtion dt. The root element of ech structure tree is the 'Site' element. Problems nd specil instructions re shown with red nd yellow exclmtion mrks in the structure tree. You will find more informtion in chpter 'Error indiction nd problem identifiction [ 65]'. Tble The child elements of the highlighted element in the tree re shown in the tble. If highlighted element in the structure tree hs no child element, the tble remins empty. The tble provides selection of the most importnt properties of the child elements. Elements tht cn not be edited re shded gry. Detil editor The detil editor shows properties of n element or severl highlighted elements within the tble or the structure tree. If no element in the tble is highlighted, the properties of the element highlighted in the structure re shown. The properties of n element re depicted in vrious tbs. If n element is ssigned, then n dditionl tb will be displyed with the designtion of the ssigned tsk crd. This tb contins the properties of the 'Overview' tb of the ssigned element. Hyperlinks Hyperlinks re shown in the lower prt of the detil editor, provided tht the selected element is ssigned to other elements. The view chnges to the ssigned element of the corresponding tsk crd by clicking on hyperlink. 5.8 Scroll brs nd window seprting lines Control elements in the softwre, e.g. scroll brs nd window seprting lines, correspond to the Windows stndrd. Scroll brs re utomticlly displyed s required nd ech window cn be expnded nd minimized t window seprting line

62 5 GUI Expnding nd collpsing the elements in the structure tree 5.9 Expnding nd collpsing the elements in the structure tree An element with subtree cn be expnded or collpsed ccording to functionlity in Windows Explorer. Elements in the structure tree cn be expnded nd collpsed s follows: Click on the buttons '+' or ' ' next to tree element. Double-click on n element. Highlight the element nd press the right or left rrow key. To expnd or collpse ll of the elements in subtree, proceed s follows: Highlight the element nd press <*> or </> on the numeric keypd Highlight the element nd click on the '+' or ' ' buttons on the upper right in the structure tree. Figure 4: Buttons for expnding nd collpsing subtree Filtering the elements in the structure tree The filter function is used to disply certin elements when the structure tree is expnded nd collpsed. The serch field for the filter function is locted on the top right of the tree structure next to the '+' nd ' ' buttons. Chrcter strings cn be entered in the filter function serch field. When the structure tree is expnded nd collpsed with the '+' nd ' ' buttons, only elements contining the defined chrcter string re displyed. The chrcter strings entered cn contin the wildcrd '*' Multiselection Multiselection llows, e.g. entry of customer text for severl elements in one procedure. Multiselection is possible in the tble nd in the tree view. Selecting one or more lines corresponds to the Windows stndrd. If severl elements re selected in the tree view, nothing is indicted in the tble. The intersection of selected elements is displyed in the detil editor. If the properties of the selected elements re different then the pproprite field is shown in the detil editor by qudrtes. Following multiselection, the tb nme in the detil editor is 'Multiselection'. Figure 5: Multiselection Becuse of dynmic loding you cn select mximum of eight 'Sttions' in the tree nd tble t the sme time. See lso 2 Dynmic loding [ 70]

63 GUI Nvigting within the progrm window Nvigting within the progrm window Nvigtion in the progrm window functions ccording to the Windows stndrd. Nvigtion between the tsk crds or the perspectives of 'Site' is specific to SintesoWorks. Opening perspective or chnging from one perspective to the other is possible using the following control elements: Tsk crds Hyperlinks Shortcuts You will find informtion on operting elements in the following chpters Nvigting with tsk crds Click on tsk crd to switch to the corresponding perspective. Figure 6: Tsk crds See lso 2 Overview of the progrm window [ 54] Nvigting with hyperlinks You cn use hyperlinks to nvigte between the tsk crds. If n element is ssigned, the link is indicted by hyperlink in the bottom prt of the detil editor. The view chnges to the ssigned element when you click on hyperlink. Figure 7: Detil editor with hyperlink See lso 2 Overview of the progrm window [ 54]

64 5 GUI Sttus br Nvigting with shortcuts The tble below lists the shortcuts. Description Chnging between tsk crds Chnging between windows of tsk crd Opening nd closing subtrees Nvigting between elements in the structure tree Shortcut <Ctrl> + <F8> <Ctrl> + <F7> Left or right rrow keys Up or down rrow keys Nvigting between columns of the tble Tb Left or right rrow keys (prt from in editing mode; then only if the entire field is highlighted) Nvigting between lines of the tble <Enter> or <Shift> + <Enter> Tb in the lst column Right rrow key in the lst column (prt from in editing mode; then only if the entire field is highlighted) Up or down rrow keys (prt from in editing mode) Editing cells in the tble <F2> Nvigting between the tbs in the detil editor <Ctrl> + <Pge Up> or <Ctrl> + <Pge Down> Arrow keys if the tbs re highlighted Nvigting between the prmeters of tb in the detil editor <Tb> or <Shift> + <Tb> 5.12 Sttus br The following informtion is displyed on the sttus br: The problem description of selected element. A symbol for informtion on the connection sttus between 'Sttion' nd the PC. Figure 8: Sttus br

65 GUI Error indiction nd problem identifiction Error indiction nd problem identifiction 'Error' when loding to the 'Sttion' An 'Error' prevents the configurtion being loded to the 'Sttion'. The following messge is displyed: Open the 'All problems' window to disply the errors for the entire 'Site'. Or Disply the errors for one element. Displying the 'Error' for the entire 'Site' 1. Select 'View' > 'Show ll problems' from the menu br. The 'All problems' window opens. The 'All problems' window displys 'Error', 'Wrning', nd 'Info' entries relting to the configurtion of the entire 'Site'. 2. In the 'All problems' window, double-click on n entry to disply the element. The respective tsk crd opens nd the element is displyed in the structure tree. If you ctivte the checkbox 'Invisible', then problems in elements will be displyed which re not visible to the user. This cn be helpful for troubleshooting with the hotline

66 5 GUI Error indiction nd problem identifiction Displying the 'Error' for one element Red the informtion in the sttus br t the bottom edge of the progrm window nd / or click on the informtion in the sttus br. Or 1. Right-click on n element with red or yellow exclmtion mrk. 2. In the shortcut menu, select the 'Show problems' menu item. Or 1. Highlight n element with red or green exclmtion mrk. 2. Select 'View' > 'Show problems' from the menu br. The 'Problems' window opens. In the 'Problems' window, n 'Error', 'Wrning', or 'Info' entry concerning the element selected is displyed. If the highlighted element hs only one problem, then the problem will be described in the sttus br. If the element hs severl problems, then the number of problems will be displyed in the sttus br. Figure 9: Sttus br with problem description Figure 10: Sttus br with number of problems

67 GUI SintesoView 5 'Error' nd 'Wrning' identifiction in the tree view Red exclmtion mrk next to n element: 'Error', e.g., indmissible or duplicte element Yellow exclmtion mrk next to n element: 'Wrning', e.g., missing link A 'Site' cn be stored on the PC even if there is n 'Error'. Figure 11: 'Error' in the tree view See lso 2 Dynmic loding [ 70] 5.14 SintesoView SintesoView is softwre for the PC which cn be used to disply the Person Mchine Interfce of 'Sttion' on the PC. For exmple, it cn be used to ccess the site for mintennce purposes. Depending on the opertion mode, SintesoView cn either be used for disply purposes or for disply nd opertion purposes. The link between SintesoView nd 'Sttion' cn be structured s follows: Locl connection vi ny 'Sttion' in the system Connection vi the Globl Access Point (GAP) SintesoView is n integrted prt of SintesoWorks, but cn lso be instlled on PC s the stndlone ppliction 'FXS2009'. You will need n instlled license key nd pproprite uthoriztion for the 'Sttion' in order to use SintesoView. The license key must support the SintesoView function. The license key need only be instlled in the 'Sttion' tht hs the Person Mchine Interfce tht is to be displyed in SintesoView. You will find more informtion bout license keys in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The connection to 'Sttion' with license key is lso possible vi 'Sttion' without license key. SintesoView hs the sme visibility s the connected 'Sttion'. You cn therefore gin globl visibility with SintesoView in networked site. To do so, the license key must be instlled in 'Sttion' with globl visibility nd connected to SintesoView

68 5 GUI SintesoView SintesoView is opened vi the 'SintesoView' tsk crd in the progrm window. 001 AAA 001 ABC ABC YYYY 1 ZZZ ABCDEFGHI ZZZ ABCDEFGHI ZZZ ABCDEFGHI Figure 12: Exmple for SintesoView in 'View nd Operte' opertion mode (red frme) The button with the loudspeker symbol (bottom right in the figure) is used to switch n ctivted buzzer on nd off. However it is only possible to switch the buzzer on nd off on the PC nd not on the connected sttion. The connection with 'Sttion' is shown by the Person Mchine Interfce (disply, LEDs, keys) trnsmitted. The 'SintesoView ccess' opertion mode is indicted by red frme round the Person Mchine Interfce. An enble grnted for SintesoView is retined when 'Sttion' restrted. SintesoView hs the following opertion modes: 'Limited ccess (view only)' 'Full ccess (view/opertion)' For both opertion modes, n uthoriztion must be configured on the 'Sttion'. In ddition, license key must be instlled. The license key must support the SintesoView function. You will find more informtion bout license keys in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 'Limited ccess (view only)' In this opertion mode, SintesoView indictes the sme s the 'Sttion' connected to it, but you cnnot operte the linked 'Sttion'. The figure in SintesoView indictes the disply with ll indicted texts, ll LEDs in their current stte nd ll buttons

69 GUI SintesoView 5 'Full ccess (view/opertion)' In this opertion mode, the connected 'Sttion' is visulized s in the 'Limited ccess (view only)' opertion mode. Additionlly, the 'Sttion' cn be operted with SintesoView, while norml opertion on the 'Sttion' is blocked, but cn be rectivted. As opertion on 'Sttion' must hve priority, this restriction (blocking) on the 'Sttion' cn be cnceled t ny time. Ech time n ttempt is mde to operte the 'Sttion', window is displyed with the option to bort the connection with SintesoView. The LED test lso tests the disply. However, the LEDs re not displyed in 'SintesoView'. You will find more informtion on configuring permnent opertion mode for SintesoView in chpter 'Configuring permnent ccess for SintesoView [ 151]'. See lso 2 SintesoView [ 45] 2 Connecting SintesoView [ 112]

70 5 GUI Dynmic loding 5.15 Dynmic loding To increse the performnce of 'SintesoWorks', not ll 'Sttions' re loded to the softwre t the sme time for 'Sites' with more thn eight 'Sttions'. 'Sttions' tht re not loded re shown in gry nd in itlics. The 'Sttions' re dynmiclly loded nd unloded, depending on the selection. You cn lod mximum of eight 'Sttions' t the sme time. The following sections describe dynmic loding in vrious softwre functions. Structure tree view As soon s 'Sttion' tht is not loded is clicked on, it is loded. You cn highlight mximum of eight 'Sttions' t the sme time. If you highlight more thn eight 'Sttions', n error messge ppers. Figure 13: Structure tree view with sttions tht re nd re not loded History of the 'Sttions' Only the history of the 'Sttions' tht is currently loded is displyed on the 'History' tb of the 'Site properties' window s stndrd. If you would like to see the history of ll 'Sttions', click on 'Get sttion logs'. Serch function For the functions 'Find' nd 'Find nd replce', you cn specify whether only the loded 'Sttions' or not only the loded 'Sttions' but lso those which re not loded re to be included. Designtion of problems nd displying errors The 'Sttions' tht re not loded re shown in gry in the 'All problems' window. If you would like to view the errors nd wrnings of 'Sttion' tht is not loded, click on the 'Sttion' to lod it

71 GUI Dynmic loding 5 'Assign' function When elements re ssigned with the 'Assign' function, the 'Sttions' tht re not loded re shown in gry. If you would like to crete link to n element of 'Sttion' tht is not loded, you must click on the 'Sttion' to lod it. Figure 14: Window with sttions tht re nd re not loded The buttons below cn be used to nvigte through the list of elements tht cn be ssigned in sequence. Elements tht re not loded re then loded. See lso 2 Error indiction nd problem identifiction [ 65] 2 Finding [ 91] 2 Finding nd replcing [ 92] 2 Editing 'site' properties [ 75]

72 6 Progrm opertion Creting site 6 Progrm opertion It is possible tht SintesoWorks will strt to run slightly slower over time, e.g., fter extensive copying / psting or when creting / deleting lrge number of 'Sttions'. If this hppens, we would recommend reloding the 'Site'. SintesoWorks will then work normlly gin. 6.1 Creting site The following possibilities re open to you when you crete 'Site': Lod existing 'Site' in SintesoWorks Crete 'Site' bsed on n existing configurtion Crete new 'Site' You will find informtion on the procedures in the following chpters Loding n existing 'site' NOTICE Unuthorized chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # 'Site' my not be ble to be sved or loded. Do not use ny of the following chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # The progress of the 'Uplod from sttion(s)' is shown in the sttus br. If communiction between the PC nd 'Sttion' is interrupted, messge indicting tht the uplod hs been borted is displyed. w w The 'Site' lredy contins configurtion. The PC is connected to 'Sttion'. 1. Select 'File' > 'New site' from the menu br or click on the following button in the toolbr: The first 'Crete new site' window opens. 2. Select the 'Uplod from sttion(s)' option. 3. Click on 'Next'. The configurtion of the 'Site' is loded in SintesoWorks. The second 'Crete new site' window opens. 4. Enter the required informtion, e.g. the 'Site' nme. 5. Click on 'Crete'. The 'Site' is creted in SintesoWorks. See lso 2 Editing 'site' properties [ 75]

73 Progrm opertion Creting site Crete 'Site' bsed on n existing configurtion NOTICE Unuthorized chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # 'Site' my not be ble to be sved or loded. Do not use ny of the following chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # w w The configurtion file to be copied is vilble on the PC. The configurtion file hs the '.fsc' extension. 1. Select 'File' > 'New site' from the menu br or click on the following button in the toolbr: The 'Crete new site' window opens. 2. Select the 'Crete bsed on existing configurtion' option. 3. Select the configurtion file to be copied from 'Existing configurtion:'. 4. Click on 'Next'. The configurtion file is copied. The 'Site properties' window opens. 5. Enter the required informtion, e.g. the 'Site' nme. 6. Click on 'OK'. The 'Site' is creted. See lso 2 Editing 'site' properties [ 75]

74 6 Progrm opertion Creting site Creting new 'site' NOTICE Unuthorized chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # 'Site' my not be ble to be sved or loded. Do not use ny of the following chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # Use s test site To identify 'Site' s test site, the vlue 'Test site' must be set in the properties for 'LRC site usge'. The 'Site' identified s test site must not be used for ctul fire detection in customer site. When site dt is evluted on the LRC server, distinction is mde between test site nd customer site. All site dt is loded onto the LRC server, regrdless of how it hs been identified. 1. Lunch Engineering Tool. 2. Select 'File' > 'New site' from the menu br or click on in the toolbr. The 'Crete new site' window opens. 3. Select the 'Crete new' option. 4. Select the BDV. 5. Click on 'Next'. The BDV is being loded. The 'Crete new site' window opens. 6. Enter the required informtion, e.g., the 'Site' nme. Mndtory fields re highlighted with n sterisk (*). 7. Click on 'Crete'. The 'Site' is creted. See lso 2 Editing 'site' properties [ 75] 2 Templte for customer dt [ 60]

75 Progrm opertion Creting site Editing 'site' properties NOTICE Unuthorized chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # 'Site' my not be ble to be sved or loded. Do not use ny of the following chrcters in the 'Site' nme or in the pth: < > / \ :? * " % # w The 'Site' is loded. 1. Click on the 'File' > 'Site properties' menu item or use the shortcut <Ctrl> + <I>. The 'Site properties' window opens. 2. Edit the properties. Fields mrked with '*' must be completed. 3. Select the 'Comment' tb to enter comment. The comment cn be mx chrcters long. Click the 'Add time nd dte ' button to dd the current dte nd time. This enbles you to enter comments with time stmp. 4. Select the 'Site' tb to disply the log file of the 'History'

76 6 Progrm opertion Creting sttion 6.2 Creting sttion When creting the first 'Sttion', you cn choose between 'Stndlone sttion' nd networked 'Sttions' of types 'SAFEDLINK sttion' nd 'Ethernet sttion'. When 'SAFEDLINK sttion' is creted, it my lredy be ssigned to specific SAFEDLINK sub-net. Additionl 'Sttions' cn only be creted s networked. Figure 15: Window to creting 'sttion' Creting 'Sttion' w A 'Site' hs been creted. 1. Open the 'New sttion' window. This cn be done in the following wys: Click on the symbol in the toolbr. Select 'Edit' > 'New sttion' from the menu br. Right-click in the tree view nd select 'New sttion' in the context menu. The 'New sttion' window opens bove the tble. 2. Select 'Sttion' from the 'Type:' selection list. 3. Select templte from the 'Templte:' selection list. 4. Select the corresponding network for networked 'Sttions'. 5. Select the number of new 'Sttions' in the 'Amount:' field. 6. Click on 'Add'. The 'Sttion' is creted. Networked 'Sttions' Detils for cretion of networked 'Sttions' cn be found in chpter 'Creting networked 'Sttions''

77 Progrm opertion Crete element 6 Creting 'Sttion' with n individul ddress This function is normlly clled up when migrting from old systems if prticulr ddress is to be ssigned to 'Sttion'. Once the 'Sttion' hs been creted, the ddress cnnot be chnged ny more. The mximum vlue tht cn be set for the ddress of the 'Sttion' is Select 'Edit' > 'New sttion with ddress' from the menu br. The 'New sttion with ddress' window opens. 2. Set the desired properties nd click on 'Add'. The 'Sttion' is creted with the ddress entered. See lso 2 Creting networked 'Sttions' [ 359] 6.3 Crete element You cn crete n element in the following wys: In the 'New element' window Vi the context menu in the tree view In the tble Creting n element in the 'New element' window w w w A 'Sttion' hs been creted. An element is selected for which sub-element cn lso be displyed. The 'Site' element is not selected. 1. Open the 'New element' window. This cn be done in the following wys: Click on the symbol in the toolbr. Select 'Edit' > 'New element' from the menu br. Right-click in the tree view nd select 'New element' in the context menu. The 'New element' window opens bove the tble. 2. Select n element from the 'Type:' selection list. 3. Select templte from the 'Templte:' selection list. 4. Select the number of new elements in the 'Amount:' field. 5. Click on 'Add'. The element is creted

78 6 Progrm opertion Crete element Creting n element vi the context menu in the tree view w A 'Sttion' hs been creted. 1. Right click on n element in the tree view below which you wnt to crete n element. 2. In the context menu, select the 'New' nd then select the desired element nd the templte. The element is creted. Creting n element in the tble w A 'Sttion' hs been creted. 1. Select n element in the tree view under which you wnt to crete n element. 2. Double-click on the 'Append...' field in the tble. 3. Select the element type with the corresponding templte from the selection list. The element is creted

79 Progrm opertion Replcing element Replcing element You cn replce the templte of one element with nother templte of the sme element type. In certin cses you cn lso replce n element with n element of nother type. Replcing element 1. In the tree view, highlight the element tht you wish to replce. 2. Select 'Edit' > 'Replce element' from the menu br. The 'Replce element' window opens. 3. Select different element type or different templte. 4. Click on 'Replce'. The element is replced. 5. Check the settings nd the links of the new element nd mke chnges, if necessry. Using the 'Replce element' function for 'Sttions' converts the 'Sttions'. You will find more informtion in chpter 'Converting sttion [ 121]'. 6.5 Delete element An element cn be deleted in the tree or in the tble. The subtree of the element is lso deleted when n element is deleted. If the element tht is to be deleted is referenced in other elements, for exmple in link to 'Cuses' in control, messge ppers indicting tht the references will be deleted t the sme time. If n ssigned logicl chnnel is deleted, the physicl chnnel is no longer ssigned. You cn delete n element s follows: Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Delete' in the menu br Vi the context menu With <Delete>

80 6 Progrm opertion Editing elements 6.6 Editing elements Elements cn be edited in the tble or detil editor. Editing is not possible in the tree view. Editing n element in the tble 1. In the tree view, select the prent element of the element tht you wish to edit. The child element nd its properties re displyed in the tble. 2. Edit the properties of the element in the tble. Editing elements in the detil editor 1. In the tree view, select the element tht you wish to edit. The properties of the highlighted element re displyed in the detil editor. 2. Edit the desired properties. Editing severl elements simultneously 1. In the tree view, select the elements tht you wish to edit. The properties tht re vilble in ll the highlighted elements re displyed in the detil editor. 2. Edit the desired properties. 6.7 Tble The properties will be chnged in ll of the highlighted elements Copying properties in the tble In the tble, you cn copy editble properties of n element, such s customer text, into ny number of djcent cells of other elements. Copying property 1. Click the cell with the property tht you wnt to copy. The cell is mrked by frme. 2. Guide the mouse pointer to the bottom right corner of the highlighted cell. The mouse pointer chnges to white cross. 3. With the left mouse button pressed, drg the white cross over the cells in the sme column into which you wnt to copy the property. Highlighted cells hve gry bckground. 4. Relese the pressed left mouse button. The copying process is complete

81 Progrm opertion Entering quicktext Inserting text in columns Texts cn be inserted in the tble in columns from the clipbord. The texts on the clipbord my be copies of other files, e.g., columns copied from Excel. Exmple: Prepre customer texts for zones in n Excel column, copy the column to the clipbord, nd insert it in the tble in Engineering Tool in column 'Customer text'. Inserting text in columns w The texts required re sved in file, e.g., in n Excel file. 1. Copy the column contining the prepred texts, e.g., the Excel column. 2. In Engineering Tool, highlight the element contining the subelements for which you wish to insert text in columns in the tble, e.g., 'Section'. 3. Right-click on the first element in the column in which you wish to insert text. 4. Select 'Pste vlues from clipbord' in the context menu. The copied texts re inserted in the column from the clipbord. The texts re ssigned to the elements in the tble in scending order of ddress. 6.8 Entering quicktext When writing 'Customer text' nd 'Intervention text' in the detil editor, s in the tble, texts tht hve lredy been used re displyed in list when the first letter or mtching sequence of chrcters is entered. You cn nvigte through the list by scrolling, using the mouse, or using the Up/Down rrow keys nd <Enter>. The list is updted continully s text is entered. See lso 2 Editing [ 42]

82 6 Progrm opertion Copying, cutting, nd psting elements 6.9 Copying, cutting, nd psting elements The functions for copying, cutting nd psting elements correspond to the Windows stndrd nd cn be used in the tree nd the tble s well s between the tree nd the tble. When copying nd cutting, the entire subtree of n element, if it exists, is plced on the clipbord. Copied nd cut elements cn be psted in one fter nother t vrious positions. When psting, the customer text nd other dt re trnsferred. Properties, for exmple the element's ddress, re updted ccording to the new position in the tree. Conditions Elements tht re generted utomticlly when creting prent elements cn not be copied/cut seprtely. The following elements cnnot be copied: Links to elements in the hrdwre tree Links tht re only llowed to exist once in the 'Site' Copying / cutting is only possible within 'Site'. When copying/cutting nd psting between two 'Sttions', both 'Sttions' must be loded. Copying element You cn copy n element s follows: Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Copy' in the menu br With the keybord shortcut <Ctrl> + <C> Psting copied element with subtree You cn pste copied element with subtree s follows: Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Pste' in the menu br With the keybord shortcut <Ctrl> + <V> Psting copied element without subtree You cn pste copied element without subtree s follows 1 : Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Pste without children' in the menu br 1 If the element hs permnent child elements, they re lso psted with the function 'Pste without children'. Exmple: A detector cnnot be psted without the 'Sensor' child element. Cutting element You cn cut n element s follows: Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Cut' in the menu br With the keybord shortcut <Ctrl> + <X>

83 Progrm opertion Moving n element 6 Psting cut element You cn pste cut element s follows: Using the button in the toolbr Using 'Edit' > 'Pste' in the menu br With the keybord shortcut <Ctrl> + <V> 6.10 Moving n element You cn move n element using the stndrd Windows function 'Drg nd drop' or with 'Cut' nd 'Pste'. When drgging n element, the mouse pointer shows whether the element cn be plced t the respective position or on the respective element. An element with child elements cnnot be drgged nd dropped without its child elements. If subtree is moved, then vrious ttributes of the prent element re utomticlly updted, such s the ddress of the element in the zone. If you press the 'Ctrl' key when drgging, the mouse pointer indictes '+' nd copies the element when dropping. An element cn only be moved or copied from one 'Sttion' to nother 'Sttion' if both 'Sttions' re loded. An element cn be moved only within the sme tsk crd. Hndling links when moving Moving elements inside 'Sttion': The links to the hrdwre re lso moved. The links to the control re lso moved. Moving elements between different 'Sttions': The links to the hrdwre re deleted. The links to the control nd detection elements re lso moved

84 6 Progrm opertion Re-ddressing elements 6.11 Re-ddressing elements Elements cn be re-ddressed in the tree view, e.g. to close gps in the ddress sequence or to pste elements into prticulr positions. This ppliction is minly of use in the 'Detection' tsk crd t the 'Zone' level. Depending on the element ctegory, the elements re reddressed either systemwide or only within the prent element. If, for exmple, you reddress 'Zone', then 'Zones' will be reddressed system-wide. If you reddress logicl chnnel in 'Zone', then only the logicl chnnels within the 'Zone' will be reddressed. Before elements re reddressed system-wide, messge is displyed tht you must confirm. Reducing ddress by 1 Gps re produced in the ddress sequence when you delete, cut / pste, move, or re-ddress elements throughout sttions. Proceed s follows to close gps in the ddress sequence: 1. Highlight the element fter the gp in the tree view. 2. Select 'Edit' > 'Chnge element ddress: -1' from the menu br. Depending on the highlighted element, the following window will be displyed: 3. Click on 'Yes'. The ddress of the element selected nd ll elements of the sme level with higher ddresses re decresed by 1 cross the system or within the prent element, respectively

85 Progrm opertion Assigning elements 6 Rising ddress by 1 Proceed s follows to pste n element, e.g. n dditionl 'Zone', to prticulr position in the ddress sequence: 1. Highlight the element before which you wnt to insert n element in the tree view. 2. Select 'Edit' > 'Chnge element ddress: +1' from the menu br. Depending on the highlighted element, the following window will be displyed: 3. Click on 'Yes'. The ddress of the element selected nd ll elements of the sme level with higher ddresses re incresed by 1 cross the system or within the prent element, respectively. A gp ppers in the ddress sequence. 4. Crete new element nd enter the ddress tht corresponds to the gp in the detil editor. The new element is moved to the position of the gp Assigning elements Elements from the sme or different tsk crds cn be ssigned using the 'Assign' function. A physicl chnnel is ssigned to logicl chnnel. Opening 'Assign dilog' The 'Assign dilog' window cn be opened s follows: button in the toolbr 'Commissioning' > 'Assign'' menu item Context menu <Ctrl> + <L> The opened window cn remin open when chnging the tsk crds. In the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd, the 'Assign' function is not vilble

86 6 Progrm opertion Assigning elements Structure of 'Assign dilog' List with ssignble event ctegories, inputs nd outputs 'Mnul type selection': Select individul elements or severl elements by holding the 'CTRL' key down 'Grouped type selection': Select ll elements in ctegory or the entire ctegory 2 Dropdown list to select the tsk crd 3 Checkbox to ctivte serch by ID no. (5) 4 Assign to Dt Mtrix code 5 Dropdown list to select the ID no. 6 Tree view of the ssignble elements: Light gry text: The pth leds to n element tht cnnot be ssigned Bold text: The pth leds to n element tht cn be ssigned Bold chrcters, greyed out: ssignble element Inverted chrcters, blue: highlighted element 7 'Alwys jump to next ssignble element' checkbox: If the checkbox is checked, the next ssignble element is highlighted fter ssigning. 8 'Next ssignble element (ALT+S)' button: Nvigte to the next ssignble element 9 'Previous ssignble element (ALT+W)' button: Nvigte to the previous ssignble element

87 Progrm opertion Assigning elements 6 Assigning elements 1. In the tsk crd tree view, highlight the element you would like to ssign. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 3. Select the ctegory from the list (1). 4. Select the tsk crd in the drop-down list field (2). 5. Serch for the element you wnt using the ID no. (4) or in the tree view (5). 6. Highlight the element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The elements re ssigned. Insted of using the 'Assign' button, you cn use the keybord shortcut <Alt> + <A>. If necessry, severl elements cn be ssigned in this mnner without hving to chnge between the tree view nd the 'Assign dilog' dilog with the mouse. To do this, the 'Alwys jump to next ssignble element' checkbox must be ctivted. By defult, the first ssignble element is found nd displyed utomticlly in the tree view (5). You cn chnge this behvior in the pre-settings. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Generl [ 39]'. See lso 2 Generl [ 39]

88 6 Progrm opertion Assignment with Dt Mtrix code 6.13 Assignment with Dt Mtrix code You cn use reding device for Dt Mtrix code to ssign FDnet devices to 'Zones' using lyout pln. The dhesive lbels of the device re stuck on to the lyout pln. The Dt Mtrix code on the dhesive lbels contins detils bout the type nd the seril number (ID no.) of the device. Devices cn be ssigned mnully or utomticlly. w w w A lyout pln with the stuck on dhesive lbels with Dt Mtrix code is vilble. A reding device for Dt Mtrix code is connected to the PC. In the pre-settings, in the 'Assign' view, the 'Use Dt Mtrix Code reder' checkbox is ctivted nd the correct port hs been selected for the reding device. 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, select the 'Zone' tht you wish to ssign to the devices. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 4. Check the 'Use seril no. ("ID-Nr."):' checkbox. 5. Select the ctegory on the left in the window. Mnul ssignment 1. Red-in the Dt Mtrix code of the desired device on the lyout pln. The corresponding device with the physicl chnnel is highlighted on the right in the window in the 'Hrdwre tree'. 2. Check the displyed seril number on the upper right in the window. 3. Click on 'Assign'. The device is ssigned to the 'Zone'. Automtic ssignment 1. Strt utomtic ssignment. Click the button for utomtic ssignment next to the 'Use seril no. ("ID-Nr."):' checkbox. 2. Red-in the Dt Mtrix code of the desired device on the lyout pln. The device is utomticlly ssigned to the 'Zone'. See lso 2 Assign [ 40]

89 Progrm opertion Assigning elements severl times Assigning elements severl times Multiple ssignment llows severl elements nd event ctegories, inputs, or outputs to be ssigned to ech other t the sme time. Assigning elements severl times simultneously 1. Select the 'Assign' function for the element to be ssigned. 2. Hold down the 'CTRL' key nd select severl event ctegories, inputs, or outputs in the left-hnd column. 3. Hold down the 'CTRL' key nd select severl elements to be ssigned in the right-hnd column. 4. Click on 'Assign'. You hve ssigned severl elements simultneously

90 6 Progrm opertion Assigning the effects of control 6.15 Assigning the effects of control 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the control group you wnt. 4. Open the control element you wnt. 5. Select 'Assign' vi the icon or vi the 'Commissioning' > 'Assign' menu. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 6. Click on n effect in the window on the left. At the right of the window, the elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted in the corresponding tree. In the cse of n output with confirmtion, second 'Hrdwre tree' opens for ssigning the confirmtion input. If you re ssigning outputs in the 'Hrdwre tree', you cn select the elements vi the ID no. 7. Click on 'Assign'. You hve ssigned control effect. The 'New effect dilog' window remins open. You cn ssign further effects Deleting links Proceed s follows to delete link between two elements: 1. Select n ssigned element in the tree view or in the tble. 2. Select 'Commissioning' > 'Unssign' from the menu br. OR The link is deleted. 1. Click on n ssigned element in the tree view or in the tble with the right mouse button. 2. From the context menu, select 'Unssign'. The link is deleted. In the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd, the commnd 'Unssign' is not vilble

91 Progrm opertion Finding Finding You cn use the 'Find' function to serch for elements in ccordnce with vrious serch criteri, e.g. ccording to 'Address', 'Customer text' or 'Problem'. The serch criteri vilble depend on the selected tsk crd. The 'Find' function is limited to the selected tsk crd. Performing serch 1. Select the desired tsk crd nd highlight the element in the tree view in which you wish to serch. 2. Open the 'Find' window. The window cn be opened s follows: 'View' > 'Find' menu item <Ctrl> + <F> button in the toolbr 3. Select serch criterion nd enter the serch vlue in the top right field. 4. Select the serch options. 5. Click on 'Find ll' or 'Find next'. 'Find ll' serches for nd highlights ll elements which correspond to the serch criterion. 'Find next' jumps from one hit to the next. 6. Click on 'Cncel' to end the current serch nd remove the highlighting from the elements found. You cn use the <F3> key insted of the 'Find next' button

92 6 Progrm opertion Finding nd replcing Serch options 'Entire site': Serch in the entire 'Site'. 'Selected sub-tree': Serch in the highlighted subtree. 'Include': Serch for vlues tht hve s component the serch vlue tht you entered in the upper right field. 'Exctly': Serch for vlues tht precisely mtch the serch vlue tht you entered in the upper right field. 'Include unloded sttions': If you hve checked the checkbox, then both loded nd not loded 'Sttions' will be included in the serch. See the chpter 'Dynmic loding [ 70]'. 'Ctegory:': Limited serch within one element ctegory. The drop-down list contins ll of the element ctegories, independent of the selected tsk crd. If you select n element ctegory tht is not present in the tsk crd selected, then the serch will be fruitless. See lso 2 Dynmic loding [ 70] 6.18 Finding nd replcing You cn use the 'Find nd replce' function to serch for elements in ccordnce with vrious serch criteri, e.g. ccording to 'Address', 'Customer text' or 'Problem'. Figure 16: Finding nd replcing The serch criteri vilble depend on the selected tsk crd. The 'Find nd replce' function is limited to the selected tsk crd. Finding nd replcing 1. Select the desired tsk crd nd highlight the element in the tree view in which you wish to serch. 2. Select 'View' > 'Find nd replce'. The 'Find nd replce' window opens. 3. Select serch criterion. 4. Enter the serch vlue in the field t the upper right nd the replcement vlue in the field below it. 5. Select the serch options

93 Progrm opertion Finding nd replcing 6 6. Click on button: 'Find next' jumps from one hit to the next. 'Replce' replces the hit with the replcement vlue. 'Replce ll' replces ll the hits found with the replcement vlue. 'Cncel' stops the current serch nd removes the highlighting on elements found. You cn use the <F3> key insted of the 'Find next' button. Serch options 'Entire site': Serch in the entire 'Site'. 'Selected sub-tree': Serch in the highlighted subtree. 'Include': Serch for vlues tht hve s component the serch vlue tht you entered in the upper right field. 'Exctly': Serch for vlues tht precisely mtch the serch vlue tht you entered in the upper right field. 'Include unloded sttions': If you hve checked the checkbox, then both loded nd not loded 'Sttions' will be included in the serch. See the chpter 'Dynmic loding [ 70]'. 'Ctegory:': Limited serch within one element ctegory. The drop-down list contins ll of the element ctegories, independent of the selected tsk crd. If you select n element ctegory tht is not present in the tsk crd selected, then the serch will be fruitless

94 6 Progrm opertion Exporting n XML 6.19 Exporting n XML You cn export the configurtion of the 'Site' into n XML file. This file cn be edited with ny XML-comptible softwre, so tht reports with different criteri nd representtion forms cn be output. Exmples of using n XML export: Creting country-specific reports Creting input files for externl systems, e.g., SWING tool Exporting XML file 1. Open Site using the 'File' > 'New site' or 'Open' menu item. 2. Click on the 'File' > 'Site export (XML)' menu item. The 'Reports' window is opened with the setting 'Site XML export'. 3. On the 'Sttions' tb, select the sttions for which you wish to generte n XML export. The mximum number of 'Sttions' tht cn be loded is limited. If the configurtion of the Site exceeds the limit, you must ctivte / dectivte one or more 'Sttions' for the export. 4. Select the 'Output settings' tb. Stndrd XML export 1. Check the 'Crete Stndrd XML report' checkbox. 2. Select the pth, enter file nme, nd click on 'Crete report'. You hve exported the configurtion of the 'Site' into n XML file

95 Progrm opertion Exporting n XML 6 User-defined XML export The user-defined XML export supports direct XSLT trnsformtion of the export. To do this, you need n XSLT trnsformtion file. 1. Check the 'Crete XSLT bsed export' checkbox. 2. Define n XSLT trnsformtion file. For trnsformtion file from 'BDV', select 'Use file from BDV'. For ny other trnsformtion file, select 'Use file from file system'. 3. Select the pth, enter file nme, nd click on 'Crete report'. You hve exported the configurtion of the 'Site' into user-defined XML file

96 6 Progrm opertion Exporting n SIB-X 6.20 Exporting n SIB-X The SiB-X export function cn be used to export the configurtion dt definitions into n XML file in SiB-X formt. SiB-X is the formt for exchnging configurtion dt between vrious products of Siemens, e.g., Mngement System MM8000. Exporting configurtion dt 1. Open site using the 'File' > 'New site' or 'Open' menu item. 2. Click on the 'File' > 'SiB-X export' menu item. The 'SiB-X export' window opens. 3. Select the 'Sttions' you wnt. 4. Select the pth, enter file nme, nd click on 'Strt'. The configurtion dt is exported

97 Progrm opertion Exporting nd importing CSVs Exporting nd importing CSVs The menu entries for CSV export nd import re vilble only in the 'Detection' tsk crd. Only dt in the 'Detection tree' is tken into ccount for CSV export or CSV import. CSV export: Export dt from SintesoWorks in CSV formt. Link [ 97] Edit nd dd dt in the CSV file. Link [ 97] CSV import: Import dt to SintesoWorks in CSV formt. Link [ 99] See lso 2 Exporting CSVs [ 97] Exporting CSVs 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Site' or subtree in the tree view. 3. Select 'File' > 'CSV export' from the menu br. The 'CSV export' window opens. 4. Select the pth nd chnge the file nme if needed. In the defult settings, the 'Site' nme is used with the supplement '_exchnge' s the file nme. 5. Click on 'OK'. 6. If you hve not yet sved the 'Site', you will be prompted to sve the 'Site'. If this is the cse, click on 'Yes'. The CSV file is sved t the specified loction Editing the CSV file Exmple: The dt of 'Site' is exported into CSV file. Customer-specific dt, e.g., the customer texts, is edited or dded in this file. Afterwrds, the CSV file is imported bck into the 'Site'. CAD ID nd note The 'CAD-ID' nd 'Note' columns of the CSV file cn be used to sve dditionl informtion tht is not shown in Engineering Tool or t the sttion, e.g., the CADbsed position of the corresponding node. The text must be no more thn 40 chrcters for ech cell. The text is only visible in the CSV file. Editing customer text Edit the text in the 'Customer text' column. Length of customer text A customer text must be no more thn 40 chrcters. If customer text contins more thn 40 chrcters in the CSV file, the text is shortened to 40 chrcters utomticlly when it is imported. A wrning is shown in the 'CSV import log' if the customer text hs been shortened

98 6 Progrm opertion Exporting nd importing CSVs Creting new elements in the CSV file 1. Enter the 'Are ddress' in the first column. 2. Depending on the element type, enter the 'Section ddress', 'Zone ddress', nd 'Chnnel ddress' elements. 3. Enter the element type in the 'Type' column, tking the following into ccount: The element type is n bbrevition of the corresponding element in the detection tree. The element type bbrevition must mtch your loclized BDV. If the element type is missing or does not mtch your loclized BDV, the new elements cnnot be imported. The tble below shows the detection tree elements nd the corresponding element type bbrevitions. Only the elements listed in the tble cn be dded to the detection tree s prt of CSV import. If the lnguge of this documenttion does not mtch the BDV lnguge, you my not be ble to use the element type bbrevition listed in the tble. Contct your locl or regionl compny for trnsltion of the element type bbrevitions. 4. Enter dditionl dt, e.g., 'Customer text'. Element in the detection tree Section Automtic zone, Single, stndrd Automtic zone, Multi, stndrd Gs zone, CO gs lrm Mnul zone, Stndrd Element type in the CSV file 'Type' column SE ZAS ZAM ZG ZM Technicl zone, Stndrd (ck./ltching) ZT Sprinkler zone, Stndrd Flow switch zone, Stndrd Sub-system zone, Stndrd Sub-system zone, ASD system Autom. detector, wired Autom. detector, wireless Collective Mnul cll point, wired Mnul cll point, wireless Gs detector ZSP ZFS ZSS ZSA EAW EAR EC EMW EMR EG

99 Progrm opertion Exporting nd importing CSVs Importing CSVs Length of customer text A customer text must be no more thn 40 chrcters. If customer text contins more thn 40 chrcters in the CSV file, the text is shortened to 40 chrcters utomticlly when it is imported. A wrning is shown in the 'CSV import log' if the customer text hs been shortened. Column title The import file my contin the column title s per the locl BDV or the English column title: Are ddress, Section ddress, Zone ddress, Chnnel ddress, Customer text, Note, Zone intervention text, Pln no., Structured ddress, Type. 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Select 'File' > 'CSV import' from the menu br. The 'CSV import' window opens. 3. Select the CSV file tht you wish to import. 4. Click on 'OK'. The specified CSV file is imported. 5. Open the protocol of the CSV import nd rectify problems if necessry Protocol of the CSV import The protocol for the CSV import displys problems tht occurred during CSV import. You cn filter the problems ccording to 'Error', 'Wrning' nd 'Info'. Displying the protocol of the CSV import 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Select 'File' > 'Show CSV import log' from the menu br. The 'CSV import log' window opens. A list of 'Error', 'Wrning' nd 'Info' messges cn be seen in the window. 3. Double-click on messge to jump directly to the corresponding element

100 6 Progrm opertion Chnge disply logo 6.22 Chnge disply logo By defult, in the norml stte of the 'Sttion', the Siemens logo is shown on the disply. You cn replce the Siemens logo with customer specific logo. The logo must be vilble s GIF file nd must meet the following requirements: Mximum size: 251 x 56 pixels Blck nd white No trnsprency Not interlced Replcing the stndrd logo 1. Select 'Edit' > 'Exchnge logo in site' from the menu br. The following window is opened: 2. Click on 'OK'. 3. Select the file with the new logo. 4. Lod the configurtion from the PC to the 'Sttion'. After restrt of the 'Sttion', the new logo is shown on the disply. Restoring the stndrd logo 1. Select 'Edit' > 'Exchnge logo in site' from the menu br. The following window is opened: 2. Click on 'Reset to defult'. 3. Lod the configurtion from the PC to the 'Sttion'. After restrt of the 'Sttion', the stndrd logo is shown on the disply. The file with the replced logo is sved in the sme folder in which the 'Site' configurtion is sved. See lso 2 Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion [ 114]

101 Progrm opertion Creting reports Creting reports You cn generte vrious reports s PDF or XML files in the 'Reports' window. Creting report 1. Select the tsk crd from which you wish to crete report. 2. Select 'File' > 'Reports' from the menu br or click on the symbol in the toolbr. The 'Reports' window opens. 3. Select the corresponding report in the 'Report type' field. 4. Select the pge formt, pge orienttion, file nme, nd loction of the report on the 'Output settings' tb. 5. If vilble, on the 'Sttions' tb, select the 'Sttions' for which you wish to generte report. 6. If vilble, set dditionl properties on the 'Settings' tb. 7. Click on 'Crete report'. The report is creted nd displyed. Figure 17: Exmple for the window for creting reports You will find informtion on the individul reports nd dditionl settings in the following chpters

102 6 Progrm opertion Creting reports Opening n XML file in Excel Reports in XML formt re opened in Excel by defult. If reports in XML formt do not open utomticlly in your operting system, proceed s follows: 1. Right-click the XML report or the XML file in the File Explorer. 2. Select 'Open with' > 'Choose Defult Progrm...'. 3. Select the 'XML Editor' progrm. 4. Activte the 'Alwys use the selected progrm to open this kind of file' option. 5. Click on 'OK'. XML reports re opened in Excel by defult Customer text report The 'Customer text report' lists the customer texts of ll elements of the respective tsk crd. Crete report link [ 101] You cn mke the following settings in the 'Settings' section: 'Displyed top level of the tree': Topmost level of the structure tree tht is displyed in the report. 'Displyed bottom level of the tree': Lowermost level of the structure tree tht is displyed in the report. In the tsk crds 'Opertion' nd 'Network', the section 'Settings' is empty

103 Progrm opertion Creting reports Device report Regrdless of which tsk crd is selected, the 'Device report' lists the number of elements vilble in the 'Hrdwre tree', 'Detection tree', nd 'Control tree'. On the one hnd, the elements re listed s in the tree view, with the number of elements in the prent element. On the other hnd, ech element type is listed with the totl number of elements. Crete report link [ 101] The output elements re: 'Detection tree': Elements 'Are', 'Section', nd 'Zone' with the ssigned devices 'Control tree': Elements 'Control group' nd 'Control' with the ssigned devices 'Hrdwre tree': 'Sttion' nd 'Modules' elements, nd FDnet devices

104 6 Progrm opertion Creting reports Dignostics report The 'Dignostics report' lists the 'Site info properties' nd the softwre nd firmwre versions of the hrdwre in the entire 'Site'. Crete report link [ 101] Only the properties existing in the elements re listed here, i.e. only some of the following possible properties: Hrdwre version Series number Softwre version Hrdwre nme Firmwre version Hrdwre type Firmwre revision Ethernet MAC ddress Product version

105 Progrm opertion Creting reports Event memory report The 'Event memory report' lists the events of 'Site'. Crete report link [ 101] You cn use filter options to limit the number of listed events, e.g. events of prticulr event ctegory within prticulr time period. You cn use 'Browse...' to open CSV file of the event memory tht you hve uploded through the menu item 'Commissioning' > 'Uplod site event memory'. You cn use 'Uplod...' to estblish the connection to 'Sttion' nd lod the event memory to the PC. You cn specify the dte nd time for the strt nd end point of the report in the fields 'Strt dte' nd 'End dte'. In the section 'Event ctegories' you cn select the event ctegories tht re to be tken into considertion in the report

106 6 Progrm opertion Creting reports Import informtion report The 'Import informtion report' outputs list of imported elements nd their IDs following completion of n import from inventory systems. Crete report link [ 101] The following filter settings re possible: 'Whole site' cretes report for the entire 'Site' 'Selected sttion' cretes report for the selected 'Sttion'

107 Progrm opertion Creting reports Node report In the 'Node report', the element of the respective tsk crd highlighted in the tree view is listed in tble formt. Crete report link [ 101] You cn mke the following settings in the 'Settings' section: 'Full property set': All visible properties of the highlighted element re output. 'Property subset': A subset of the properties is output. The selection is dependent on the BDV used. 'Include sub-tree' This setting indictes whether only the highlighted elements will be output or lso the subtree s well. 'Displyed bottom level of the tree': Lowermost level of the structure tree tht is displyed in the report. Not ll settings re vilble in the tsk crds 'Opertion' nd 'Network'

108 6 Progrm opertion Creting reports 'Peripherls test report' The 'Peripherls test report' lists the lst test ctivtions of the peripherl devices. The test dte nd the ctivtion type is listed for ech test ctivtion. Crete report link [ 101] You cn set the dte rnge for the test ctivtions to be listed on the 'Settings' tb

109 Progrm opertion Creting reports Soiling report The 'Soiling report' lists the 'Compenstion vlue' of the detectors. Crete report link [ 101] The following elements re listed for ech detector: Device customer text Device ddress pth Operting yers Compenstion level Compenstion vlue: Norml, no ction required 100 %, wrning, detector replcement recommended 150 %, mximum, detector replcement required Logicl customer text Logicl ddress Seril no. ("ID-Nr.")

110 6 Progrm opertion Creting reports Tree report In the 'Tree report', properties of the elements from the structure tree of the respective tsk crd re listed in tble formt, e.g., prmeter set, 'Seril no. ("ID-Nr.")', nd 'Templte ID'. Crete report link [ 101] You cn mke the following settings in the 'Settings' section: 'Displyed top level of the tree': Topmost level of the structure tree tht is displyed in the report. 'Displyed bottom level of the tree': Lowermost level of the structure tree tht is displyed in the report

111 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Connecting the PC to the sttion 7 7 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' A PC does not hve to be directly connected to 'Sttion' to be ble to communicte with 'Sttion' in the 'Site'. The PC cn be connected to ny plce in the Ethernet. A GAP cn be configured with DHCP server. This results in PC utomticlly receiving n IP ddress when connection is estblished to the GAP vi FCnet/LAN. See lso 2 Estblishing connection from PC to FS20 network [ 376] 7.1 Connecting the PC to the sttion For most commissioning, mintennce nd repir work PC with instlled SintesoWorks is required. The figure below shows the connection between the PC nd 'Sttion'. LAN 11 Figure 18: Rer pnel of operting unit nd PC LAN Ethernet connection 1 Cble, type CAT 5 or CAT 7, crossover, mx. 100 m 7.2 Disconnecting the PC from the sttion As the IP ddress is bound to the MAC ddress while there is connection between the PC nd the 'Sttion' nd s it remins in the cche even in the cse of short brek in the connection of 2 min., you must observe the following instructions. NOTICE Incorrect disconnection of 'Sttion' Estblishing connection to other 'Sttion' is not possible Disconnect the PC from the 'Sttion' s described in the following instructions. The connection between the PC nd the 'Sttion' must be disconnected s follows: 1. Select 'SintesoWorks' > 'Commissioning' in Disconnect. 2. Disconnect the cble connection between PC nd 'Sttion'. 3. Wit 2 min. before you estblish connection to nother 'Sttion'

112 7 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Connecting SintesoView 7.3 Connecting SintesoView w w Enbling for viewing nd / or operting the 'Sttion' with SintesoView is grnted. The PC is connected to the 'Site'. 1. Select the 'SintesoView' tsk crd. 2. Select 'SintesoView' > 'Connect' from the menu br. The selection window for the connection is displyed. 3. Select the connection nd confirm with 'OK'. The 'Connect SintesoView' window opens. 4. Select the 'Sttion' tht you wish to disply nd/or operte nd enter vlid PIN. 5. Click on 'OK'. The connection is estblished. Connect from the Fvorites list with 'Sttion' w w Enbling for viewing nd / or operting the 'Sttion' with SintesoView is grnted. The PC is connected to the 'Site'. 1. Select the 'SintesoView' tsk crd. 2. Select 'SintesoView' > 'Connect to fvorite' from the menu br. 3. Select the desired 'Sttion' from the list. The connection is estblished. You will find description of enbling for viewing nd/or operting with SintesoView in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. You cn use the pre-settings to cuse SintesoView to be connected utomticlly with the most recently connected 'Sttion' when you open the tsk crd 'SintesoView'. See lso 2 SintesoView [ 67] 2 SintesoView [ 45]

113 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Lod dt to the sttion Lod dt to the sttion Dt is loded from SintesoWorks to the 'Sttion' when the following commnds re performed. 'Initilize sttion' 'Downlod site' If you use more thn one network crds on the PC, observe the informtion contined in chpter 'IP settings for severl network crds [ 35]'. The tble below shows which dt is overwritten in the 'Sttion'. Commnd Overwrites the BDV Sets the ddress of the 'Sttion' 'Initilize sttion' 1 Yes Yes Yes 'Downlod site' Yes No Yes 2 Overwrites the configurtion 1 Commnd is only performed for the 'Sttion' tht is connected to the PC vi LAN. 2 The configurtion of selected 'Sttions' or ll 'Sttions' in the 'Site' cn be overwritten s n option. See lso 2 Initilizing the sttion [ 113] 2 Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion [ 114] 7.5 Initilizing the sttion Ech 'Sttion' in system with severl networked 'Sttions' must hve unique ddress. Once 'Sttion' hs been strted for the first time or once the firmwre on the min CPU hs been updted, 'Sttion' hs the ddress '1'. Networked 'Sttions' must therefore ll be initilized. If two 'Sites' re merged to form one 'Site', the 'Sttions' with the sme ddresses in the dded 'Site' must ech be given new ddress. The 'Initilize sttion' procedure issues the 'Sttion' n ddress within the 'Site' ccording to the configurtion in SintesoWorks. A stndlone 'Sttion' does not hve to be initilized. If you use more thn one network crds on the PC, observe the informtion contined in chpter 'IP settings for severl network crds [ 35]'. You will find detiled description for initiliztion of 'Sttion' in document '009052'. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Lod dt to the sttion [ 113] 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

114 7 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion 7.6 Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion You cn use the 'Downlod site' function to lod the configurtion of one 'Site' from the SintesoWorks on the PC into the 'Sttion'. NOTICE Different network configurtion in SintesoWorks nd networked 'Site' When the selection displyed for 'Downlod site' is mnully modified, in specil cses 1 it my be necessry to reset 'Sttion' to the fctory setting s well s 'Initilize sttion'. Do not modify the selection displyed for 'Downlod site' in norml cses. Check the sequence when loding different configurtion sttes in specil cses 1. After ny chnge of the network configurtion, mke sure tht ll 'Sttions' in the 'Site' for the 'Downlod site' procedure re selected nd cn be ccessed. Temporrily updte non-ccessible 'Sttions' to the ltest sttus of the globl network configurtion prior to integrtion in the network. 1 Exmples of specil cses: A 'Sttion' will be dded to networked 'Site' nd new network configurtion will be loded upon initiliztion of this 'Sttion', different from the globl network configurtion of the connected 'Site'. During the 'Downlod site' procedure 'Sttion' is temporrily not ccessible. Both exmples cn result in the 'Sttion' no longer strting fter the 'Downlod site' procedure nd the bove ctions hving to be crried out. If you use more thn one network crds on the PC, observe the informtion contined in chpter 'IP settings for severl network crds [ 35]'. w The 'Site' is opened in SintesoWorks. w The PC is connected to the 'Sttion'. w Networked 'Sttions' re initilized. w 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks hve the sme 'Site' ID. w 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks re prt of the sme sles chnnel. 1. Select 'Commissioning' > 'Downlod site' in SintesoWorks. The 'Downlod site' nd 'Connect' windows open in SintesoWorks. 2. Select the connection in the 'Connect' window nd click on 'OK'. The 'Sttions' re listed in the 'Downlod site' window

115 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Loding configurtion from the sttion to the PC 7 3. Select the 'Sttions' whose configurtion you would like to lod from SintesoWorks to the 'Sttions' nd click on 'Strt'. The 'Set ccess level' window my open in SintesoWorks with the 'Set the sttion to ccess level 3' prompt. Press <MENU> on the 'Sttion', enter the PIN nd press <ok>. 4. Click on 'OK' in the 'Set ccess level' window in SintesoWorks. The 'Action confirmtion' window opens in SintesoWorks. 5. Click on 'Yes'. The configurtion is loded to the 'Sttion'. The progress is displyed in the 'Downlod site' window in SintesoWorks. The 'Sttion' restrts. After few minutes, the 'Buzzer' sounds twice t the 'Sttion'. 6. Press <Acknowledge> on the Person Mchine Interfce t the 'Sttion' to switch off the 'Buzzer'. Do not perform ny more ctions on the 'Sttion' until the 'Buzzer' hs sounded for the second time. See lso 2 Lod dt to the sttion [ 113] 7.7 Loding configurtion from the sttion to the PC The 'Uplod site' function cn be used to lod the configurtion of 'Site' to SintesoWorks on the PC. w w w w The 'Site' is opened in SintesoWorks. The PC is connected to the 'Sttion'. 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks hve the sme 'Site' ID. 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks re prt of the sme sles chnnel. 1. Select 'Commissioning' > 'Uplod site'. The 'Uplod site' nd 'Connect' windows re opened. 2. Select the connection in the 'Connect' window nd click on 'OK'. The 'Sttions' re listed in the 'Uplod site' window. 3. Select the 'Sttions' whose configurtion you would like to lod to SintesoWorks nd click on 'Strt'. The 'Action confirmtion' window opens. 4. Click on 'Yes'. The configurtion is loded to the PC. The progress is displyed in the 'Uplod site' window

116 7 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Loding event memory to PC 7.8 Loding event memory to PC The 'Uplod site event memory' cn be used to lod the event memory of one or more 'Sttions' in the 'Site' from ny 'Sttion' to the PC. w w w w A vlid 'Site' is loded. All 'Sttions' hve the sme BDV version nd the sme globl configurtion so tht site-wide communiction is supported. 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks must belong to the sme orgniztionl unit. The PC is connected to 'Sttion' in the 'Site' vi n Ethernet cble. 1. In the 'Commissioning' menu, select the 'Uplod site event memory' menu item. The 'Connect' window opens. 2. Select the connection setting nd confirm with 'OK'. The selection window opens. 3. Select the 'Sttions' whose event memory you would like to lod to the PC. 4. Determine the memory loction nd the file nme. 5. Click on 'Strt'. The dt is trnsferred. The sttus of the trnsfer is shown in the sttus br. The dt is sved s CSV file the specified loction

117 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Loding the site log files to the PC Loding the site log files to the PC You cn lod log files of individul 'Sttions' of 'Site' to the PC. The log files re stored in compressed rchive tht is determined by the user. The rchive contins folder for ech 'Sttion'. Exmple: LogFilesArchiveExmple.zip w w w w \Sttion1\ syslog_0.log syslog_1.log syslog_2.log \Sttion2\ syslog_0.log syslog_1.log A 'Site' is loded. All 'Sttions' hve the sme BDV version nd the sme globl configurtion so tht site-wide communiction is supported. 'Sttion' nd SintesoWorks must be in the sme orgniztionl unit. The PC is connected to 'Sttion' in the 'Site' vi n Ethernet cble. 1. In the 'Commissioning' menu, select the 'Uplod site log files' menu item. The 'Uplod site log files' nd 'Connect' windows re opened. 2. Select the connection in the 'Connect' window nd click 'OK'. The 'Sttions' re listed in the 'Uplod site log files' window. 3. Select the 'Sttions' the log files of which you would like to lod to the PC. 4. Determine the memory loction nd the file nme. 5. Click on 'Strt'. The dt is trnsferred. The sttus of the trnsfer is shown in the sttus br. The dt is sved in the specified file

118 7 Connectivity nd communiction with 'Sttion' Merge two sites 7.10 Merge two sites You cn merge two 'Sites' to form one 'Site'. The exmples below illustrte possible resons for merging: Two neighboring buildings hve one fire detection instlltion ech. Both fire detection instlltions re to be merged to form shred fire detection instlltion. A new fire detection system with redundnt network is instlled. To speed up commissioning, two service technicins split the 'Site' into two prts, which re commissioned seprtely. Once both prts hve been commissioned, they re merged to form single 'Site'. You will find detiled description of how to merge two 'Sites' in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 7.11 Hndover The configurtion of the 'Site' nd the 'Sttions' from third-prty business chnnel cn be trnsferred to nother business chnnel. You will find the 'Hndover site' nd 'Hndover sttion' functions in the 'Commissioning' menu. For more informtion bout 'hndover', contct your designted in-country Siemens regionl compny

119 Updting the firmwre Updting the firmwre of the 'Sttion' 8 8 Updting the firmwre 8.1 Updting the firmwre of the 'Sttion' There re three options for updting the firmwre of the 'Sttion': 'FW updte min CPU': Updting the min CPU 'FW updte dditionl CPUs': Updting dditionl CPUs, e.g., the periphery crds 'FW updte min nd dditionl CPUs': Updting the min CPU nd dditionl CPUs in single step You will find detiled description for updting firmwre in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 'Site' conversion When the firmwre is updted, the existing 'Site' is converted on the bsis of the new BDV. The 'Site' cn be converted utomticlly or mnully. Mnul conversion is clled up in SintesoWorks vi the 'Edit' > 'Convert site' menu item. Properties of the conversion Only the configurtion dt is converted. The process dt of the 'Sttion' is not converted. The defult vlues of the new firmwre re trnsferred nd the 'Sttion' reclcultes the process dt. The criticl conversions re logged for the entire 'Site'. The logs cn be viewed in the 'Conversion log' window or printed from the log file. You will find detiled informtion bout converting in document A6V nd n overview in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

120 8 Updting the firmwre Updting the firmwre of the peripherl devices Conversion log The conversion log is displyed in the 'Conversion log' window. The log cn be used to detect nd correct errors in the converted configurtion. Figure 19: 'Converter log' window with the 'Error', 'Wrning', nd 'Info' entries The 'Site' is converted when the firmwre is updted. You will find more informtion bout this in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 8.2 Updting the firmwre of the peripherl devices You cn updte the firmwre of the following peripherl devices: Floor repeter terminl FT2010 Floor repeter disply FT2011 Rdio gtewy FDCW221 Rdio gtewy FDCW241 Mimic disply driver FT2001-A1 MCL-USB dpter FDUZ221 Detector exchnger nd tester FDUD292 nd intelligent detector tester FDUD293 Line tester FDUL221 To connect peripherl device to the PC, you need the MCL-USB dpter. You will find more informtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

121 Updting the firmwre Converting sttion Converting sttion The 'Replce element' function is used to convert configurtion from smll sttion type to lrger sttion type. The following conversions re possible: FC2020 to FC2030 or FC2040 or FC2060 FC2030 to FC2060 FC2040 to FC2060 The possible conversions re determined by the BDV used nd my differ from those shown bove. How to convert 'Sttion' w A 'Sttion' of type FC2020, FC2030, or FC2040 is vilble. 1. Select the 'Sttion' to be converted. 2. In the menu, click on 'Edit' > 'Replce element'. 3. Select the trget sttion type for the conversion. 4. Confirm your selection with 'Yes'. The configurtion of the 'Sttion' hs been converted. Conversion log The criticl conversions re logged for the converted 'Sttion'. The logs cn be viewed in the 'Conversion log' window or printed from the log file

122 9 Configurtion Overview Converting sttion 9 Configurtion Overview A 'Site' hs physicl nd logicl structure. The structures re shown nd configured in the SintesoWorks tsk crds. The tble below shows elements nd ssignment of the pproprite structure. Structure type Structure tree Tsk crd Physicl structure Hrdwre tree 'Hrdwre' Logicl structure Detection tree Control tree Opertion tree Network tree 'Detection' 'Control' 'Opertion' 'Network' The physicl structure is red in by the 'Sttion' or creted mnully. The logicl structure cn be creted either mnully during the pre-configurtion or utomticlly on the 'Sttion' by uto-configurtion. Prts of the logicl structure re pre-configured in the BDV templte for 'Sttion'. The list below shows selection of configurble elements in 'Site': Configuring the components of the 'Sttion' Detector zones Detector settings Multi-detector dependency Alrm orgniztion Controls (lrming, fire, NAC, extinguishing) Networking control pnels nd operting pnels ('Sttions') Visibility for events nd functions Service intervention Customer texts Intervention texts

123 Configurtion Overview With pre-configurtion 9 Dectivting the mouse wheel of the computer mouse NOTICE Unintended scrolling in drop-down lists Configurtion error cused by unintended modifiction of settings Red the following description. To dectivte the mouse wheel, ctivted the checkbox 'Ignore mouse wheel' in the pre-settings. When you scroll with the mouse wheel in the detil editor, it could hppen tht you will unintentionlly chnge the settings in drop-down list. In order to prevent this, you cn dectivte the mouse wheel. To do so, proceed s follows: 1. In the menu br, click on 'Options' > 'Preferences'. The 'Generl' window opens. 2. Click on the left in the window on 'Editing'. 3. Check the 'Ignore mouse wheel' checkbox. The mouse wheel is dectivted. The setting 'Ignore mouse wheel' does not go into effect until you select new element in the structure tree. The setting is not yet dopted for the currently selected element. See lso 2 Editing [ 42] 9.1 With pre-configurtion In SintesoWorks, the 'Site' is configured in its logicl structure bsed on the plnning documents, the lyout pln, etc. It is pre-configured. During commissioning, the pre-configurtion is loded to the 'Sttion'. Once the pre-configurtion is loded to the 'Sttion', the 'Sttion' is restrted. During this process, the 'Sttion' components nd peripherl devices re red in. The resulting physicl structure is loded into the SintesoWorks together with the logicl structure. The logicl nd physicl structure re ssigned in SintesoWorks nd loded bck into the 'Sttion'

124 9 Configurtion Overview Without pre-configurtion 9.2 Without pre-configurtion During commissioning, first the components nd the 'Sttion' periphery re red in. There re two wys of reding in the periphery: The FDnet detector lines re red in individully. The resultnt physicl structure is loded in SintesoWorks. Afterwrds, the logicl structure is creted in SintesoWorks nd ssigned to the physicl structure. The FDnet detector lines re red in by uto-configurtion. This results in the physicl structure nd the logicl structure. The two structures re loded to SintesoWorks. Auto-configurtion cn be performed for the 'Sttion' or for individul detector lines. MS9i detector lines, collective detector lines, nd AnlogPLUS detector lines re not red in. These hve to be pre-configured in full. The interctive detector line is red in nd must then be configured mnully. 9.3 Customer text Customer text cn be entered for ech element in the structure tree. The customer text is shown on the disply of 'Sttion'. The length of the customer text is checked during entry. Customer text is displyed in ccordnce with the following rules: Elements except 'Zone' element If messge ssocited with n element ppers, the corresponding customer text is displyed. If no customer text is ssigned to the element, the customer text of the superordinte element is displyed with customer text. Exmple: If 'Section' hs no customer text, then the customer text of the 'Detection re' is displyed. 'Zone' element If n lrm messge for 'Zone' ppers, the customer text of the detector sensor ssigned to it is displyed. If the ssigned detector sensor is not ssigned ny customer text, the customer text for the 'Zone' is displyed. If no customer text is ssigned to the 'Zone' either, the customer text of the next superordinte element ppers

125 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion System requirements AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion This chpter describes the migrtion of configurtion dt from n AlgoRex or SIGMASYS fire detection system to n FS20 fire detection system. It describes generl requirements nd detiled steps tht must be tken when plnning nd performing dt migrtion System requirements Dt migrtion The following system requirements pply to dt migrtion: AlgoRex system version AlgoWorks softwre version V1.94 SIGMASYS system version XX_1140_830_YY XX:country code YY:version number xxx PLAND100 softwre version V9.0 SintesoWorks F-FX2030-XL_en_ R2 or lter version See lso 2 System requirements [ 28]

126 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Options nd limittions 10.2 Options nd limittions This chpter describes prcticl dt migrtion options nd system limittions. The options described re only exmples nd do not cover ll possible combintions Supported sttions Configurtion dt cn be imported into 'Sttions' of type 'FC2020', 'FC2030', 'FC2040', 'FC2060', or 'FC2080' Supported lines nd limittions The configurtion dt is imported line by line. The following line crds re supported: AnlogPLUS line crd (FCL2005) Interctive line crd (FCL2006) FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001) It is strictly prohibited to import n FDnet line into Cerberus PRO configurtion. NOTICE Importing Sinteso FDnet line into Cerberus PRO configurtion 'Sttion' is inoperble. Never import n FDnet line into Cerberus PRO configurtion. During the import process, specific line crds which contin lines re offered for selection. The biggest unit tht cn be ssigned is line crd nd the smllest unit is line. When you ssign line to line crd, the next free line crd is used. You cn import lines from AlgoRex nd SIGMASYS Sttions into FS20 Sttions; see digrms below. All physicl devices, the devices with this ssigned detection logic, nd prts of the control logic re included in the import. The detection logic nd control logic re not visible during the import process Number of chnnels per 'Zone' In FS20 up to 99 chnnels per 'Zone' re possible. The Chnnel ddress must not be greter thn 99. After importing n AlgoRex configurtion with more thn 99 chnnels per 'Zone', ll chnnels with ddresses >99 re indicted with n error messge in SintesoWorks. The configurtion hs to be dpted. You will find more informtion in chpter 'Adpting the number of chnnels per zone [ 139]'

127 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Options nd limittions AlgoRex limittions Migrting controls Only AlgoRex control zones 4 nd 6 cn be migrted to FS20. Formuls for AlgoRex control zones re not migrted to FS20. AlgoRex commnd elements re not migrted to FS20. AlgoRex fetures combined controls, which function s 'Fire control' nd n 'Evc control' t the sme time, e.g., Struct 1751, Struct 1654, nd Struct These controls cn hve 'Sounder' nd other chnnels s effects. In FS20 there re no combined controls, s 'Sounder' cn only be ssigned to 'Evc control'. The migrted combined controls must be dpted mnully in FS20. Link [ 139] LED indictors re not migrted from AlgoRex to FS20. AlgoRex cuses which do not hve ny equivlent cuse in FS20 cnnot be migrted. If detector is linked s n effect severl times in AlgoRex, only the first link is migrted to FS20. It is not possible to link detector to severl effects in FS SIGMASYS limittions Migrting controls Every control (output) is migrted s n effect of its own, newly creted control group. All ctivtion sources re treted s cuses of the control nd ssigned s such. The following elements of SIGMASYS control re migrted to FS20: Nme of the control or customer text Logicl ddress Physicl inputs nd outputs Pnel outputs re not migrted to FS Sequence of the import process When n AlgoRex sttion is imported, the ssigned logicl elements re included in the import. 'Zones' re ssigned new numbers becuse the numbering of ech 'Section' strts from 1 in the cse of the existing CSX numbers. The sequence of the 'Zones' is retined during the import process. Therefore, 'Zones' should be imported in the sequence in which they pper in the AlgoRex configurtion. Otherwise, when 'Zone' with lower number is subsequently imported, the numbering of ll subsequent 'Zones' tht hve lredy been imported will be dpted

128 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Options nd limittions Digrm of possible ssignment The figures below show possible logicl ssignments between AlgoRex Sttions or SIGMASYS Sttions nd FS20-Sttions. The circles represent the logicl res. Sttion 1 FS20 Sttion 2 Assignment of two inventory sttions to one FS20-Sttions Sttion FS20 1 FS20 2 Assignment of one inventory sttion to two FS20-Sttions

129 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Overview of steps 10 Sttion1 FS20 1 Sttion 2 FS20 2 Sttion 3 Assignment of severl inventory sttion to two FS20-Sttions 10.3 Overview of steps The dt migrtion sequence is outlined below. Export configurtion dt from AlgoWorks or PLAND100 Crete new 'Site' in SintesoWorks Crete 'Sttion' in SintesoWorks Crete line crds nd lines required Import dt into SintesoWorks For ech line: Assign imported 'Elements' Adpt configurtion, e.g., dpt controls or detection, if required Downlod nd strt 'Site' Completing migrtion 'Import informtion report' 'SiB-X export' for mngement sttions 'Remove import informtion'

130 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Exporting configurtion dt 10.4 Exporting configurtion dt AlgoWorks export Configurtion dt from AlgoRex which is to be imported into FS20 must be creted in AlgoWorks s n export file. The following steps describe how to crete n export file in AlgoWorks. w The site version nd the softwre version meet system requirements. 1. Click on 'Sve Configurtion Dt As' in the 'File' menu 2. In the 'Sve s' window, select the *.fsm dt type. 3. Select storge loction for the file nd click on 'Sve'. The export file hs been creted. You will find more detiled informtion in the online help for AlgoWorks

131 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Exporting configurtion dt PLAND100 export Configurtion dt from SIGMASYS must be imported into FS20 s PLAND100 export file. The following steps describe how to crete n export file in PLAND100. PLAND100 only exports FDnet lines. You will find more detiled informtion in the online help for PLAND100. w The site version nd the softwre version meet system requirements for dt migrtion. Link [ 125] 1. Select the FDC nd open the 'Set component' window. 2. Check the 'Component prepring for FS20 migrtion' checkbox in the 'Set component' window. The FDC icon indictes tht preprtion for migrtion is under wy. 3. Check the site configurtion: Menu item 'Prmeterize' > 'Check'. If the check of the site configurtion ws not completed without errors, the export will not strt. 4. Select menu items 'Site' > 'Export' in the min menu

132 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Exporting configurtion dt 5. Select formt 'SIGMASYS-FS20 migrtion (MPx)'. 6. Select the 'Crete' button. The export file is sved. Seril numbers re not recorded in SIGMASYS. In other words, following the import, the seril numbers re output with 0. Seril numbers re ssigned to the devices once the configurtion hs been loded to the sttion nd new uplod to the PC hs been performed

133 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Creting site for dt migrtion Creting site for dt migrtion See lso 2 Creting site [ 72] Creting sttion Configurtion dt cn be imported into 'Sttions' of type 'FC2020', 'FC2030', 'FC2040', 'FC2060', or 'FC2080'. You will find more informtion on the cretion of 'Sttions' in chpter 'Creting sttion [ 76]' Creting line crds w A 'Sttion' hs been creted. 1. Highlight the 'Sttion'. 2. Select 'New element'. 3. Add the line crds. The line crds re creted Creting FDnet/C-NET lines You will find detils on the technicl term 'FDnet' in the chpter 'Glossry'. When importing FDnet lines, the control pnel cretes 2 stubs for ech unssigned loop. So tht the stubs cn be ssigned correctly, you must crete them prior to running the import. You will find detiled informtion bout creting lines nd converting stubs in document

134 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Importing configurtion dt 10.6 Importing configurtion dt Overview of the 'Import dilog' window Drop-down menu for selecting the structure tree for the migrtion: Hrdwre or control 2 List of ssignble elements 3 Tree structure of the current 'Site' Norml text: The pth leds to n element tht cnnot be ssigned Bold text: The pth leds to n element tht cn be ssigned 4 'Undo' button: Undo previous ction 'Redo' button: Redo previous ction 5 'Previous ssignble element' button: Nvigte to the previous ssignble element 6 'Next ssignble element' button: Nvigte to the next ssignble element 7 Sttus line for displying errors, wrnings, nd informtion

135 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Importing configurtion dt Importing hrdwre Only detector lines for which line crds re redily vilble cn be imported. To import line crd of specific type, for exmple, this line crd must be vilble in the sttion. w A 'Site' hs been creted. w At lest one 'Sttion' hs been creted. w All required line elements hve been creted. 1. In the menu br, click on 'Edit' > 'Import lines...'. The following window is opened: 2. Confirm with 'Yes'. 3. Select the import file. The 'Import dilog' window opens. The elements contined in the import file re displyed on the left-hnd side of the window. The elements contined in your 'Site' re displyed on the right-hnd side of the window. 4. In the drop-down menu, select the 'Hrdwre' structure tree. 5. Select the line or line element you wish to ssign on the left-hnd side of the window. If the selected element lso ppers in your 'Site', it is highlighted in bold on the right-hnd side of the window

136 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Importing configurtion dt 6. Click on the smll rrows on the right to open the structure tree. 7. Select the corresponding element on the right to ssign it to the element from the import list. 8. Click on 'Import'. 9. Repet steps 5 to 8 until ll elements hve been imported. 10. Go to the 'Control' structure tree to import controls. See chpter 'Importing controls [ 137]'. Or 11. Click on 'Close' The dt hs been imported. Following the import, the seril number for the interctive devices shows s " ". However, the seril number hs been sved correctly internlly. When the site is reopened, the correct seril number is displyed

137 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Importing configurtion dt Importing controls Import of combined controls Combined controls must be dpted mnully following import. See chpter 'Adpting controls [ 139]'. w w A 'Site' hs been creted. At lest one 'Sttion' hs been creted. 1. In the open 'Import dilog' window, go to the 'Control' structure tree in the dropdown menu. Or 2. In the menu br, click on 'Edit' > 'Import lines...'. The following window is opened: 3. Confirm with 'Yes'. 4. Select the import file. The 'Import dilog' window opens. The elements contined in the import file re displyed on the left-hnd side of the window. The elements contined in your 'Site' re displyed on the right-hnd side of the window. 5. In the drop-down menu, select the 'Control' structure tree. 6. Select the control you wish to ssign on the left-hnd side of the window. If the selected element lso ppers in your 'Site', it is highlighted in bold on the right-hnd side of the window

138 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Importing configurtion dt 7. Click on the smll rrows on the right to open the structure tree. 8. Select the corresponding element on the right to ssign it to the element from the import list. 9. Click on 'Import'. 10. Repet steps 6 to 9 until ll elements hve been imported. 11. Click on 'Close' The dt hs been imported Error log The FS20 system logs ll import opertions performed nd ll messges. The log contins useful informtion for troubleshooting. It cn be filtered by the following messge types: Error Wrning Info Debug To open the import log: w You hve performed t lest one import opertion. In the menu br, click on 'Edit' -> 'Show import log'

139 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion Adpting configurtion Adpting the number of chnnels per zone 1. Select the 'Detection' > 'Detection re' > 'Section' > 'Zone' tsk crd. 2. Assign ll chnnels with ddresses >99 to different 'Zone'. Select the chnnel nd hold down the mouse button to drg it to different 'Zone'. 3. Correct the ddress of the chnnel on the 'Overview' tb to vlue between 1 nd Adpting controls Migrting combined control from AlgoRex to FS20: In FS20, temporry 'AlgoRex migrtion control group' is creted with 'AlgoRex migrtion controls' nd, if pplicble, 'Fire controls'. Site configurtions with 'AlgoRex migrtion control groups' re considered fulty nd cnnot be loded to the 'Sttion'. The site configurtion hs to be dpted mnully. Once dpted, the 'AlgoRex migrtion control group' must be deleted, together with the 'AlgoRex migrtion controls'. Adpting controls mnully In the exmple below, the migrtion from AlgoRex to FS20 hs lredy been performed nd the control elements re vilble in the FS20 site configurtion

140 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion Exmple scenrio 1. Crete new 'Fire control group'. 2. Move the entire 'Fire control' under the 'AlgoRex migrtion control group' into the newly creted 'Fire control group', e.g., by holding down the mouse button nd drgging the element or by using 'Cut' nd 'Pste'. 3. Crete new 'Universl evc control' under the 'Evc control group'. 4. Move the desired effects from the 'AlgoRex migrtion control' to the effects in the newly creted 'Universl evc control', e.g., by holding down the mouse button nd drgging the element or by using 'Cut' und 'Pste'. 5. In the 'AlgoRex migrtion control', select ll cuses under 'Migrted cuses'

141 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion Select the 'Edit' > 'Replce element' menu item. 7. In the 'Replce element' window, select the correct type nd templte, then click on 'Replce'. 8. Move the cuses from the 'AlgoRex migrtion control' to the cuses in the newly creted 'Universl evc control', e.g., by holding down the mouse button nd drgging the element or by using 'Cut' nd 'Pste'. 9. Delete the empty 'AlgoRex migrtion control group' Setting visibility The 'Visibility' defines which prts of 'Site' cn be viewed or operted on 'Sttion'. 'Visibility' configurtion settings in AlgoWorks re not included in the import opertion. Set the 'Visibility' fter the import. You will find more informtion on 'Visibility' in chpter Visibility [ 313] AlgoRex: Creting bse sounders for FDnet/C-NET devices No bse sounders re creted during the migrtion from AlgoRex FDnet devices to FS20. Creting 'Bse sounder' w In AlgoRex, the FDnet device (Struct 1417) ws ssigned to 1560, 1564, or 1565 element. After migrtion: Crete the 'Bse sounder' element under the device. Link [ 77] In AlgoRex, n FDnet device my be ssigned to severl bse sounders. In FS20, device my only be ssigned to one bse sounder. During the migrtion from AlgoRex to FS20, only the first link ws migrted with bse sounder

142 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion Correcting the AnlogPLUS ddress The AnlogPLUS I/O module DC1136 hs 2 D-bus ddresses. Since the D-bus ddresses re no longer visible in the FS20, this multiple reservtion is lso no longer visible on the line crd in the tool. Importing line contining DC1136 cretes n ddress gp. This gp must be corrected or closed mnully in FS20. To correct the ddress gp, proceed s follows: w An AnlogPLUS I/O module DC1136 hs been imported. 1. Select the AnlogPLUS I/O module DC Click on 'Edit' > 'Chnge element ddress: -1' You will find detiled description of reducing the ddress of elements in chpter "Re-ddressing elements". See lso 2 Re-ddressing elements [ 84] AnlogPLUS/Interctive: Correcting multiple verifiction DC1192c, DC1151, CB320A AlgoRex hs the elements EL col. det. 1/2/3, structureno: 1510/1511/1512. The multiple verifiction of the lrms will chnge depending on to which of these elements the conventionl detector chnnel of peripherl devices DC1192c, DC1151 or CB320A hs been ssigned. Alrm verifiction is modeled differently in FS20. The collective detector chnnel hs the 'Pulse memory' property. Becuse of these differences in modeling, the lrm verifiction of the peripherl devices DC1192c, DC1151, or CB320A is not trnsferred utomticlly when configurtion dt is imported from AlgoRex. The 'Pulse memory' must be reset

143 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion 10 To set the 'Pulse memory' property, proceed s follows: w The corresponding line device is imported. 1. Select the line element. 2. Select the property from the 'Pulse memory' drop-down list. Vlues in brckets lie outside the uthorized rnge. You will find dditionl informtion in the chpter 'Setting the properties of the line devices'. See lso 2 Setting the properties of the line devices [ 178] Interctive: Correcting DCW1151/DOW1171 ssignment The following description is for the import nd commissioning of interctive line crds which use the rdio gtewy with the DWA1151 switching unit nd contin the following devices: DCW1151 wireless fire detection system DOW1171 rdio smoke detector The following correction does not hve to be mde when using the rdio gtewy with the DWA1151 switching unit. The DCW1151 wireless fire detection system nd the DOW1171 rdio smoke detector re not recognized s wireless devices in Algorex. Following the import of interctive line crds in FS20, the DCW1151 wireless fire detection system is displyed in the system s DC1154 input/output module nd the DOW1171 rdio smoke detector is displyed s DF1191 flme detector. With this configurtion, the rdio system cn lso be operted on the AlgoRex EP5. The full functionl scope of the rdio gtewy cn be configured with the EP7 version of the DCW1151 fire detection system (DCW1151-B). The digitl output chnnel of the DC1154 input module is not needed for this ppliction. The input chnnel must be ssigned for bttery monitoring. The output chnnel only hs to be configured if the output contct of the DCW1151 wireless fire detection system is being used. The output chnnel must not be configured s monitored output with feedbck to the input; otherwise, n error messge will be displyed fter the output is ctivted. NOTICE Incorrect ssignment of the DOW1171 rdio smoke detector will suppress the output of wrnings bout low bttery chrge levels. Your device my fil unnoticed due to dischrged bttery. Replce the imported devices nd check the ssignment in 'Detection tree'

144 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Adpting configurtion Correcting the ssignment Proceed s follows to replce the imported devices: w An interctive line crd contining DCW1151 wireless fire detection system or DOW1171 rdio smoke detector hs been imported. 1. In the 'Tskcrd' 'Hrdwre', select the DCW1151 wireless fire detection system displyed s DC1154 or the DOW1171 rdio smoke detector displyed s DF Click on 'Edit' -> 'Replce element'. 3. Click on 'Replce'. DC1154 becomes DCW1151 (DC1154) or DF1191 becomes DOW1171 (DF1191). Once the devices hve been replced, the seril number shows s " ". However, the seril number hs been sved correctly internlly. When the site is reopened, the correct seril number is displyed. In the cse of n import, the replcement triggers n error in the 'Detection tree'. The logicl chnnel to which the DOW1171 is ssigned must be deleted nd ressigned. This step must be crried out in the event of recommissioning. The prmeter sets for the DOW1171 cnnot be set or selected until fter the devices hve been replced. In the cse of recommissioning, the input chnnel of the DCW1151 (DC1154) must be ssigned in zone so tht bttery trouble cn be reported. The output chnnel of the DCW1151 (DC1154) corresponds to the norml output chnnel of the DCW1151-B nd must be ssigned if necessry. You will find more informtion bout this topic in chpter 'Integrtion in AlgoRex control pnel' in document 'DCW1151, DOW1171 wireless fire detection system', doc. no The 'Replce element' ction cn be undone by repeting the process

145 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Loding the configurtion in the 'sttion' Adpting properties Due to the differences in modeling, the following properties re not imported into FS20 utomticlly nd re lost during the import process. Adpt the following properties mnully: In AlgoWorks In FS20 Applies to Differences More informtion Action text Action text Detection tsk crd > Zones V2 ALERT sound, EVAC sound Investigtion time (t2) 'ALERT' tone nd 'EVAC tone' Detector lines, collective detector lines Alrm sounders nd udible bses on FDnet detector lines I/O mode 'Output mode' Interctive inputs/outputs Action texts re predefined in AlgoWorks nd ssigned to the corresponding zones. In FS20, ction texts re entered directly in the corresponding field. In AlgoWorks, the investigtion time is set for individul zones. In FS20 the investigtion time is set for res. When new re is creted in FS20, defult vlue of 5 minutes is set for the investigtion time. If necessry, you cn lso set investigtion times for individul zones seprtely in FS20. In AlgoWorks, the properties of lrm sounders nd udible bses re set on the trnsponder. In FS20 these properties re set in the detil editor. In AlgoWorks, the vlue of 'Output mode' is set in checkboxes. In FS20, the vlue is set vi drop-down list. Configuring the 'Zone' [ 216] Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]. Setting the properties of the collective detector line [ 176] Properties of the bse sounder [ 157] Alrm sounder nd interbse [ 160] Inputs/outputs [ 172] 10.8 Loding the configurtion in the 'sttion' See lso 2 Loding configurtion from the PC to the sttion [ 114]

146 10 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Completing migrtion 10.9 Completing migrtion You will lso find importnt informtion in 'Import informtion report'. You will find more informtion bout creting reports in chpter Creting reports [ 101] Exporting n SIB-X For mngement systems like the MM8000, you need the configurtion dt in SiB-X formt. SiB-x is n exchnge formt for configurtion dt. Export the configurtion dt in SiB-X formt s follows: 1. Open 'Site' vi the 'File' > 'New site' or 'Open' menu item. 2. Click on the 'File' > 'SiB-X export' menu item. The 'SiB-X export' window opens. 3. Select the 'Sttions' you wnt. 4. Select the pth, enter file nme, nd click on 'Strt'. The configurtion dt is exported

147 AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion Completing migrtion Deleting import informtion NOTICE Dt loss Once import informtion hs been deleted, it cnnot be retrieved. Mke sure tht ll necessry informtion hs been imported. Crete bckup of the configurtion before you delete the import informtion. An import opertion is only complete when the 'Remove import informtion' commnd is executed. This commnd deletes files tht re no longer required nd releses memory spce. When the commnd is executed, the following informtion is deleted: The import history, i.e., the informtion bout which lines hve previously been imported. If, for exmple, file tht hs previously been imported is imported gin once the import informtion hs been deleted, the line elements tht hve previously been imported will lso be offered for selection for import. Dt tht ws included in the import for the commissioning of mngement sttions is lso deleted. The element 'Import info'. Deleting import informtion w You hve performed t lest one import opertion. In the menu br, click on 'Edit' > 'Remove import informtion'. The import informtion is deleted

148 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Completing migrtion 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd The components of the 'Sttion' nd the peripherl devices re shown in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. The components re utomticlly red in when the 'Sttion' is strted. The FDnet devices must be red in with commnd on the 'Sttion'. Figure 20: Tsk crd with the tree view nd tble The devices used with 'Sttions' FC2030 nd FC2060 of the collective line s well s the MS9i detector line must be produced mnully in the 'Hrdwre tree'. Once the dt hs been loded to SintesoWorks, the components of the 'Sttion' nd the FDnet devices re visible in the 'Hrdwre tree'. Elements such s the 'LED indictor (FTO2002)' cn be removed or dded if they were not utomticlly creted

149 'Hrdwre' tsk crd 'Sttion' 'Sttion' Figure 21: Settings in the detil editor In the detil editor of the 'Sttion', the following properties cn be set: 'Overview' tb: 'Customer text' of 'Sttion' 'Detils' tb: Stopping the locl nd globl lrming equipment by mens of 'Acknowledge', which is ctivted by 'Immedite intervention type 'mnned'' / 'Immedite intervention type 'unmnned'' or 'Service intervention type 'mnned'' / 'Service intervention type 'unmnned''. Activtion of messge so tht the customer is reminded to perform the mintennce work. 'Mintennce intervl [months]' cn be set in months. 'BACnet Notifiction Clss element' tb, see chpter 'BACnet Notifiction Clss Element [ 389]'. 'SintesoView' tb, see chpter 'Configuring permnent ccess for SintesoView [ 151]'. 'Network' tb: 'IP ddress' of the Ethernet port or SAFEDLINK port 'Events' tb: 'Event ctegories' nd event texts 'Intervention' tb, see chpter 'Intervention concept (IC) [ 150]'. 'Buzzer' tb: 'Element ddress' nd 'Customer text' of the buzzer The 'Disble operting terminl buzzer while SintesoView is ctive' checkbox defines whether the buzzer should be switched off while 'SintesoView' is ctive. 'Opertion' tb: Visibility on the event ctegories. Visibility is set on ll event ctegories s stndrd. Visibility cn lso be selected for individul event ctegories: 'ALARMS' 'Pre-ALARMS' 'Fults' 'Isoltions' 'Test messges' 'Technicl messges' 'Activtions' 'Informtion' 'Control' tb: Indictes to which events the 'Sttion' is ssigned s cuse element for control in the 'Control tree'

150 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd 'Sttion' Intervention concept (IC) The intervention concept (IC) is stndrd configurtion for immedite intervention nd service intervention. Events such s fult cused by soiled detector re monitored during preconfigured period of time. If the norml opertion conditions re not reestblished within this period of time, the mintennce personnel is informed (service intervention). In this wy, it is possible to rectify fult loclly before informing the mintennce personnel. You will find detiled description of the intervention concept in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The intervention concept verifies the following event ctegories: 'All fults' 'All isoltions' 'All test messges' 'All technicl messges' 'All ctivtions' 'All informtion messges' Configuring the intervention concept Figure 22: Detil editor with settings for intervention concept 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Select the 'Intervention' tb in the detil editor nd set the properties you wnt. Immedite intervention The following cn be set for immedite intervention: Seprtely for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion': 'Disbled' 'Delyed intervention' 'Globl intervention only' 'Locl intervention only' Time t1 for (intervention) ttendnce check: A new event must be cknowledged within this period, otherwise the intervention concept switches to globl lrming. Alrming equipment: 'RT Fire', 'RT Fult', 'RT 1' - 'RT 8', 'Internl sounder'

151 'Hrdwre' tsk crd 'Sttion' 11 Service intervention The following cn be set for service intervention: Seprtely for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion': 'Disbled' 'Delyed intervention' 'Direct intervention' Time for service intervention ts: The cuse of n event must be remedied within this period, otherwise the intervention concept ctivtes the service intervention lrming equipment. Alrming equipment: 'RT Fire', 'RT Fult', 'RT 1' - 'RT 8', 'Internl sounder' Configuring permnent ccess for SintesoView Permnent ccess hs to be configured for ech 'Sttion' of the 'Site'. Configuring permnent ccess mens tht ccess t the 'Sttion' is not required. You will find more informtion on the SintesoView opertion modes in chpter 'SintesoView [ 67]'. Configuring permnent ccess 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Select the 'Sttion' for which you wish to configure permnent ccess for SintesoView. 3. Select the 'SintesoView' tb in the detil editor. 4. Select the opertion mode in the 'Permnent SintesoView ccess' field. 5. Lod the configurtion from the PC to the sttion. Permnent ccess is configured. Figure 23: Configuring the opertion mode for SintesoView Indicting permnent ccess The 'Indicte permnent SintesoView ccess' checkbox specifies whether permnent ccess of SintesoView is indicted t the 'Sttion' with messge

152 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Onbord I/Os 11.2 Onbord I/Os The following inputs / outputs re vilble on the periphery bord: 'I/O': Configurble inputs / outputs (24 V) 'RT fire/not monitored': Connection of n RT chnnel for RT lrm 'RT fire/monitored': Monitored output for RT Alrm 'RT fult/not monitored': Connection of n RT chnnel for RT Fult 'RT fult/monitored': Monitored output for RT Fult 'Sounder/monitored': Monitored sounder output These inputs nd outputs re shown in the 'Hrdwre tree' under the 'Onbord I/Os' element. You will find informtion on the settings in the detil editor of the inputs / outputs in chpter 'Inputs/outputs [ 172]'. If the output is ssigned to the effect of control, you cn set dditionl properties in the 'Control' tb of the detil editor. You will find description of these settings in chpter 'Properties of the ssigned effect elements [ 237]' FDnet detector line Setting the properties of n FDnet detector line 'Up to 252 devices llowed per line': This setting specifies the mximum permissible number of devices per FDnet detector line: Checkbox ctivted: A mximum of 252 devices re permitted on the detector line. Checkbox dectivted: A mximum of 126 devices re permitted on the detector line. 'Events' tb The 'Events' tb llows you to mke AVC settings for line lrms. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]'. Line crd (FDnet/C-NET) FCL2001 The line crd (FDnet / C-NET) FCL2001 is used for expnding the integrted FDnet detector lines nd hs the sme functions. Four loops or eight stubs cn be connected to line crd (FDnet/C-NET). The line crd (FDnet/C-NET) is red in utomticlly. See lso 2 Creting 'Detection tree' [ 193] 2 Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]

153 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Automtic fire detectors Setting properties of n utomtic fire detector 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Highlight n utomtic fire detector. 4. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Not ll properties re vilble, depending on the utomtic fire detector. Figure 24: Properties in the detil editor of n utomtic fire detector 'Internl AI disbled in idle mode' This setting specifies whether the internl lrm indictor of the device is dectivted in quiescent condition. If the checkbox is ctivted, then the wek flshing of the internl lrm indictor will be dectivted in quiescent condition. This setting cn be used in environments in which the flshing would disturb, e.g. in theter or cinem. Independent of the setting, the internl lrm indictor lights up s before when there is n lrm. If the internl lrm indictor is dectivted, then communiction is not possible between the device nd the detector exchnger nd tester or the intelligent detector tester. The internl lrm indictor is temporrily ctivted nd communiction is possible, e.g., for checking the detector, with the commnd 'Enble MC link' on the Person Mchine Interfce of the sttion. The internl lrm indictor is dectivted once gin with the commnd 'Disble MC link'. You will find informtion for checking detectors in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 'Direct ctivtion of externl AI' This setting specifies which conditions must be fulfilled so tht the externl lrm indictor is ctivted directly. 'No direct ctivtion': The externl lrm indictor is not ctivted directly. 'By the ZONE of the detector in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by ny given device in the 'Zone'. 'By the DETECTOR in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by the detector with the externl lrm indictor. In the detil editor of the ssigned 'Zone', you cn set level t which the externl lrm indictor will be ctivted: In 'PRE-STAGE' nd 'MAIN STAGE' Only in 'MAIN STAGE' This setting is not possible in 'Zones' without 'PRE-STAGE'. In ddition to the direct ctivtion, you cn ssign nd configure control with the externl lrm indictor. You will find more informtion on this in chpter ''Control' tsk crd [ 232]'

154 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line 'Externl AI ctivtion in detector/wlk test' This setting specifies whether the externl lrm indictor is ctivted in 'Detector test' or 'Wlk test' mode. The checkbox cn only be ctivted if direct ctivtion is configured for the externl lrm indictor. 'Direct ctivtion of bse sounder' This setting specifies which conditions must be fulfilled so tht the bse sounder is ctivted directly: 'No direct ctivtion': The bse sounder is not ctivted directly. 'By the ZONE of the detector in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by ny given device in the 'Zone'. 'By the DETECTOR in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by the detector with the bse sounder. In the detil editor of the ssigned 'Zone', you cn set level t which the bse sounder will be ctivted: In 'PRE-STAGE' nd 'MAIN STAGE' Only in 'MAIN STAGE' This setting is not possible in 'Zones' without 'PRE-STAGE'. In ddition to this setting of the bse sounder, you cn configure 'Universl evc control' nd ssign it to bse sounder. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Evc control group [ 251]'. If both the direct ctivtion nd the control re ctive simultneously with different output modes ('Alert' nd 'Evc') then the bse sounder is ctivted with the mode 'Evc'. 'Bse sounder mode' This setting specifies in which mode the bse sounder is ctivted: 'Alert' or 'Evc' This setting is in reference only to direct ctivtion, which is configured with the property 'Direct ctivtion of bse sounder'. The mode cn be set seprtely for n dditionlly configured control

155 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Detector prmeter sets You will find detiled description of the prmeter sets in the documenttion for the corresponding detector. The prmeter sets influence the detection behvior of the utomtic fire detector. This enbles the detection behvior to be dpted to the fire phenomen nd environmentl influences t the plce of instlltion. Exmples: If fire detector is used in production hll, prmeter set tht is immune to deceptive phenomen must be selected. If the smoke detector is used in hospitl room, prmeter set tht ensures the erliest possible lrming must be selected. Set prmeter set Figure 25: Detil editor with settings for detector prmeter set 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the detector. 4. Highlight the element 'Sensor'. 5. Set the desired prmeter set in the detil editor. With S-LINE detectors, the prmeter sets for the 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion' cn be set seprtely. In the cse of C-LINE detectors, you cn set only one prmeter set. The vilble prmeter sets re dpted, depending on the selected sensor mode. If, for exmple, you select the sensor mode '1: T only', then only the prmeter sets for het detectors will be displyed

156 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Sensor mode with multi-sensor fire detectors In the cse of multi-sensor fire detectors, you cn set which sensor is to be used. Setting the sensor mode Figure 26: Properties in the detil editor of the sensor of multi-sensor fire detector 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the multi-sensor fire detector, e.g. FDOOTC Highlight the element 'Sensor'. 5. In the detil editor, select the desired sensor mode with the property 'Sensor operting mode': '0: OOT(C)': Appliction s neurl fire detector '2: O only': Appliction s smoke detector '1: T only': Appliction s het detector The vilble prmeter sets re dpted, depending on the selected sensor mode. If, for exmple, you select the sensor mode '1: T only', then only the prmeter sets for het detectors will be displyed

157 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Bse sounder Properties of the bse sounder Setting the properties of the bse sounder 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open detector with bse sounder. 4. Highlight the element 'Bse sounder' Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. 1 If the element 'Bse sounder' ws not creted utomticlly t the time of red-in, then you must crete it mnully. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Creting bse sounder [ 158]'. Figure 27: Properties in the detil editor of bse sounder 'ALERT tone' This setting specifies the tone in the 'Alert' mode. 'EVAC tone' This setting specifies the tone in the 'Evc' mode. 'Sounder volume' This setting specifies the sound level in the ctivted sttus

158 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Creting bse sounder If the product version of the sounder bse FDSB291 or of the fire detector in the sounder bse FDSB291 is <30, then the 'Bse sounder' element is not utomticlly creted when the FDnet devices re red in. If this is the cse, then you must crete the 'Bse sounder' element mnully. You will find the product version (ES) on the type plte of the device. ES Figure 28: Type lbel of the sounder bse ES Figure 29: Type lbel of the fire detector Creting 'Bse sounder' element 1. In the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd, select > 'Sttion' > 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)' > 'Line'. 2. Crete the element 'Bse sounder' for the detector inserted in the sounder bse. Link [ 77]

159 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Externl lrm indictor Some FDnet devices hve n output for n externl lrm indictor. The output cn be used to ctute n externl lrm indictor nd for controls. Setting the properties of the externl lrm indictor 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the device with one output for n externl lrm indictor. 4. Highlight the element 'Ext. AI'. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Figure 30: Properties in the detil editor of one output for n externl lrm indictor 'Output mode' The setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic. Exmples: 'Inctive: Off / ctive: On': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is inctive nd ctivted when it is ctive. 'Inctive: Off / ctive: Intermittent, fst (0.25s/0.25s)': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is inctive. When the logic is ctive, it is 0.25 s HIGH nd 0.25 s LOW (lternting). 'Alwys Off': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is either inctive or ctive. 'Output fil sfe position' This setting specifies the position of the output if the communiction between device nd line interfce is disrupted or if the line voltge fils

160 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Alrm sounder nd interbse You cn configure the properties for the coustic nd opticl lrming for the following devices: Alrm sounder FDS221 Alrm sounder with supplementry opticl indiction FDS229 Sounder interbse FDSB221 Sounder becon interbse FDSB229 Setting properties of the lrm sounders nd interbses 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the element 'FDS221', 'FDS229', 'FDSB221' or 'FDSB229'. 4. Highlight the element 'Sounder' or 'Sounder becon'. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Figure 31: Properties in the detil editor of the element 'Sounder' Figure 32: Properties in the detil editor of the element 'Sounder becon' 'ALERT tone' This setting specifies the tone in the 'Alert' mode. 'EVAC tone' This setting specifies the tone in the 'Evc' mode. 'Sounder volume' This setting specifies the sound level in the ctivted sttus. 'Becon ctivtion' This setting specifies the ctivtion mode of the becon. This property is vilble only for FDS229 nd FDSB

161 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line 11 'Flshing pttern' This setting specifies the flshing pttern of the becon. If you select flshing pttern with self-test function, then the becon will light up briefly every couple of hours. If you do not wnt the becon to light up during norml opertion, then you must select flshing pttern without self-test function. This property is vilble only for FDSB229. You will find dditionl informtion on the interbses nd lrm sounders in the following documents: FDS221: Document FDS229: Document FDSB221 nd FDSB229: Document A6V See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] Aspirting smoke detector You will find more informtion bout the spirting smoke detectors in document A6V See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The elements 'FDA221' nd 'FDA241' ech contin the following physicl chnnels: 'Sensor 1' 'Sensor 2' 'Air flow' 'ASD info' WARNING Incorrect sensor link for the FDA221 nd FDA241 If the FDA221 or FDA241 sensors re ssigned to different 'Zones', the detection behvior corresponding to the prmeter set is not gurnteed. Assign both FDA221 or FDA241 sensors to the sme 'Zone' in the 'Detection tree'. Setting the properties of the spirting smoke detector 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the element 'FDA221' or 'FDA241'. 4. Highlight physicl chnnel. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections

162 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Properties of the elements 'Sensor 1' nd 'Sensor 2' Figure 33: FDA221: Settings in the detil editor of the element 'Sensor 1' Figure 34: FDA241: Settings in the detil editor of the element 'Sensor 1' 'Prmeter set' This setting specifies the prmeter set of the detector for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion'. 'Prmeter set 'mnned'' This setting specifies the prmeter set of the detector for 'Mnned opertion'. 'Prmeter set 'unmnned'' This setting specifies the prmeter set of the detector for 'Unmnned opertion'. 'Sensor operting mode FDA' ('Sensor 1' only) This setting specifies the sensor mode of the detector. Properties of the 'Air flow' element Figure 35: Settings in the detil editor of the element 'Air flow' 'Purge mode' This setting specifies the clening mode of the ir flow tube. 'Mx. llowed ir flow devition' This setting specifies the mximum llowble ir flow devition from the ir flow t the time of commissioning. Vlues in brckets re outside the uthorized rnge. 'Air flow fult dely' This setting specifies how long the fult messge is delyed if the ir flow is outside the vlid rnge. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

163 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Input/output module FDCIO223 You will find more informtion on input / output module FDCIO223 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The input/output module FDCIO223 hs two inputs/outputs, which cn be used s follows: Connection of collective detector lines Connection of sounder lines Monitored output Monitored input If the product version of your input/output module FDCIO223 is 40, you cn use the inputs/outputs in mixed opertion, i.e. you cn use n input/output module for two different pplictions from mong the ones listed bove. You will find the product version (ES) on the type plte of the input/output module. Siemens Switzerlnd Ltd. Fire Sfety & Security Products FDCIO223 S24218-B102-A1 40 ES EN54-18:2005 EN54-17:2005 IdNr. SW-Vers. G Swiss Mde Figure 36: Type plte of input/output module FDCIO223 You will find more informtion on input/output module FDCIO223 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'

164 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Setting the properties of the 'Collective/input/sounder/output' element 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the element 'FDCIO223'. 4. Highlight the element 'Collective/input/sounder/output'. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Only certin properties re vilble, depending on how the element 'Collective/input/sounder/output' is configured. If the element 'Collective/input/sounder/output' is configured s collective detector line, for exmple, then you cn only set the properties in the rnge 'Collective line'. The other properties re gryed out. Figure 37: Properties in the detil editor of the physicl chnnel of the input / output module FDCIO223 'Collective line type' This setting specifies which type of collective detector line is connected. 'Coll. line: lrm response / fult dely' This setting specifies the lrm rection time nd the fult dely time of the collective detector line. The lrm rection time refers to the device's internl lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets re outside the uthorized rnge. 'Input inverted' This setting specifies whether the input is inverted. Checkbox ctivted: Input is ctive when signl is chnging from HIGH to LOW. Checkbox dectivted: Input is ctive when signl is chnging from LOW to HIGH. 'Input monitoring': This setting specifies the monitoring of the input: Monitoring for open line Monitoring for short circuit nd open line No monitoring 'ALERT mode' This setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the 'Alert' mode for the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic. 'EVAC/output mode' Use s sounder line: The setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the 'Evc' mode for the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic. If used s monitored output: This setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic

165 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line 11 'Sounder line/output: fult dely' This setting specifies the dely time for the trnsmission of fults of the sounder line or of the output, respectively. Vlues in brckets re outside the uthorized rnge. 'Sounder line/output: lod resistor' This setting specifies the lod resistnce for the monitoring of the sounder line or of the output, respectively. 'Output fil sfe position' This setting specifies the position of the output if the communiction between device nd line interfce is disrupted or if the line voltge fils. 'Enble temporry freeze of output position' If the checkbox is checked, the 'Freeze selected outputs ON' commnd is vilble for the output. The position of the output is not chnged if the 'Sttion' or line is restrted, configurtion is loded to the 'Sttion', or module is reset. See lso 2 Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 or zone module [ 225] 2 Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO223 [ 279] 2 Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output [ 282] 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

166 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd FDnet detector line Zone module FDCI223 The zone module FDCI223 is operted on the 'FDnet' nd hs one input. The following detector lines cn be connected to the input: Collective detector line Collective detector line for res t risk of explosion (zones 1 nd 2) Conventionl detector line Setting the properties of the 'Collective' element 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' > the line crd > the loop or the stub. 3. Open the element 'FDCI223'. 4. Highlight the element 'Collective'. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Figure 38: Properties in the detil editor for the physicl chnnel of the zone module 'Collective line type' This setting specifies which type of collective detector line is connected. 'Coll. line: lrm response / fult dely' This setting specifies the lrm rection time nd the fult dely time of the collective detector line. The lrm rection time refers to the device's internl lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets re outside the uthorized rnge

167 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Power supply Power supply Opertion modes The power supply for the 'Sttions' hs the following opertion modes: Opertion with bttery bckup The power supply unit feeds the hrdwre with system voltge, continuously chrging the btteries. In the event of mins voltge filure, the btteries tke over the power supply of the 'Sttion' without interruption. Opertion without bttery bckup The power supply unit feeds the hrdwre with system voltge. The emergency power supply is ensured vi n externlly buffered network. Opertion with n externl DC power supply unit The supply comes directly vi 24 V feed line. This is the norml opertion mode for the fire terminl FT2040. Opertion with redundnt supply The fire terminl cn be supplied with 24 V voltge through fire control pnel. In ccordnce with EN 54, redundnt supply source is required in this cse. The fire terminl bord is therefore provided with two independent DC supply inputs. Fetures The following properties cn be set for the power supply: Mins supervision: Monitoring for power loss. Bttery supervision: Monitoring switched on or off. Converter supervision: Monitoring switched on or off. Emergency power opertion: Dely time for fult disply in the cse of power loss. Setting properties Depending on the opertion mode, certin forms of monitoring must be switched off. Normlly when the sttion is equipped with power supply unit nd btteries, no monitorings need dectivting. The configurtion of the dely time for the fult indiction in cse of power filure is independent from the opertion mode. Figure 39: Detil editor with settings for the power supply To set the properties, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Power supply FC' or 'Power supply FT'. 4. Activte/dectivte the checkboxes s indicted in the following tble in the 'Overview' tb of the detil editor

168 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Power supply Opertion mode With bttery bckup Without bttery bckup With n externl DC power supply unit With redundnt supply 'Mins supervision enbled' 'Bttery supervision enbled' 'Converter supervision enbled' or or Disply dely 'Emergency power dely', 'Enbled' Tble 3: Configurtion of the power supply Checkbox checked Checkbox unchecked You will find the hrdwre configurtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

169 'Hrdwre' tsk crd I/O crds I/O crds I/O crd (progrmmble) FCI2008-A1 The I/O crd (progrmmble) FCI2008-A1 hs 12 progrmmble inputs / outputs. I/O crd (remote trnsmission) FCI2007-A1 The I/O crd (remote trnsmission) FCI2007-A1 hs eight inputs / outputs for lrm nd fult trnsmission. I/O crd (horn/monitored) FCI2009-A1 The I/O crd (horn / monitored) FCI2009-A1 hs eight monitored outputs for lrm nd fult trnsmission. You will find dditionl informtion on the I/O crds in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Crete I/O crd 1. Select 'Hrdwre' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the I/O crd for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] Setting the properties of the I/O crds In the detil editor of the elements 'I/O crd (remote trnsm., FCI2007)' nd 'I/O crd (horn/monitored, FCI2009)', you cn set the following in the 'Detils' tb: Figure 40: Settings in the detil editor of n I/O crd 'Sounder output monitoring': This setting specifies in ccordnce with which stndrd the outputs will be monitored. You will find more informtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The properties of the inputs / outputs of n I/O crd re described in chpter 'Inputs/outputs [ 172]'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

170 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd LED indictor FTO LED indictor FTO2002 Creting 'LED indictor (FTO2002)' element 1. Select 'Hrdwre' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'LED indictor (FTO2002)' element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] 3. Highlight the element 'LED indictor (FTO2002)'. 4. Enter the ddress in the 'Element ddress' tb of the detil editor, which is set on the LED indictor with the S15 switch. Address rnge: You will find more informtion on the LED indictor nd the S15 switch in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. When the hrdwre is red-in, the ddress set in the LED indictor is utomticlly trnsferred in SintesoWorks. Properties of the 'LED indictor (FTO2002)' element In the detil editor of the 'LED indictor (FTO2002)' element, the following cn be set on the 'Detils' tb: Figure 41: Properties in the detil editor of the LED indictor 'Suppress LED test': This setting specifies whether n LED test is lso crried out on the LED indictor when n LED test is performed on the connected 'Sttion'. If the 'Suppress LED test' checkbox is ctivted, LED test is not crried out on the LED indictor

171 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Ethernet switch (modulr) FN Ethernet switch (modulr) FN2012 IP ddress The IP ddress of the FN2012-A1 is configured in the following element: 'Network' tsk crd > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'Connections' > 'Sttion with the FN2012- A1' > 'Overview' tb > 'IP ddress network switch' field Resetting the network configurtion If the 'Reset network configurtion' commnd is executed in the 'Network' menu, the IP ddress of the FN2012-A1 is set to x. The network msk is set to Commissioning In document , you will find description of how to commission n FN2012- A1 tht is connected to the sttion vi ribbon cble. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Redundncy mngement You cn configure redundncy mngement for Ethernet networks with severl elements of the 'Ethernet switch (modulr, FN2012)' type in the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' element in the 'Network' tsk crd. Link [ 371] Stndlone FN2012 Stndlone FN2012-A1 devices tht re not connected to the sttion cnnot be configured in Engineering Tool. You will find more informtion on commissioning stndlone FN2012-A1 devices in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Mlfunctions during prtil upgrde Ethernet switch (modulr) FN2012 is not comptible with Ethernet switch (MM) FN2008 nd so my only be used in pnels MP

172 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Inputs/outputs 11.8 Inputs/outputs Setting the properties of the inputs/outputs 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the element with the inputs/outputs, e.g. n I/O crd, n input/output module or the onbord I/Os. 4. Highlight n input/output. 5. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The properties re described in the following sections. Not ll properties re vilble, depending on the input/output. Properties in the 'Overview' tb of n input 'Input inverted' This setting specifies whether the input is inverted. Checkbox ctivted: Input is ctive when signl is chnging from HIGH to LOW. Checkbox dectivted: Input is ctive when signl is chnging from LOW to HIGH. 'Short circuit monitoring enbled' This setting specifies whether the monitoring is ctivted when there is short circuit. The short circuit monitoring requires specil wiring. If the short circuit monitoring is dectivted, then short circuit is evluted s 'ctive'. This cn be used for the connection of old detectors with bimetllic switches or of mnul cll points with switches. For these pplictions, you must dectivte the short circuit monitoring nd ssign the input to 'Zone'. 'Suppress fult messge upon 'open line' on input' If the checkbox is checked, open line monitoring of the input / output module is suppressed on the control pnel. If the input is operted without n EOL resistor, the checkbox must be checked. Properties on the 'Overview' tb of n output with monitoring

173 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Inputs/outputs 11 'Output mode' The setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic. Exmples: 'Inctive: Off / ctive: On': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is inctive nd ctivted when it is ctive. 'Inctive: Off / ctive: Intermittent, fst (0.25s/0.25s)': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is inctive. When the logic is ctive, it is 0.25 s HIGH nd 0.25 s LOW (lternting). 'Alwys Off': The output signl is dectivted when the logic is either inctive or ctive. 'Output fil sfe position' This setting specifies the position of the output if the communiction between device nd line interfce is disrupted or if the line voltge fils. 'Enble temporry freeze of output position' If the checkbox is checked, the 'Freeze selected outputs ON' commnd is vilble for the output. The position of the output is not chnged if the 'Sttion' or line is restrted, configurtion is loded to the 'Sttion', or module is reset. 'Output monitoring' This setting defines the jumper position of the device for configuring output monitoring. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

174 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Creting the line crd 11.9 Creting the line crd You cn crete the following line crds for fire control pnels FC2030, FC2060 nd FC2080: Line crd (FDnet/C-NET) Line crd (collective) Line crd (MS9i) Line crd (AnlogPLUS) Line crd (interctive) Line crd (interctive, Ex) Allocting ddresses In the cse of control pnel FC2030, the line crds re ssigned ddresses 111 to 112. In the cse of control pnels FC2060 nd FC2080, the line crds re ssigned ddresses 111 to 115. The crds in the crd cge re ddressed from right to left. Creting the line crd 1. In the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd, select > 'Sttion' of type FC2030, FC2060, or FC Crete one of the elements below for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)' 'Interctive line crd (FCL2006)' 'Interctive Ex line crd (FCL2007)' 'AnlogPLUS line crd (FCL2005)' 'MS9i line crd (FCL2003)' 'Collective line crd (FCL2002)' 3. Enter customer texts

175 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Collective detector line Collective detector line Eight collective stubs cn be connected to the FCL2002 line crd (collective). The following detector systems re supported: MS7, MS9, MS24, DS11, Sinteso multi-protocol (e.g. FDOOT241-9), SynoLINE600 nd SIGMACON You will find list of the supported detectors in document 'List of comptibility'. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Although the line crd (collective) is red in, the collective detector line must lwys be fully pre-configured. Configuring the collective detector line 1. Crete suitble 'Sttion'. Link [ 76] 2. Crete the line crd (collective). 3. Crete the 'Zones' nd ssign it to the collective detector lines. Link [ 175] 4. Set the properties of the collective detector line. Link [ 176] 5. Set the properties of the line devices. Link [ 178] You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges Creting 'Zones' nd ssigning them to collective detector lines 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Crete the logicl elements s fr s the 'Zone' level. Link [ 193] 3. Assign the 'Zone' to 'Devices' element / event ctegory 'Collective' from collective detector line in the 'Hrdwre tree'. Link [ 85] Figure 42: Assigning 'Zone' to collective detector line See lso 2 Creting 'Detection tree' [ 193]

176 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Collective detector line Setting the properties of the collective detector line NOTICE Incorrect selection of the 'Collective line type' Dmge to detector Select the correct 'Collective line type'. Dmge to the detector cused by incorrectly selecting the 'Collective line type' cn only be determined by performing detector check nd cnnot be evluted by the control pnel. You will find informtion bout the respective 'Collective line type' listed below nd described in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Highlight collective detector line in the tree view. 3. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Overview' tb Figure 43: Detil editor with settings for the collective detector line 'Collective line type': Type of the connected collective detector line. Configurtion dt cnnot be loded in the control pnel if the 'Not configured' setting is selected when the detector line is ssigned. Delete the ssignment or select the correct detector line type. If collective detector lines re not used, then you must select the setting 'Not configured' for 'Collective line type'. 'No grey zone / trnszorb diode (20V)': For MS24, DS11, Sinteso multi-protocol (e.g. FDOOT241-9) nd SynoLINE600 with trnszorb s end-of-line Line chrcteristics: RL <150 Ω, CL <300 nf, CL with detector <4.5 µf, LL <5 mh Detection of creeping open line or short-circuit 'No grey zone / EOL22(Ex)': For MS7, MS9, MS24, DS11, Sinteso multi-protocol (e.g. FDOOT241-9), SynoLINE600 nd SIGMACON with EOL22(Ex) s end-of-line Line chrcteristics: RL <250 Ω, CL <300 nf, CL with detector <4.5 µf, LL <5 mh Detection of creeping open line or short-circuit

177 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Collective detector line 11 'Grey zone / 3.3k Ohm' (not VdS 2489-complint): For MS7, MS9, MS24, DS11, Sinteso multi-protocol (e.g. FDOOT241-9), SynoLINE600 nd SIGMACON with 3.3 kω s end-of-line Line chrcteristics: RL <250 Ω, CL <300 nf, CL with detector <4.5 µf, LL <5 mh This line type cn only be used for moderniztion. 'Grey zone / 4.7k Ohm' (not VdS 2489-complint): For MS7, MS9, MS24, DS11, Sinteso multi-protocol (e.g. FDOOT241-9), SynoLINE600 nd SIGMACON with 4.7 kω s end-of-line Line chrcteristics: RL <250 Ω, CL <300 nf, CL with detector <4.5 µf, LL <5 mh This line type cn only be used for moderniztion. 'Not configured': Select this setting when the collective detector line is not used. 'Short circuit = ALARM': If the checkbox is checked, short-circuit is evluted s n lrm on the collective detector line. Some detector types require this function. Use the 'List of comptibility' document to check tht there re no detector types on the detector line tht do not permit ctivtion of this function. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 'Detils' tb Figure 44: Detil editor with settings for collective detector line 'Fult dely': This setting specifies how long fult on the detector line must be present before fult messge is displyed. In ccordnce with EN 54, the entered vlue my not exceed mximum of 100 s

178 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd MS9i detector line Setting the properties of the line devices 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open collective detector line in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Devices'. 4. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. You cn set the following properties in the detil editor of the 'Devices' element: Figure 45: Detil editor with settings for the line devices 'Pulse memory': This setting specifies which pulse memory function is used for the lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets lie outside the uthorized rnge. 'None': Alrm signls re brought to the ppliction without further verifiction. 'One stge': dnger level 3 strts one-stge verifiction. '(Two stge)': Dnger level 3 strts two-stge verifiction MS9i detector line The line elements (detectors, input/output modules) connected to the line crd (MS9i) FCL2003 cnnot be red in by the FS20 fire detection system. The line elements must be creted mnully. The following element types exist: 'MS9i detector': for utomtic fire detectors: Bse Z90i, Z94i Mster bse Z90Mi, Z94Mi Mster element E90Mi, collective line or digitl input 'MS9i MCP': for ech mnul cll point type 'MS9i multi mster': for the multimster crd K5M010 A totl of four must be creted from this element, with subordinte ddresses. 'MS9i module': for the control element E90Ci Configuring the MS9i detector line Although the line crd (MS9i) is red in, the MS9i detector line must lwys be fully pre-configured. 1. Crete suitble 'Sttion'. Link [ 76] 2. Crete the line crd (MS9i). Link [ 174] 3. Crete the line elements nd 'Zones' nd ssign them to one nother. Link [ 179] 4. Crete the controls nd ssign them to the line elements. Link [ 180] 5. Set the properties of the MS9i detector line. Link [ 180] 6. Set the properties of the line elements. Link [ 181] You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges

179 'Hrdwre' tsk crd MS9i detector line Creting nd ssigning line elements nd 'Zones' You cn use the function 'Crete nd Assign' to crete nd ssign severl line elements to one nother in the 'Hrdwre tree' nd the 'Zones' in the 'Detection tree' in single step. While doing so, you cn specify the customer texts for the 'Zones'. Figure 46: Creting nd ssigning line elements 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Detection re' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Section'. 4. Open the 'Crete nd Assign' window. The 'Crete nd Assign' window cn be opened s follows: button in the toolbr 'Commissioning' > 'Crete nd Assign' menu item Context menu <Ctrl> + <K> 5. Select the desired 'Zone' nd the element type on the left in the window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Select the MS9i detector line on which you wish to crete the line element. 7. In the 'No. of devices:' field, select the templte for the 'Zone'. 8. You cn enter the customer text of the 'Zone customer text:' in the field 'Zone'. 9. Enter the number of line elements tht you wish to crete in the 'No. of devices:' field. 10. Enter the ddress of the line element in the '(First) device ddress:' field. If you crete severl line elements, enter the ddress of the first line element. 11. Click on 'Crete & Assign'. The line element nd the 'Zone' re creted nd ssigned. If you crete severl line elements, 'Zone' is creted for ech line element

180 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd MS9i detector line You cn lso crete nd ssign the line elements without the function 'Crete nd Assign'. To do so, proceed s follows. 1. Crete the line elements in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Zones' in the 'Detection' tsk crd. 3. Assign the line elements to the 'Zones' Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Crete the logicl elements s fr s the 'Controls' level. Link [ 232] 3. Assign 'Fire control' > 'Cuses' to the 'Detection tree'. 4. Assign 'Fire control' > 'Effects' to 'Output' of 'MS9i module' element. 5. Select the 'New effect dilog' commnd in the 'Outputs with confirmtion' window. 6. Assign the 'Output' nd 'Input' chnnels of the 'MS9i module' element. You will find more informtion on progrm opertion in chpter 'Assigning elements [ 85]' Setting the properties of the MS9i detector line 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Highlight n MS9i detector line in the tree view. 3. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Overview' tb Figure 47: Detil editor with settings for the MS9i detector line 'Loop': This setting specifies the detector line topology. Activte the checkbox if the MS9i detector line is loop

181 'Hrdwre' tsk crd MS9i detector line 11 'Detils' tb Figure 48: Detil editor with settings for the MS9i detector line 'Fult dely': This setting specifies how long fult on the detector line must be present before fult messge is displyed. In ccordnce with EN 54, the entered vlue my not exceed mximum of 100 s. 'Events' tb The 'Events' tb llows you to mke AVC settings for line lrms. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]' Setting the properties of the line elements 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open line element in the tree view. 3. Highlight the physicl chnnel, e.g. 'Sensor'. 4. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'MS9i detector' nd 'MS9i multi mster' Figure 49: Detil editor with properties of the sensor 'Drift supervision enbled': If the checkbox is ctivted, then drift query will be performed regulrly for the device. A drift messge is displyed s service informtion. The drift query cn be used only for devices of the MS9i+ type. The checkbox my not be ctivted for other devices. 'Pulse memory': This setting specifies which pulse memory function is used for the lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets lie outside the uthorized rnge. 'None': Alrm signls re brought to the ppliction without further verifiction. 'One stge': dnger level 3 strts one-stge verifiction. '(Two stge)': Dnger level 3 strts two-stge verifiction

182 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd AnlogPLUS detector line 'MS9i module' element Figure 50: Detil editor with properties of the input 'Inverted': This setting specifies whether the input or the output is inverted. Inverted input: The input is evluted s ctive when the input signl is inctive. Inverted output: The output is ctivted when the ssigned control is inctive AnlogPLUS detector line The line elements ( utomtic fire detectors, mnul cll points, input/output modules) connected to the line crd (AnlogPLUS) FCL2005 cnnot be red in by the FS20 fire detection system. The line elements must be creted mnully. You will find more informtion on the line elements tht re supported on the AnlogPLUS detector line in documents nd See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Configuring the AnlogPLUS detector line The AnlogPLUS detector line must lwys be pre-configured in full. You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges. 1. Crete suitble 'Sttion'. Link [ 76] 2. Crete the line crd (MS9i). Link [ 174] 3. Crete the line elements nd 'Zones' nd ssign them to one nother. Link [ 183] 4. Configure the line type. Link [ 184] 5. Crete the controls nd ssign them to the line elements. Link [ 184] 6. Set the properties of the AnlogPLUS detector line. Link [ 184] 7. Set the properties of the line elements. Link [ 186] You will find more informtion on using AlgoRex dt migrtion to pre-configure the AnlogPLUS detector line in chpter 'AlgoRex/SIGMASYS dt migrtion [ 125]'

183 'Hrdwre' tsk crd AnlogPLUS detector line Creting nd ssigning line elements nd 'Zones' To crete nd ssign line elements nd 'Zones' for the AnlogPLUS detector line, follow the steps below: 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' > 'Detection re' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Section'. 4. Open the 'Crete nd Assign' window. 5. Select the desired 'Zone' nd the element type on the left in the window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. Figure 51: Creting nd ssigning line elements 6. Select the AnlogPLUS detector line on which you wish to crete the line element. 7. In the 'Zone templte:' field, select the templte for the 'Zone'. 8. You cn enter the customer text of the 'Zone customer text:' in the field 'Zone'. 9. Enter the number of line elements tht you wish to crete in the 'No. of devices:' field. 10. Enter the ddress of the line element in the '(First) device ddress:' field. If you crete severl line elements, enter the ddress of the first line element. 11. Click on 'Crete & Assign'. The line element nd the 'Zone' re creted nd ssigned. If you crete severl line elements, 'Zone' is creted for ech line element. You cn lso crete nd ssign the line elements without the function 'Crete nd Assign'. To do so, proceed s follows. 1. Crete the line elements in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Zones' in the 'Detection' tsk crd. 3. Assign the line elements to the 'Zones'

184 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd AnlogPLUS detector line Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements w The line elements re now vilble in the 'Hrdwre tree'. 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Crete the logicl elements s fr s the 'Controls' level. Link [ 232] 3. Assign 'Fire control' > 'Effects' to elements of the AnlogPLUS detector line. Select the 'New effect dilog' commnd in the 'Outputs with confirmtion' window. Assign the 'Output' nd 'Input' chnnels of the AnlogPLUS elements. You will find more informtion on ssigning the 'Fire control' element in chpter 'Assigning fire control [ 240]' Configuring the line type for n AnlogPLUS detector line The line type configurtion for the AnlogPLUS detector line is indicted by the 'Hrdwre' checkbox on the following tb: 'Overview' tsk crd > AnlogPLUS detector line > 'Loop'. Figure 52: Topology configurtion Configuring the AnlogPLUS detector line s loop By defult, ech AnlogPLUS detector line is pre-configured s loop. The checkbox 'Loop' is ctivted. Configuring the AnlogPLUS detector line s stub A stub hs to be configured mnully. 1. Select the detector line. 2. Select the 'Overview' tb. 3. Uncheck the 'Loop' checkbox Setting the properties of the AnlogPLUS detector line Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 1. Highlight the AnlogPLUS detector line in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Overview' tb 'Loop': This setting specifies the detector line topology. You will find more informtion in chpter 'Configuring the line type for n AnlogPLUS detector line [ 184]'

185 'Hrdwre' tsk crd AnlogPLUS detector line 11 'Detils' tb Figure 53: Detil editor with settings for the AnlogPLUS detector line 'Fult dely': This setting specifies how long fult on the detector line must be present before fult messge is displyed. In ccordnce with EN 54, the entered vlue my not exceed mximum of 100 s. 'Events' tb The 'Events' tb llows you to mke AVC settings for line lrms. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]' Configuring line element ddresses The ddresses of the line elements on the AnlogPLUS detector line re generted in the order in which the elements re dded. You cn subsequently configure the ddress of line element on the AnlogPLUS detector line mnully. 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Select line element on the AnlogPLUS detector line. 3. Go to the 'Overview' tb nd enter the ddress of the line element in the 'Element ddress' field. The configurble ddress of n AnlogPLUS line element is not the sme s the D-bus ddress. The D-bus ddresses re no longer visible in the FS

186 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd AnlogPLUS detector line Setting the properties of the line elements 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open line element in the tree view. 3. Highlight the physicl chnnel, e.g. 'Sensor'. 4. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Sensor' element Figure 54: Sensor settings 'Multi verifiction' 'Simple': Single signl verifiction with stndrd sensitivity 'Multi': Multiple signl verifiction with stndrd sensitivity 'Simple / sensitive': Single signl verifiction with enhnced sensitivity 'Multi / sensitive': Multiple signl verifiction with enhnced sensitivity 'Input', 'Output' nd 'Horn' elements Figure 55: Input, output nd horn settings 'Inverted': This setting specifies whether the input or the output is inverted. Inverted input: The input is evluted s ctive when the input signl is inctive. Inverted output: The output is ctivted when the ssigned control is inctive

187 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line 11 'Collective' element Figure 56: 'Collective' settings 'Pulse memory': This setting specifies which pulse memory function is used for the lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets lie outside the uthorized rnge. 'None': Alrm signls re brought to the ppliction without further verifiction. 'One stge': dnger level 3 strts one-stge verifiction. '(Two stge)': Dnger level 3 strts two-stge verifiction Interctive detector line There re two wys to commission the line elements, e.g., utomtic fire detectors, mnul cll points, input/output modules, tht re connected to the line crd (interctive) or line crd (interctive, Ex): By reding them into the 'Sttion' By using AlgoRex dt migrtion to perform pre-configurtion You will find more informtion on the line elements tht re supported on the interctive detector line in documents nd See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Configuring n interctive detector line following dt migrtion w You hve lredy creted pre-configurtion by crrying out dt migrtion. Link [ 125] 1. Crete the 'Zones' nd ssign it to the interctive detector lines. Link [ 188] 2. Crete the controls nd ssign them to the line elements. Link [ 188] 3. Set the properties of the interctive detector line. Link [ 189] 4. Set the properties of the line devices. Link [ 190] Configuring n interctive detector line fter reding in the line w w You hve lredy commissioned the detector line. You will find more informtion bout this in document You hve loded the 'Sttion' configurtion into 'SintesoWorks'. 1. Crete the 'Zones' nd ssign it to the interctive detector lines. Link [ 188] 2. Crete the controls nd ssign them to the line elements. Link [ 188] 3. Set the properties of the interctive detector line. Link [ 189] 4. Set the properties of the line devices. Link [ 190]

188 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line Creting 'Zones' nd ssigning them to n interctive detector line 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Crete the logicl elements s fr s the 'Zone' level. Link [ 193] 3. Assign the 'Zone' to n element from the desired interctive detector line in the 'Hrdwre tree'. Link [ 85] Figure 57: Assigning 'Zone' to n interctive detector line Creting controls nd ssigning them to line elements w The line elements re now vilble in the 'Hrdwre tree'. 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Crete the logicl elements s fr s the 'Controls' level. Link [ 232] 3. Assign 'Fire control' > 'Effects' to elements of the AnlogPLUS detector line. Select the 'Outputs with confirmtion' commnd in the 'New effect dilog' window. Assign the 'Output' nd 'Input' chnnels of the AnlogPLUS elements. You will find more informtion on ssigning the 'Fire control' element in chpter 'Assigning fire control [ 240]'

189 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line Configuring the line type for n interctive detector line The line type configurtion for the interctive detector line is indicted by the Hrdwre' checkbox on the following tb: 'Overview' tsk crd > Interctive detector line > 'Loop'. Figure 58: Topology configurtion Configuring the interctive detector line s loop By defult, ech interctive detector line is pre-configured s loop. The checkbox 'Loop' is ctivted. Configuring the interctive detector line s stub A stub hs to be configured mnully. 1. Select the detector line. 2. Select the 'Overview' tb. 3. Uncheck the 'Loop' checkbox Setting the properties of the interctive detector line Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 1. Go to the tree view nd highlight the interctive or interctive Ex detector line. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Overview' tb 'Loop': This setting specifies the detector line topology. You will find more informtion in chpter 'Configuring the line type for n interctive detector line [ 189]'. 'Detils' tb Figure 59: Detil editor with settings for interctive detector line 'Fult dely': This setting specifies how long fult on the detector line must be present before fult messge is displyed. In ccordnce with EN 54, the entered vlue my not exceed mximum of 100 s. 'Events' tb The 'Events' tb llows you to mke AVC settings for line lrms. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) [ 194]'

190 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line Setting the properties of the line elements 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Open line element in the tree view. 3. Highlight the physicl chnnel, e.g. 'Sensor'. 4. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Direct ctivtion of externl AI' This setting specifies which conditions must be fulfilled so tht the externl lrm indictor is ctivted directly. 'No direct ctivtion': The externl lrm indictor is not ctivted directly. 'By the ZONE of the detector in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by ny given device in the 'Zone'. 'By the DETECTOR in the sme bse': The conditions re fulfilled when the event ws triggered by the detector with the externl lrm indictor. In the detil editor of the ssigned 'Zone', you cn set level t which the externl lrm indictor will be ctivted: In 'PRE-STAGE' nd 'MAIN STAGE' Only in 'MAIN STAGE' This setting is not possible in 'Zones' without 'PRE-STAGE'. In ddition to the direct ctivtion, you cn ssign nd configure control with the externl lrm indictor. You will find more informtion on this in chpter ''Control' tsk crd [ 232]'. 'Externl AI ctivtion in detector/wlk test' This setting specifies whether the externl lrm indictor is ctivted in 'Detector test' or 'Wlk test' mode. The checkbox cn only be ctivted if direct ctivtion is configured for the externl lrm indictor. Figure 60: Settings for multi-sensor smoke detector 'Prmeter set' This setting specifies the detector prmeter set. The prmeter set cn be used to configure the detector sensitivity. Figure 61: Sensor settings

191 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line 11 'Inverted': This setting specifies whether the input is inverted. Inverted input: The input is evluted s ctive when the input signl is inctive. 'Short circuit monitoring enbled' This setting specifies whether the monitoring is ctivted when there is short circuit. The short circuit monitoring requires specil wiring. If the short circuit monitoring is dectivted, then short circuit is evluted s 'ctive'. This cn be used for the connection of old detectors with bimetllic switches or of mnul cll points with switches. For these pplictions, you must dectivte the short circuit monitoring nd ssign the input to 'Zone'. Figure 62: Input settings 'Output mode' The setting defines the behvior of the output signl in the ctive or inctive sttus of the logic. Exmples: 'Inctive: Intermittent / ctive: Off': The output signl is intermittent when the logic is inctive nd switched off when it is ctive. 'Inctive: Off / ctive: Intermittent': The output signl is switched off when the logic is inctive nd intermittent when it is ctive. 'Inctive: Off / ctive: On': The output signl is switched off when the logic is inctive nd switched on when it is ctive. 'Inctive: On / ctive: Off': The output signl is switched on when the logic is inctive nd switched off when it is ctive. The 'intermittent' output signl is now supported by 'DC1192h'. 'Output fil sfe position' This setting specifies the position of the output if the communiction between device nd line interfce is disrupted or if the line voltge fils. Figure 63: Output settings 'Collective line type' This setting specifies which type of collective detector line is connected

192 11 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Interctive detector line 'Pulse memory' This setting specifies which pulse memory function is used for the lrm verifiction. Vlues in brckets lie outside the uthorized rnge. 'None': Alrm signls re brought to the ppliction without further verifiction. 'One stge': dnger level 3 strts one-stge verifiction. '(Two stge)': Dnger level 3 strts two-stge verifiction. Figure 64: Settings for 'Collective' element

193 'Detection' tsk crd Creting 'Detection tree' 'Detection' tsk crd The following logicl elements re shown in the 'Detection' tsk crd: 'Are' The 'Are' element is lso creted when creting 'Sttion'. Additionl 'Are' elements cn be creted for ech 'Sttion'. 'Section' A 'Section' element is lso creted when creting 'Sttion'. Additionl 'Section' elements cn be creted for ech 'Sttion'. 'Zone' The 'Zone'element cn be creted mnully. 'Logicl chnnel' The 'Logicl chnnel' element cn be creted mnully during preconfigurtion. But this is not usully necessry becuse this element is creted when ssigning to the corresponding hrdwre element. If link is deleted, the chnnel is retined. If the control pnel is configured using the 'Auto-configure line' (FDnet lines only) or 'Auto-configure sttion' function, the 'Section', 'Zone', nd 'Logicl chnnel' elements re creted utomticlly. The physicl nd logicl chnnels re ssigned utomticlly. You will find more informtion bout the uto-configurtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 12.1 Creting 'Detection tree' To crete the 'Detection tree', proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Detection' > 'Sttion' > 'Detection re' > 'Section' in the tsk crd. 2. Use the corresponding templte to crete 'Section' for the 'Zone'. Link [ 77] 3. Enter customer texts. When creting the 'Detection tree', you cn use the functions 'CSV export' nd 'CSV import' in order to export nd import customer-specific dt, e.g., customer texts. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Exporting nd importing CSVs [ 97]'. See lso 2 Exporting nd importing CSVs [ 97]

194 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Are' 12.2 'Are' Ech 'Sttion' contins the following 'Ares': 'Detection re' 'Detection re' is the uppermost element in the 'Detection tree'. Severl 'Detection re' re possible per 'Sttion': FC2020, FC2030, FC2040: Mx. 4 FC2060: Mx. 8 FC2080: Mx. 24 The 'Detection re' hs n lrm verifiction concept (AVC) nd cn be configured nd ssigned to the controls independently of other res. 'Sttion re' 'Sttion re' occurs just once nd unites the lrm verifiction (AVC) functionlity for hrdwre-relted elements which re not in the 'Detection re'. This includes e.g collective line lrms nd degrded mode opertion. The 'Sttion re' cn be displyed nd nvigted just like ny other 'Detection re'. It hs no child elements nd is identicl to the 'Detection re' in terms of lrm verifiction Alrm verifiction concept (AVC) The 'Alrm Verifiction Concept' (AVC) serves the purpose of delyed lrm trnsmission nd tkes into ccount the interction of the operting personnel in the lrming sequence. In the event of fire, locl lrm is triggered. The operting stff hve certin mount of time to investigte the loction given for the fire. In cse of flse lrm or minor incident, the intervention of the fire brigde (globl lrm) cn be voided in good time. You will find detiled description of the 'Alrm Verifiction Concept' in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. You cn configure one 'Alrm Verifiction Concept' ech for vrious event ctegories, e.g., for ' --All Fire ALARMS' or 'All Pre-ALARMS'. Configuring 'Alrm Verifiction Concept' 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Detection re' in the tree view. 3. Select the 'Alrm verifiction' tb in the detil editor. 4. Set the properties you wnt for the vrious event ctegories. The settings re described in the following sections. Figure 65: Detil editor with settings for lrm verifiction concept

195 'Detection' tsk crd 'Are' 12 'LOCAL lrming stopped by ACKN.' This setting specifies which locl lrming equipment is stopped by the commnd 'Acknowledge'. Activte the respective checkbox. 'GLOBAL lrming stopped by ACKN.' This setting specifies which globl lrming equipment is stopped by the commnd 'Acknowledge'. Activte the respective checkbox. 't1 [EN54-2: t1+t2 of AVC=mx. 10 min.]' This setting specifies the rection time t1. A new event must be cknowledged within this period, otherwise the lrm verifiction concept or the intervention concept switches to globl lrming. In ccordnce with EN 54-2, the totl of t1 nd t2 must not exceed mximum of ten minutes. Figure 66: Detil editor with settings for lrm verifiction concept 'Alrming type 'mnned'' nd 'Alrming type 'unmnned'' This setting specifies the type of lrming for 'Mnned opertion' or 'Unmnned opertion', respectively: 'Locl lrming only' 'Delyed lrming' 'Globl lrming only'

196 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Are' 'Alrming type 'therml'' This setting specifies the lrming type for therml detectors. '* Not used *': The lrming type for therml detectors is not defined. The settings for 'Alrming type 'mnned'' nd 'Alrming type 'unmnned'' re used. 'Globl lrming only': The AVC chnges to globl lrming immeditely. No distinction is mde between 'mnned' nd 'unmnned'. These settings only pply to het detectors (FDnet, interctive, AnlogPLUS) nd not to the temperture sensors of multi-sensor fire detectors. 'Locl lrming devices 'mnned'' nd 'Locl lrming devices 'unmnned'' This setting specifies which locl lrming equipment is to be ctivted in 'Mnned opertion' or 'Unmnned opertion', respectively. Activte the respective checkbox. 'Globl lrming devices 'mnned'' nd 'Globl lrming devices 'unmnned'' These settings specify which globl lrming equipment is to be ctivted in 'Mnned opertion' or 'Unmnned opertion', respectively. Activte the respective checkbox

197 'Detection' tsk crd 'Are' 12 Configuring the AVC settings for the line lrm 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. 2. Highlight detector line in the tree view. 3. Go to the 'Events' tb nd select the ctegory 'Collective FIRE ALARM (line lrm) Generl utom. Fire ALARM'. 4. Configure the AVC settings. The settings re described in the sections bove nd below. Figure 67: AVC settings for the line lrm 'Use individul AVC settings': This setting specifies which lrming settings re used for the event: Checkbox dectivted: The superordinte lrming settings tht re specified in the 'Are' re used for the event. Checkbox ctivted: Individul lrming settings re used for the event. The ssocited properties cn be set s soon s the checkbox is ctivted. The settings re described in the sections bove. 'Alrming type 'mnned'', 'Alrming type 'unmnned'', nd 'Alrming type 'therml''. Investigtion time t2 'Locl lrming devices 'mnned'' nd 'Locl lrming devices 'unmnned'' 'Globl lrming devices 'mnned'' nd 'Globl lrming devices 'unmnned''

198 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Are' Immedite globl lrming The 'Immedite globl lrming' setting is used to determine under which of the following preconditions the lrm verifiction concept is directly nd globlly lrmed: ' - (disbled)' 'Upon 2nd lrm within re' 'Upon 2nd lrm within re OR fult within sttion' 'Upon 2nd lrm within site' 'Upon 2nd lrm OR fult within site' 'Alwys (upon first lrm)' Figure 68: Detil editor with settings for immedite globl lrming Settings for intervention If you select the 'Upon 2nd lrm within re OR fult within sttion' or 'Upon 2nd lrm OR fult within site' setting for immedite globl lrming, the following must be observed in the 'Sttion' settings: The setting in the following fields must not be 'Sttion' for the 'Intervention' ctegory in the 'IC Fult' tb of the 'Disbled' detil editor: 'Immedite intervention type 'mnned'' 'Immedite intervention type 'unmnned'' Alwys select defined setting. Figure 69: Detil editor with settings for 'Sttion' If individul devices re not to be ctivted using 'IC Fult', uncheck the corresponding checkbox

199 'Detection' tsk crd 'Section' Alrm orgniztion mode The 'Alrm orgniztion mode' setting determines which sttuses nd functions, e.g., switchovers nd indictors, of the lrm orgniztion re used in this 'Are'. The following cn be set: 'Alwys mnned (no messges/no LED/no switching fct.)' 'Alwys unmnned (no messges/no LED/no switching fct.)' 'Mnned/unmnned (with messges/with LED/with switching fct.)' Figure 70: Detil editor with settings for lrm orgniztion mode Switching times for 'Unmnned opertion' The time t which lrm orgniztion utomticlly switches over to 'Unmnned opertion' cn be specified. This is required if, for exmple, the lrm orgniztion is mnully switched bck to 'Unmnned opertion' fter being utomticlly switched over to 'Mnned opertion'. Four times cn be entered in the 'Overview' tb. Figure 71: Detil editor with switching times for 'Unmnned opertion' 12.3 'Section' The level 'Section' is used for the zoning of 'Zones' nd hs no functions of its own. In one element 'Section', for exmple, ll 'Zones' cn be combined on one building floor. Doing so fcilittes the opertion

200 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12.4 'Zone' The vrious 'Zone' types re described in the following chpters 'Automtic zone' Automtic fire detectors re evluted in the 'Automtic zone'. The 'Zone' cn however lso be configured for inputs or collective detector lines. You cn select between vriety of different templtes tht re pre-configured for vrious pplictions for the cretion of 'Automtic zone'. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n lrm. Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Single, Stndrd': Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, no pre-lrm': Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, non-ltching lrm': Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, ALARM sub-system': Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, Exting. dischrged': Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, Exting. pre-lrm': Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Single, Gs lrm': Evlution of gs detectors tht re connected vi n input Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' ' Autom. Fire ALARM, progrmmble' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Exting. dischrged (Aut. Fire AL.)' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Exting. pre-lrm (Aut. Fire AL.)' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'ALARM sub-system' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Exting. dischrged' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Exting. pre-lrm' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Gs ALARM'

201 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Single, Gs wrning': Evlution of gs detectors tht re connected vi n input Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' Only locl lrming is ctivted in 'MAIN STAGE' 'Single, door holders': Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' Only the locl lrming is ctivted in 'MAIN STAGE' 'Single, locl ALARM': Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' Only the locl lrming is ctivted in 'MAIN STAGE' 'Multi, stndrd': Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Multi, grge': Multi-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' 'Multi, store': Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' Only the locl lrming is ctivted in 'MAIN STAGE' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency': Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Gs wrning' ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'ALARM door holders' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. locl ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM'

202 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Multi, ALARM sub-system': Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency II' [AT]: Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' Only the locl lrming is ctivted in 'PRE-STAGE' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency III' [CH]: Multi-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' 'Two-zone dependency' With 'Pre-ALARM' Only the locl lrming is ctivted in 'PRE-STAGE' 'PRE-STAGE': ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' Autom. First ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' Autom. First ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' Autom. First ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' Tble 4: Properties of the templtes 'PRE-STAGE': 'Pre-ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'ALARM sub-system' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Autom. FIRST ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Autom. FIRST ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': 'Autom. FIRST ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': 'Autom. FIRE ALARM' 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs

203 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 Single-detector dependency nd multi-detector dependency The following tble shows the required number of detectors with dnger level (GS) 2 or 3 in order to meet the criteri for 'PRE-STAGE'/'MAIN STAGE'' nd to trigger n lrm. Templte Required number of detectors with dnger level (GS) 'PRE-STAGE' 'MAIN STAGE' GS 2 GS 3 GS 2 GS 3 'Single, stndrd' 'Single, no pre-lrm' 'Single, non-ltching lrm' 'Single, ALARM sub-system' 'Single, Exting. dischrged' 'Single, Exting. pre-lrm' 'Single, Gs lrm' 'Single, Gs wrning' 'Single, door holders' 'Single, locl ALARM' 'Multi, stndrd' 'Multi, grge' 'Multi, store' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency' 'Multi, ALARM sub-system' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency II' [AT] 'Multi, 2 det. dependency III' [CH] 'Two-zone dependency' Tble 5: Single-detector dependency nd multi-detector dependency

204 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Mnul zone' 'Mnul cll points' re evluted in the 'Mnul zone'. The 'Zone' cn however lso be configured for inputs or collective detector lines. The dnger signls re evluted with n OR link. Ech mnul cll point in the 'Zone' cn generte n lrm, but not pre-lrm. You cn select between vriety of different templtes tht re pre-configured for vrious pplictions for the cretion of 'Mnul zone'. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n lrm. Typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Stndrd': Evlution of mnul fire detectors 'ALARM sub-system': Evlution of sub-system tht is connected vi n input 'Locl ALARM': Evlution of mnul fire detectors tht generte only locl lrm 'Redundncy ALARM': Evlution of mnul fire detectors tht generte redundncy lrm ' ----Mnul Fire ALARM' 'Mnul FIRE ALARM' ' ----Mnul Fire ALARM' 'ALARM sub-system' ' ----Mnul Fire ALARM' 'Mnul locl ALARM' ' ----Mnul Fire ALARM' 'Redundncy ALARM' Tble 6: Properties of the templtes 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs

205 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Technicl zone' In 'Technicl zone', inputs for technicl messges, e.g., fult or dnger by extrneous equipment, re evluted. You cn select between vriety of different templtes tht re pre-configured for vrious pplictions for the cretion of 'Technicl zone'. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n event. The templtes re ll with single-detector dependency nd without 'Pre-ALARM'. Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Stndrd (ck./ltching)': The event must be cknowledged with ltching 'Stndrd (ck./non-ltching)': The event must be cknowledged without ltching 'Fult sub-system': Evlution of fult messges of connected sub-system 'Sub-system OFF': Evlution of switched off messges of connected sub-system 'Fult extinguishing system': Evlution of fult messges of connected sub-system 'Gs ALARM': Evlution of lrms of connected gs detector or gs detector system 'Fult network device': Evlution of fult messges of connected network device e.g. switch or router 'Fult fiber network module': Evlution of fult messges of connected LWL network module ' --Other technicl messge' 'Technicl messge' ' --Technicl messge: progrmmble' 'Technicl messge' ' --Other fult' ' --Sub-system isoltion' ' --Other fult' ' --Other technicl messge' ' --Other fult' ' --Other fult' Tble 7: Properties of the templtes 'Fult sub-system' 'Sub-system OFF' 'Fult extinguish.' 'Technic. Gs ALARM' 'Fult netw. device' 'Technicl messge' 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs. See lso 2 Monitoring Ethernet switch (MM) nd sfety module (firewll) [ 378]

206 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Sub-system zone' Signls from connected sub-systems re evluted in the 'Sub-system zone', e.g. from collective fire control pnels, spirting smoke detection systems nd gs detection systems. You cn select between vriety of different templtes tht re pre-configured for vrious types of sub-systems for the cretion of 'Sub-system zone'. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with vrious events. Typicl ppliction Event in the subsystem Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Stndrd': Evlution of fire detector sub-system tht is connected vi inputs nd outputs 'Pre-ALARM' ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'PreALARM sub-syst.' 'ALARM' ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'ALARM sub-system' Isoltion ' --Sub-system isoltion' 'Sub-system OFF' Fult ' --Other fult' 'Fult sub-system' 'ASD system': Evlution of spirting smoke detection system tht is connected vi inputs nd outputs 'Gs system': Evlution of gs detection sub-system tht is connected vi inputs nd outputs 'Pre-ALARM' ' --Pre-ALARM, fire' 'PreALARM sub-syst.' 'ALARM' ' Generl utom. Fire ALARM' 'ALARM sub-system' Isoltion ' --Other informtion' 'Active informtion' Fult ' --Other fult' 'Fult sub-system' 'Pre-ALARM' ' ----CO gs ALARM' 'Gs wrning' 'ALARM' ' ----CO gs ALARM' 'Gs ALARM' Isoltion ' --Sub-system isoltion' 'Sub-system OFF' Fult ' --Other fult' 'Fult sub-system' Tble 8: Properties of the templtes 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs. Ech templte hs four inputs nd four outputs. Depending on the sub-system, not ll inputs nd outputs must be ssigned. If, for exmple, sub-system is unble to generte ny 'Pre-ALARM', then leve the 'Input 'Pre-lrm'' unssigned. Inputs 'Input 'Pre-lrm'' 'Input 'Alrm'' 'Input 'Fult'' 'Input 'Isoltion'' Vrious events of the sub-system re evluted with the inputs. If n input is ctivted, the corresponding event test will be displyed. See tble bove

207 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 Outputs Events of the sub-system cn be cknowledged nd reset with the outputs. If you cknowledge n event, the output 'Output 'Acknowledge'' is ctivted for 3 s. If you reset n event, the output 'Output 'Reset'' will be ctivted. The durtion of the ctivtion is dependent on the setting 'Reset time' in the 'Detils' tb: 'Enbled' checkbox dectivted: The output is ctivted for 3 s. 'Enbled' checkbox ctivted: The durtion of the ctivtion cn be set between 1 s nd 5 min. If the reset is crried out successfully prior to the expirtion of the set time, then the output will be dectivted gin immeditely. You will find more informtion on the properties of 'Zone' in chpter 'Configuring the 'Zone' [ 216]' 'Flow switch zone' In lrger sprinkler systems, the piping system is distributed over severl floors nd the supply network hs n outlet on every floor. Flow rte indictors re built into these outlets. These signl where the wter runs to nd generte n dditionl report for reporting to the sprinkler sttion. The flow rte indictor is evluted with n OR link. Ech flow rte indictor in the 'Zone' cn generte n lrm. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n event. Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Stndrd': Evlution of flow rte indictors Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' ' Exting. dischrged (Aut. Fire AL.)' Tble 9: Properties of the templtes 'Flow swi. relesed' 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs

208 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Sprinkler zone' F F F F F F S Figure 72: Generl setup of the sprinkler system H F S H Flow rte indictor: specil detector zone Sprinkler sttion with one or two contcts Hydrnt network A sprinkler system is piping system tht is terminted t severl loctions with sprinkler heds. It is normlly fed by the public network of hydrnts. The sprinkler sttion is instlled directly fter the house feed. It seprtes the sprinkler network from the hydrnt network due to overpressure in the sprinkler network. The sprinkler sttion signls when the sprinkler network is opened somewhere nd wter begins to flow. This condition is reported to the fire control pnel vi contct (optionlly lso two). This then triggers n lrm with immedite response from the fire brigde. In lrger sprinkler systems, the piping system is distributed over severl floors nd the supply network hs n outlet in every floor. Flow rte indictors re built into these outlets. These signl where exctly the wter runs to nd generte n dditionl report for reporting to the sprinkler sttion. Creting 'Sprinkler zone' element Crete the 'Sprinkler zone' element in the 'Detection' tsk crd. Creting 'Flow switch zone' element Crete the 'Flow switch zone' element in the 'Detection' tsk crd

209 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 Assigning 'Sprinkler zone' element The 'Sprinkler zone' element hs the 'Cuses' chnnel for connecting the 'Input 'Sprinkler 1'' nd 'Input 'Sprinkler 2'' contcts of the sprinkler sttion nd the 'Referenced flow switch zones' chnnel, which is ssigned to the flow rte indictor zone. To ssign 'Input 'Sprinkler 1'', proceed s follows: Assign 'Cuses' under 'Sprinkler zone' to n input. Link [ 85] To ssign 'Input 'Sprinkler 2'', proceed in the sme wy. To ssign 'Referenced flow switch zones', proceed s follows: Assign 'Referenced flow switch zones' under 'Sprinkler zone' to 'Flow switch zone'. Link [ 85]

210 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Gs zone' Gs detectors re evluted with the 'Gs zone'. You cn select between vriety of different templtes tht re pre-configured for vrious pplictions for the cretion of 'Gs zone'. The following tble shows the properties of the templtes long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n lrm. Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'CO gs lrm': Evlution of gs detectors Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' 'CO gs wrning': Evlution of gs detectors Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' 'Alrming type 'unmnned'': 'Locl lrming only' 'CO gs wrning + lrm': Evlution of gs detectors Single-detector dependency With 'Pre-ALARM' In 'PRE-STAGE', 'Alrming type 'unmnned'' is set to 'Locl lrming only' ' ----CO gs ALARM' ' ----CO gs ALARM' 'PRE-STAGE': ' ----CO gs ALARM' 'MAIN STAGE': ' ----CO gs ALARM' 'CO gs ALARM' 'CO gs wrning' 'PRE-STAGE': 'CO gs wrning' 'MAIN STAGE': 'CO gs ALARM' Tble 10: Properties of the templtes 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs

211 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'XC10 zone' Extinguishing systems re ctuted nd monitored by the utonomous extinguishing control pnel. The input/output module FDCIO222 is used s the interfce to the extinguishing control pnel in the fire detection instlltion. Events of the extinguishing control pnel re forwrded to the fire control pnel vi the interfce nd the commnds from the fire control pnel re trnsmitted to the extinguishing control unit. You will find more informtion bout the XC10 extinguishing control pnel nd the configurtion exmples in document A6V See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The 'XC10 zone' element hs four inputs nd three outputs. These must be ssigned to the inputs nd outputs of the FDCIO222. Figure 73: 'XC10 zone' element in the structure tree Sub-element of 'XC10 zone' Input or output on FDCIO222 Function Input 'Dischrged' IN1 Activting or resetting the extinguishing relese Input 'Fult' IN2 Fult messge Input 'Pre-lrm' IN3 Activting or resetting the extinguishing pre-lrm Input 'Blocked' IN4 Blocking or enbling the extinguishing relese Output 'Reset' OUT A Resetting the extinguishing relese Output 'Block utom.+mnul' OUT B Output 'Block utom.' OUT C Blocking the utomtic nd mnul extinguishing relese Blocking the utomtic extinguishing relese 'Input 'Dischrged'' The extinguishing control pnel detects the ctivtion or resetting of the extinguishing relese by ctivting or dectivting 'Input 'Dischrged''. When 'Input 'Dischrged'' is ctivted, the FC20 displys the messge 'Exting. dischrged'. The ctivtion of the extinguishing relese is displyed s n lrm nd the AVC is strted. The messge does not dispper utomticlly when 'Input 'Dischrged'' is dectivted, i.e. when reset is mde on the extinguishing control pnel. The messge must be cknowledged nd reset on the FC

212 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Input 'Fult'' The extinguishing control pnel detects the occurrence or disppernce of fult by ctivting or dectivting 'Input 'Fult''. When 'Input 'Fult'' is ctivted, the FC20 displys fult messge. The messge does not dispper utomticlly when 'Input 'Fult'' is dectivted, i.e. when the fult indiction disppers on the extinguishing control pnel. The messge must be cknowledged on the FC20. 'Input 'Pre-lrm'' The extinguishing control pnel detects the ctivtion or resetting of the extinguishing pre-lrm by ctivting or dectivting 'Input 'Pre-lrm''. When 'Input 'Pre-lrm'' is ctivted, the FC20 displys the messge 'Exting. prelrm'. The ctivtion of the extinguishing pre-lrm is displyed s n lrm nd the AVC is strted. The messge does not dispper utomticlly when 'Input 'Pre-lrm'' is dectivted, i.e. when reset is mde on the extinguishing control pnel. The messge must be cknowledged nd reset on the FC20. 'Input 'Blocked'' The extinguishing control pnel detects the blocking or relesing of utomtic nd mnul extinguishing relese by ctivting or dectivting 'Input 'Blocked''. The blocking is indicted s isoltion on the FC20 Person Mchine Interfce. 'Output 'Reset'' This output is used to reset the extinguishing relese from 'FS20' operting terminl. The FC20 ctivtes 'Output 'Reset'', when the 'Reset' commnd is executed on the Person Mchine Interfce. 'Output 'Block utom.+mnul'' This output is used to block the utomtic nd mnul extinguishing relese from FS20 operting terminl. The FC20 ctivtes 'Output 'Block utom.+mnul'', when the 'Autom.+mn. exting. OFF' commnd is executed on the Person Mchine Interfce. 'Output 'Block utom.'' This output is used to block the utomtic extinguishing relese from FS20 operting terminl. The FC20 ctivtes 'Output 'Block utom.'', when the 'Autom. exting. OFF' commnd is executed on the Person Mchine Interfce

213 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 Assigning input or output Figure 74: Assigning input or output In order to ssign the inputs nd outputs of the 'XC10 zone' to the inputs nd outputs of the FDCIO222, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Detection re' > 'Section' > 'XC10 zone' in the tree view. 3. Highlight n input or n output e.g. 'Input 'Dischrged''. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. On the right in the window, select the corresponding input or output of the FDCIO Click on 'Assign'. The input or output of the 'XC10 zone' is ssigned to the input or output of the FDCIO222. Properties of the 'XC10 zone' element In the detil editor of the 'XC10 zone' element, the following cn be set on the 'Detils' tb: Figure 75: Properties in the detil editor of the 'XC10 zone'

214 12 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 'Autom. exting. relese blockble from FS20' This setting specifies whether the utomtic extinguishing relese cn be blocked from the FS20 operting terminl. If the checkbox is ctivted, the blocking proceeds s follows: 1. On the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20, the user selects n 'XC10 zone' nd executes the 'Autom. exting. OFF' commnd. 2. This commnd ctivtes 'Output 'Block utom.''. 3. The commnd must be confirmed by the extinguishing control pnel within five seconds. The extinguishing control pnel confirms the commnd by n open line on 'IN4'. 4. If the commnd is confirmed within five seconds, the FC20 displys the messge 'Aut. ext.off FC'. 'Output 'Block utom.'' remins ctive until the block on the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20 is relesed gin. 5. If the commnd is not confirmed within five seconds, the 'Output 'Block utom.'' is dectivted nd the FC20 displys the messge 'XC10 not blockble'. 'Autom.+mnul exting. relese blockble from FS20' This setting specifies whether the utomtic nd mnul extinguishing relese cn be blocked from the FS20 operting terminl. If the checkbox is ctivted, the blocking proceeds s follows: 1. On the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20, the user selects 'XC10 zone' nd executes the 'Autom.+mn. exting. OFF' commnd. 2. This commnd ctivtes 'Output 'Block utom.+mnul''. 3. The commnd must be confirmed by the extinguishing control pnel within five seconds. The extinguishing control pnel confirms the commnd by shortcircuit on 'IN4'. 4. If the commnd is confirmed within five seconds, the FC20 displys the messge 'Aut+mn ext.off FC'. 'Output 'Block utom.+mnul'' remins ctive until the block on the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20 is relesed gin. 5. If the commnd is not confirmed within five seconds, the 'Output 'Block utom.+mnul'' is dectivted nd the FC20 displys the messge 'XC10 not blockble'. 'Show blocking of utom. exting. relese on FS20 operting terminl' This setting specifies whether blocking of the utomtic extinguishing relese from the extinguishing control pnel is displyed on the FS20 operting terminl. If the checkbox is ctivted, the blocking proceeds s follows: 1. The utomtic extinguishing relese is blocked by the extinguishing control pnel. 2. 'Input 'Blocked'' is ctivted. 3. On the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20, the messge 'Aut. ext.off XC' is displyed. 'Resettble from FS20' This setting specifies whether the extinguishing control cn be reset from the FS20 operting terminl. If the checkbox is ctivted, the resetting proceeds s follows: 1. On the Person Mchine Interfce of the FC20, the user executes the 'Reset' commnd. 2. This commnd ctivtes 'Output 'Reset'' for three seconds. 3. The extinguishing control pnel reports the successful reset by dectivting 'Input 'Dischrged'' nd/or 'Input 'Pre-lrm''. 4. If these inputs re not dectivted within 10 seconds, FC20 displys the messge 'XC10 n. resettble' for 60 seconds

215 'Detection' tsk crd 'Zone' 12 'Reset time' This setting specifies the period for which the system ttempts to reset the extinguishing control before the ttempt is considered filure. For correct function, ten seconds must be set. The property 'Reset time' cn be set only if the checkboxes 'Resettble from FS20' nd 'Enbled' re ctivted. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 'FSE zone' [DE] A relese element is ssigned to the 'FSE zone'. With the relese element, fire lrm is generted mnully, which in turn unlocks the fire brigde key depot. To operte the relese element, key is required which is exclusively in the possession of the fire brigde. The following tble shows the properties of the templte for the 'FSE zone' long with the event ctegory nd the event text of the messge tht is generted with n event. Min fetures nd typicl ppliction Typicl event ctegory Event text 1 'Stndrd': Evlution of relese elements Single-detector dependency Without 'Pre-ALARM' ' ----Mnul Fire ALARM' Tble 11: Properties of the templtes 'Mnul FIRE ALARM' 1 Text tht is shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce when the event occurs

216 12 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' 12.5 Configuring the 'Zone' 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Zone' in the tree view. 3. Select the 'Overview' or the 'Detils' tb in the detil editor. 4. Set the desired properties. The settings re described in the following sections. Depending on the 'Zone', not ll settings re vilble. Figure 76: Settings in the 'Overview' tb Figure 77: Settings in the 'Detils' tb 'Customer text' The text in the 'Customer text' field is displyed on the Person Mchine Interfce together with messges from the respective element. You will find more informtion on customer text in chpter 'Customer text [ 124]'. 'Intervention text' The text in the 'Intervention text' field is displyed on the Person Mchine Interfce when there is n lrm in the corresponding 'Zone'. The text cn contin mximum of four lines. To insert line brek, enter the following text: $(BR) 'Chnnel ctivtion' This setting specifies the zone stge t which the logicl chnnels generte n ctivtion messge nd ctivte their internl lrm indictors: In 'PRE-STAGE' nd 'MAIN STAGE' Only in 'MAIN STAGE'

217 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' 12 'Externl AI ctivtion' nd 'Bse sounder ctivtion' These settings specify t which level the externl lrm indictors or bse sounders re ctivted by the ssigned devices: In 'PRE-STAGE' nd 'MAIN STAGE' Only in 'MAIN STAGE' These settings tke effect only if direct ctivtion of the externl lrm indictor or of the bse sounder is configured. You will find more informtion on direct ctivtion in chpter 'Detector prmeter sets [ 155]'. 'OFF llowed' Option Checkbox checked Checkbox unchecked Effect 'Zone' cn be switched off using n operting commnd. 'Zone' cnnot be switched off using n operting commnd. 'Timeout detector/wlk test' A time-out for the modes 'Detector test' or 'Wlk test', respectively, cn be specified with the setting 'Timeout detector/wlk test'. Option 'Enbled' checkbox unchecked Effect The 'Detector test' nd 'Wlk test' modes re not ended utomticlly. 1 h 00 min to 23 h 59 min After this time hs elpsed, the mode 'Detector test' or 'Wlk test', respectively, is ended utomticlly. 'Criteri PRE-STAGE' nd 'Criteri MAIN STAGE' These settings indicte the necessry criteri for reching 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE'. The criteri re fulfilled when the specified number of devices in the 'Zone' rech dnger level 2 or 3. The top field shows the number of devices with dnger level 2 nd the bottom field the number with dnger level 3. Exmple: The criteri for 'PRE-STAGE' re fulfilled when 1 device reches dnger level 2. The criteri for 'MAIN STAGE' re fulfilled when 1 device reches dnger level 3. The criteri for 'MAIN STAGE' tke priority over the criteri for 'PRE-STAGE'. 'Additionl criteri for PRE-/MAIN STAGE' This property specifies dditionl criteri for the settings 'Criteri PRE-STAGE' nd 'Criteri MAIN STAGE'. It cn thus be ensured tht 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE' will be reched with multi-detector dependency or two-zone dependency, even in unusul situtions. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Additionl criteri for pre-stge nd min stge [ 222]'

218 12 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' 'Two-zone dependency' This property specifies whether the 'Zone' cn be used for two-zone dependency. This property is ctivted, e.g. for 'Automtic zone', with the 'Two-zone dependency' templte. You will find more informtion on two-zone dependency in chpter 'Two-zone dependency [ 221]'. 'Multi detector dependency with ltching' This property specifies whether multi-detector dependency with ltching is ctivted. This property is ctivted, e.g. for 'Automtic zone', with the 'Two-zone dependency' templte. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Multi-detector dependency with ltching [ 220]'. 'Reset time' Option 'Enbled' checkbox unchecked 'Enbled' checkbox ctivted 'Reset time': 1 s to 5 min Effect Reset time cnnot be set. In this cse, the suitble reset time is set by the control pnel. The pproprite reset time cn be set by the user, e.g. when sub-systems re connected. The system ttempts to reset the element within this time before the ttempt is considered filure. If the element cn be reset prior to the expirtion of the set time, then it cn be reset immeditely. 'Alwys resettble' This property is only vilble for the 'Mnul zone'. Option Checkbox checked Checkbox unchecked Effect 'Zone' cn lwys be reset (messge 'Glss broken' from mnul cll points tht re still ctive). 'Zone' cn only be reset if ll ssigned mnul cll points re in quiescent condition

219 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' Multi-detector dependency NOTICE Multi-detector dependency for collective detector lines Appliction does not comply with stndrds. Multi-detector dependency my not be set up with collective detector lines. You cn choose between the following templtes for 'Automtic zone' to configure the multi-detector dependency: 'Multi, 2 det. dependency' 'Multi, 2 det. dependency II' [AT] 'Multi, 2 det. dependency III' [CH] Depending on the selection, the following properties re set in the 'Detils' tb of the detil editor. 'Multi, 2 det. dependency' nd 'Multi, 2 det. dependency III' [CH]: The checkbox 'Multi detector dependency with ltching' is dectivted. The dnger level of the detectors is not stored. The multi-detector dependency is used for sttionry fire. 'Multi, 2 det. dependency II' [AT]: The checkbox 'Multi detector dependency with ltching' is ctivted. The detectors ssigned to 'Zone' re evluted in multi-detector dependency with the signl being stored. If the 'Zone' reches the pre-stge then the dnger levels of the detectors tht hve reched the criteri of the pre-stge re stored s criterion for the min stge. As soon s the required number of detectors hve stored the criteri for the min stge then the min stge is reched nd signled ccordingly. Exmple: If detector signls dnger level 3, the 'Zone' reches the pre-stge nd first lrm is triggered. Dnger level 3 of the detector is stored s the criterion for the min stge. As soon s further detectors signl dnger level 3, the zone 'Zone' reches the min stge nd second lrm is triggered. Multi-detector dependency cn be used for moving fire, for exmple for detecting fire on conveyor belt

220 12 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' Stndrd settings The tble below shows the stndrd settings of the 'Automtic zone' in the 'Events' tb of the detil editor. Templte 'Multi, 2 det. dependency' Settings Freely selectble 'Multi, 2 det. dependency II' [AT] 1 detector with dnger level 3: Automtic first lrm Locl lrming only (no dely times, internl sounder only) 2 detectors with dnger level 3: Automtic fire lrm 'Mnned opertion': Delyed lrming 'Unmnned opertion': Globl lrming only 'Multi, 2 det. dependency III' [CH] 1 detector with dnger level 3: Automtic first lrm 'Mnned opertion': Delyed lrming 'Unmnned opertion': Globl lrming only 2 detectors with dnger level 3: Automtic fire lrm 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion': Globl lrming only Tble 12: Stndrd settings Multi-detector dependency with ltching The property 'Multi detector dependency with ltching' in the detil editor of 'Automtic zone' specifies whether multi-detector dependency with ltching is ctivted. If the property is ctivted, then the detectors of the 'Zone' re evluted s follows: As soon s the 'Zone' reches 'PRE-STAGE', the dnger levels of the detectors which fulfilled the criteri for 'PRE-STAGE' re ltched. When the criteri set for 'MAIN STAGE' re fulfilled, the 'Zone' reches 'MAIN STAGE'. This cn be triggered by the following events: Detectors with ltched dnger levels report higher dnger level. AND/OR Other detectors report dditionl dnger levels. Exmple 'Criteri PRE-STAGE': 1 detector with dnger level 3 'Criteri MAIN STAGE': 2 detectors with dnger level 3 1. One detector reports dnger level The 'Zone' reches 'PRE-STAGE'. 3. Dnger level 3 of the detector is ltched s the criterion for 'MAIN STAGE'. 4. One other detector reports dnger level The 'Zone' reches 'MAIN STAGE', independent of whether the first detector still reports dnger level 3 or not

221 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' 12 Dnger levels If detector with ltched dnger level reches higher dnger level, then the higher dnger level will be ltched. Exmple: 1. Dnger level 2 is ltched. 2. The detector reports dnger level Dnger level 3 is ltched. Resetting n lrm Whether or not pre-lrm or lrm cn be reset does not depend on the ltched dnger levels of the detectors but rther on the current dnger levels. The ltching is used only s criterion for reching the 'MAIN STAGE'. A pre-lrm or lrm in 'PRE-STAGE' cn thus be reset before the 'MAIN STAGE' is reched, insofr s the current dnger levels of the detectors hve returned to Two-zone dependency If the multi-detector dependency extends over two 'Zones', they cn be ssigned to ech other. If one of the two 'Zones'' reches 'PRE-STAGE', it will send messge. If the second 'Zone' lso reches 'PRE-STAGE', then both 'Zones' chnge to the min stge nd send corresponding messge. One 'Zone' cnnot rech the min stge lone. Configuring two-zone dependency Figure 78: Configuring two-zone dependency w Two elements 'Detection' re present with the 'Two-zone dependency' templte in the 'Automtic zone' tsk crd. 1. In the tree view, highlight the first 'Zone' for the two-zone dependency. 2. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 3. Select 'Two-zone dependency' t the left in the window. The 'Detection tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 4. Select the second 'Zone' for the two-zone dependency. 5. Click on 'Assign'. The two 'Zones' re ssigned to ech other. See lso 2 Creting 'Detection tree' [ 193]

222 12 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' Additionl criteri for pre-stge nd min stge Figure 79: Additionl criteri for reching the pre-stge or the min stge, respectively In the detil editor of the 'Zone', you cn define dditionl criteri for the settings 'Additionl criteri for PRE-/MAIN STAGE' nd 'Criteri PRE-STAGE' with the property 'Criteri MAIN STAGE'. It cn thus be ensured tht 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE' will be reched with multi-detector dependency or two-zone dependency, even in certin situtions. The situtions nd settings re described in the following sections. Multi-detector dependency 'Fllbck to single detector/zone dependency': If the number of detectors is no longer sufficient in norml opertion, switch is mde to single-detector dependency in order to fulfill the multi-detector dependency tht hs been set, e.g., in the event of fult or when detector hs been isolted. If this is the cse, then 1 detector with dnger level 2 or 3 is sufficient to trigger 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE'. The chronologicl order of the events is not relevnt, i.e., switch is mde to single-detector dependency with both of the following vrints: First, dnger level 2 or 3 is reched. Afterwrds, the number of detectors becomes less thn required. First the number of detectors becomes less thn required. Afterwrds dnger level 2 or 3 is reched. 'TRVB S123: Dnger level(s) + fult(s) nd/or isoltion(s)': Fults nd isoltions of the detectors re evluted in ddition to the dnger levels s criteri for reching 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively. When dnger level is reched nd fult nd/or n isoltion is reported in ddition, then 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively, is reched. The chronologicl order of the events is not relevnt, i.e., 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE' is reched with both of the following vrints: First, dnger level is reched. Afterwrds fult nd/or n isoltion is reported. First, fult nd/or n isoltion is reported. Afterwrds, dnger level is reched. 'VDE0833: Dnger level(s) first + new fult(s)': Fults of the detectors re evluted in ddition to the dnger levels s criteri for reching 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE'. When dnger level is reched nd n dditionl dnger level nd/or fult is reported, then 'PRE- STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively, is reched. The chronologicl order of the events is relevnt, i.e., the criteri for 'PRE- STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE' re only fulfilled if the first the dnger level is reched nd then fult is reported fterwrds. Fults tht were lredy previously reported re not tken into ccount. ' - (none)': No dditionl criteri re evluted for reching 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively. 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE' re only reched if the detectors report the number of dnger levels tht is set for the properties 'Criteri PRE-STAGE' nd 'Criteri MAIN STAGE'

223 'Detection' tsk crd Configuring the 'Zone' 12 Exmple of use Figure 80: Appliction exmple for dditionl criteri 'Criteri MAIN STAGE': Two detectors must report dnger level 3 in order for 'MAIN STAGE' to be reched. Additionl criterion: 'VDE0833: Dnger level(s) first + new fult(s)' 1. One detector reports dnger level One detector of the sme 'Zone' reports fult. 3. The 'Zone' reches 'MAIN STAGE'. Two-zone dependency Behvior with two-zone dependency is similr to tht with multi-detector dependency. WARNING Differing settings in the ssigned 'Zones' Unforeseen behvior in the event of fire With two-zone dependency in both ssigned 'Zones', select the sme setting for the property 'Additionl criteri for PRE-/MAIN STAGE'. 'VDE0833: Dnger level(s) first + new fult(s)': 'MAIN STAGE' is reched when one of the two ssigned 'Zones' is in 'PRE- STAGE' nd fult is reported in the second 'Zone'. 'TRVB S123: Dnger level(s) + fult(s) nd/or isoltion(s)' nd 'Fllbck to single detector/zone dependency': 'MAIN STAGE' is reched in the following cses: One of the ssigned 'Zones' is in 'PRE-STAGE'. A fult nd/or isoltion is reported in the second 'Zone'. A fult nd/or isoltion is reported in one of the ssigned 'Zones'. The second 'Zone' reches 'PRE-STAGE'. ' - (none)': No dditionl criteri re evluted for reching 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively

224 12 'Detection' tsk crd Assign hrdwre tree to the detection tree 12.6 Assign hrdwre tree to the detection tree WARNING Incorrect sensor link for the FDA221 nd FDA241 If the FDA221 or FDA241 sensors re ssigned to different 'Zones', the detection behvior corresponding to the prmeter set is not gurnteed. Assign both FDA221 or FDA241 sensors to the sme 'Zone' in the 'Detection tree'. To ssign the 'Hrdwre tree' to the 'Detection tree', proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Detection re' > 'Section' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Zone' or 'Physicl chnnel', if pre-configurtion hs been crried out up to this level. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is displyed in the 'Assign dilog' window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Mrk the corresponding sensor. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'Zone' is ssigned to the sensor. You cn use reding device for Dt Mtrix code to ssign devices using lyout pln with 'Zones'. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Assigning with the help of Dt Mtrix code [ 88]'. See lso 2 Assignment with Dt Mtrix code [ 88]

225 'Detection' tsk crd Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 or zone module Collective detector line vi input/output module FDCIO223 or zone module You cn use the following elements to connect collective detector lines: Inputs/outputs of input/output module FDCIO223 Input of the zone module FDCI223 To do this, you must ssign the physicl chnnel of the FDCIO223 or the FDCI223 to 'Zone'. Assigning collective detector line 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Are' > 'Section' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Zone'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select 'Collective' t the left in the window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Open the FDCIO223 input/output module nd select 'Collective/input/sounder/output'. or 7. Open the zone module FDCI223 nd select 'Collective'. 8. Click on 'Assign'. 'Collective/input/sounder/output' or 'Collective' is ssigned to the 'Zone'

226 12 'Detection' tsk crd Neurl fire detector FDOOTC241 Setting the properties of the collective detector line 1. Highlight the ssigned collective detector line in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. You will find description of the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tb in the following chpters: 'Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163]' nd 'Zone module FDCI223'. You cn lso set the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. You will find more informtion on input / output module FDCIO223 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 'Reset time' The 'Reset time' setting in the detil editor of the 'Zone' hs no influence on collective detector line. See lso 2 Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163] 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 12.8 Neurl fire detector FDOOTC241 The prmeter sets influence the detection behvior of the detectors. This enbles the detection behvior to be dpted to the fire phenomen nd environmentl influences t the plce of instlltion. Regrdless of the fire detection prmeter sets, the CO detection behvior cn be influenced by seprte prmeter sets nd set specificlly to the environmentl influences. You will find detiled informtion bout the FDOOTC241 neurl fire detector in document A6V See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] Configuring fire detection The 'Sensor' element cn be ssigned to 'Automtic zone'. To determine the dnger level, the progression of the following fctors is evluted: Smoke density Temperture CO content, depending on the set fire prmeter set Assigning 'Sensor' to 'Automtic zone' Assign the 'Automtic zone' to 'Sensor' element of neurl fire detector / event ctegory 'Automtic'. Link [ 85] Setting prmeter sets You will find dditionl informtion in the chpters 'Detector prmeter sets [ 155]' nd 'Sensor mode with multi-sensor fire detectors [ 156]'

227 'Detection' tsk crd Neurl fire detector FDOOTC Configuring gs detection You cn ssign the 'Gs sensor' element to 'Technicl zone' or 'Gs zone'. According to EN 54, it is not permitted to ssign the gs sensor to 'Automtic zone' nd therefore generte fire lrm. The CO concentrtion progression is used to evlute the dnger level. Assigning 'Gs sensor' to 'Zone' 1. Crete 'Gs zone' or 'Technicl zone' using the 'Gs ALARM' templte. 2. Assign the 'Zone' to 'Gs sensor' element of neurl fire detector. Link [ 85] Setting prmeter set 1. Highlight 'FDOOTC241/Gs sensor' in the tree view. 2. Select the 'Hrdwre' tb in the detil editor. 3. Set the desired prmeter sets. See lso 2 Creting 'Detection tree' [ 193] Configuring environment monitoring The 'Ambient supervision' chnnel is ssigned to 'Technicl zone'. The chnnel is used to monitor the temperture or CO concentrtion in the environment. If the set threshold is undershot or exceeded, the chnnel becomes ctive nd cn therefore trigger messge or control. Assigning 'Ambient supervision' to 'Technicl zone' 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Assign the 'Technicl zone' to the 'Ambient supervision' element of neurl fire detector / event ctegory 'Input'. Link [ 85] Setting properties Figure 81: Detil editor with settings for environment monitoring 1. Highlight 'FDOOTC241/Ambient supervision' in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor

228 12 'Detection' tsk crd Neurl fire detector FDOOTC241 The following cn be set in the 'Hrdwre' tb: 'Usge' The type of environment monitoring cn be set here: 'Temperture higher thn threshold (Celsius)' 'Temperture lower thn threshold (Celsius)' 'CO concentrtion higher thn threshold (ppm)' 'Hysteresis' If the temperture or CO concentrtion devites from the threshold vlue, the input cn switch between ctive nd inctive. To prevent this, hysteresis cn be defined. As soon s the threshold vlue is reched nd the input is ctivted, it is not dectivted gin until the temperture or the CO concentrtion t lest drops below the threshold vlue or rises bove it by the defined hysteresis vlue. Hysteresis vlues: 'Norml' 'Lrge/slow' 'Threshold temperture (Celsius)' The temperture threshold vlues cn be set here. If this threshold vlue is undershot or exceeded (depending on 'Usge'), the chnnel becomes ctive. The threshold vlue must be between -20 C nd +50 C. This field cn only be edited if the 'Temperture higher thn threshold (Celsius)' or 'Temperture lower thn threshold (Celsius)' setting ws selected for 'Usge'. 'Threshold CO concentrtion (ppm)' The CO concentrtion threshold vlues cn be set here. If this threshold vlue is exceeded, the chnnel becomes ctive. The threshold vlue must be between 20 nd 600 ppm. This field cn only be edited if the 'CO concentrtion higher thn threshold (ppm)' setting ws selected for 'Usge'. The following cn be set in the 'Overview' tb: Figure 82: Detil editor with settings for environment monitoring 'Evlution filter time' Here, the time during which signl must be present such tht the input is evluted s ctive cn be set for the input. A time of between one second nd five minutes cn be set. Do not use this setting together with 'Hysteresis'

229 'Detection' tsk crd Redux module [DE] Redux module [DE] The Redux module serves for dt trnsmission nd power supply redundncy of fire brigde indiction pnel (FAT). The dt cble is connected to the control pnel's RS485 interfce. If one of the connection lines to the FAT fils due to short-circuit or open line, complete functionlity is ensured. The line fult is signled by the fult rely of the Redux module which drops in cse of fult. The fult output of the Redux module is wired to n input of the periphery bord nd ssigned to 'Technicl zone' of type 'Fult sub-system'. Assigning 'Technicl zone' to 'Onbord I/Os' 1. Crete 'Technicl zone' using the 'Fult sub-system' templte. 2. Assign the 'Technicl zone' to n 'I/O' element / event ctegory 'Input' in the 'Hrdwre tree'. Link [ 85]

230 12 'Detection' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone The 'LED 'Key depot unlocked'' must be configured in order to operte key sfe dpter [DE]. To this end, 'Technicl zone' must be creted nd ssigned. Then the LEDs on the corresponding Person Mchine Interfces re ssigned to the 'Technicl zone'. See the chpter 'Assigning LEDs [ 357]'. Prerequisite The key sfe dpter hs been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE] [ 355]'. The controls for the key sfe dpter hve been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls [ 285]'. Configuring 'Technicl zone' 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd nd crete new 'Technicl zone' with the templte ' Acknowledgeble/non-ltching' for the sttion with the key sfe dpter, e.g., using the context menu. 2. Edit the customer text for the 'Technicl zone', e.g., 'Key depot unlocked'. 3. Assign the 'Technicl zone' s follows: Select the 'Input' element in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'Assign dilog'. When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FCI2008: Select the output I/O 5 under FCI2008 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'Assign dilog'. Or When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FDCIO222/224: Select I/O 4 under FCI2007 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'Assign dilog'

231 'Detection' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone Then ssign the LEDs on the corresponding Person Mchine Interfces to the 'Technicl zone'. See the chpter 'Assigning LEDs [ 357]'

232 13 'Control' tsk crd Dul CPU switchover nd degrded mode 13 'Control' tsk crd Controls re configured in the 'Control' tsk crd. The controls re combined into the following control groups: 'Alrming control group': Controls for internl nd externl sounders nd remote trnsmission outputs for Fire nd Fult. 'Fire control group': Controls for building equipment. 'Evc control group': Controls for lrm nd nnouncement devices. 'Counter control group': Registrtion of fire lrms nd test ctivities. Ech control group hs one or more control elements including one or more inputs (Cuses) nd one or more outputs (Effects). You will find more informtion on control groups in the following chpters Dul CPU switchover nd degrded mode The following informtion helps you in deciding which mesures you need to configure if the min CPU fils, in the cse of 'Sttion' with dul CPU. If, in the cse of 'Sttion' with dul CPU, the min CPU fils, the second CPU is switched over to. From the time of the filure nd during the period of the switchover, further modules cn detect communiction fult to the min CPU nd cn switch to degrded mode, with the corresponding configurtion. As n exmple, the ctive outputs on the I/O crd (RT) or the I/O crd (horn/monitored) re dectivted fter 30 s. After the switchover to the second CPU nd completed communiction between the other modules nd the second CPU, the outputs re ctivted gin Creting control tree 1. Select 'Control' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete 'Sttion' element for the 'Control group'. 3. Enter customer texts. 4. Crete control element for the 'Control group'. 5. Enter customer texts. Severl elements re lredy creted for 'Sttions' with the templte 'Alrming pre-configured', e.g. 'Alrming control group' with pre-configured 'RT controls'. See lso 2 Crete element [ 77]

233 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group Alrming control group The lrming control group includes the following control elements: 'Internl sounder control' 'Externl sounder control' 'RT fire control' 'RT fult control' 'RT 1 control' to 'RT 8 control' 'RT device control' Figure 83: Alrming control group The cuses of the elements re ssigned to the event verifiction of the sttion. The effects of the different 'RT' elements re ssigned to the corresponding on-bord I/Os, the fire brigde periphery module or the I/O crd (progrmmble). A confirmtion input cn be ssigned to the effects. The effects of the 'Sounder' elements cn be ssigned to the bse sounder or loop sounder on the FDnet detector line or to the corresponding on-bord I/Os, the fire brigde periphery module, or the I/O crd (progrmmble). A fult input nd confirmtion input cn be ssigned to the 'RT device control'

234 13 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group Assigning cuse NOTICE Incorrect cuse link for 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' sounder property is only evluted for one 'Are' or for elements from one 'Are'. w w One or more sounders re ssigned s 'Control' effects. The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' property nd / or 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' is ctive. Only ssign one 'Are' or elements from one 'Are' s the cuse of the 'Control'. 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Alrming control group' in control element of the 'Cuses'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 5. In the window click n event ctegory nd select the cuse from the list. The pproprite tree is shown in the right side of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Select the pproprite ID No. or open the tree nd select the corresponding element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. 'Cuses' is ssigned to the element

235 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group 13 Assigning n effect 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the 'Alrming control group' element in control element of the 'Effects'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 5. Click n output with or without confirmtion on the left in the window. The hrdwre tree is depicted on the right in the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. In the cse of n output with confirmtion, second 'Hrdwre tree' opens for ssigning the confirmtion input. 6. Select the pproprite ID No. (outputs only) or open the tree nd select the corresponding element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. 'Effects' is ssigned to the element

236 13 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group Automticlly isolting remote trnsmission If remote trnsmission is ctive, under certin circumstnces this cn be isolted utomticlly. There re two wys of doing this: ' --Access level <> defult level': Remote trnsmission is utomticlly dectivted when the current ccess level of n ssigned Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) corresponds to t lest the configured level. 'All ctivtions': The ctivted remote trnsmission is utomticlly dectivted when n input in ny control, e.g. door contct, chnges sttus. ' --Access level <> defult level' To ssign Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) to the cuse, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Control' > 'Sttion' > 'Alrming control group' > 'RT' element in the tsk crd. 2. Assign 'Cuses' to PMI in the 'Opertion tree' / event ctegory 'Cuse 'RT isoltion'' > ' --Access level <> defult level'. Link [ 85] 3. Highlight the ssigned PMI element in the tree view. 4. In the 'Required ccess level' field of the detil editor, determine the minimum ccess level tht must be reched for remote trnsmission to be dectivted

237 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group 13 'All ctivtions' To ttin utomtic isoltion by ny control, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Control' > 'Sttion' > 'Alrming control group' > 'RT' element in the tsk crd. 2. Assign 'Cuses' to 'Fire control' element in the 'Control tree' / event ctegory'cuse 'RT isoltion'' > 'All ctivtions'. Link [ 85] 3. In the tree view, highlight the 'Fire control' link nd use the hyperlink in the detil editor to nvigte to the originl 'Fire control' element. 4. Assign its cuse to the corresponding input Properties of the ssigned effect elements You cn set dditionl properties in the ssigned effect elements of n lrming control. The settings re described in the following sections. If the effect is ssigned to n RT chnnel, you cn set the following: Figure 84: Settings in the detil editor of n ssigned RT chnnel 'OFF llowed while AVC ctive (t1/t2)' This setting specifies whether the RT chnnel my be switched off while the AVC is ctive i.e., while the times t1 nd t2 re running. Independent of this setting, the 'ÜE b' commnd is lwys executed by fire brigde operting pnel (FDOP)

238 13 'Control' tsk crd Alrming control group 'Miniml durtion of ctivtion' This setting specifies the minimum period during which the RT chnnel remins ctive even if the cuse for triggering is no longer vilble. If the effect is ssigned to sounder line, you cn set the following: Figure 85: Settings in the detil editor of n ssigned sounder line 'Enbled': The two settings 'Enbled' specify whether time-out is used for the ctivtion of the control. The time-out cn be set seprtely for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion'. NOTICE Incorrect cuse link for 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' sounder property is only evluted for one 'Are' or for elements from one 'Are'. w w One or more sounders re ssigned s 'Control' effects. The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' property nd / or 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' is ctive. Only ssign one 'Are' or elements from one 'Are' s the cuse of the 'Control'. 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'': This setting specifies the durtion of the time-out in 'Mnned opertion'. The timeout is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the sounder is dectivted utomticlly. 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'': This setting specifies the durtion of the time-out in 'Unmnned opertion'. The time-out is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the sounder is dectivted utomticlly

239 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Universl control group The 'Fire control group' combines severl 'Fire controls'. In the 'Fire control', one or more 'Input' elements re creted in the cuse. An event cn be ssigned to this. The executing element will be ssigned to the effect of the 'Fire control' element Fire control Figure 86: 'Fire control' element in the tree view The element 'Fire control' is used in order to control fcilities when prticulr event occurs e.g., to close fire doors or to switch off 'Zones'. Events within the 'Site' nd inputs cn be ssigned s cuses for the control. Commnds nd outputs cn be ssigned s effects of the control. Cuses Control Effects Event Input Tble 13: Cuses nd effects of the control 'Fire control' Commnd Output with or without confirmtion The ssigned inputs nd outputs must be in the sme 'Sttion' s the control. Logiclly combining cuses In the 'Formul' field of the control, configure the combintion type for the cuses with '*' (AND), '+' (OR), '-' (NOT). Templtes for 'Fire control' 'Stndrd Fire control' 'Door holders' In the cse of the 'Door holders' templte, the checkbox 'Controls 'door holders' ppliction' is ctivted in the defult settings for the detil editor. See lso 2 Fire control properties [ 242]

240 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Assigning fire control Assigning cuses 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Fire control group' > 'Fire control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Cuses'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select n event ctegory or n input t the left in the window. The pproprite tree is shown in the right side of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Select the element you wnt. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Cuses'

241 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group 13 Assigning effects Two trees, one bove the other, re visible in the figure below. The lower tree ppers only when confirmtion input cn be ssigned. To ssign n effect, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Fire control group' > 'Fire control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Effects'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 5. Select n output or commnd on the left in the window. The pproprite tree is shown in the right side of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Select the element you wnt. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Effects'

242 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Fire control properties Figure 87: Properties in the detil editor of the element 'Fire control' 'START mode' This setting defines the conditions for the ctivtion of the control. The following conditions re possible: 'Undefined (no utom. ctivtion)': The control cn only be ctivted mnully with commnd. 'Formul true': The control is ctivted when the Boolen expression in the field 'Formul' is true. 'Vlue rising nd >= threshold (ll cuses OR-combined)': The control is ctivted s soon s prticulr number of events of the respective event ctegory hs occurred. This vlue is in the detil editor of the cuse element, in the field 'Threshold'. 'STOP mode' This setting defines the conditions for the dectivtion of the control. The following conditions re possible: 'Undefined (no utom. dectivtion)': The control cn only be dectivted mnully with commnd. 'Formul flse': The control is dectivted when the Boolen expression in the field 'Formul' is flse gin. 'All cuses inctive': The control is dectivted when ll ssigned cuses re inctive gin. 'Formul' Severl cuses cn be ssigned with formul. The following opertors re possible: OR = '+' AND = '*' NOT = ' ' When brckets re used, mixture of opertors cn lso be used. Exmple: '1 * (2 + 3)' mens '1 AND (2 OR 3)'. If no formul hs been defined, ll cuses re linked with the OR function

243 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group 13 Dely times nd time-out 'Activtion dely': The ctivtion of the control is delyed by the set time fter the ctivtion condition is met. 'Dectivtion dely': The dectivtion of the control is delyed by the set time fter the dectivtion condition is met. 'Activtion timeout': The time-out is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the control is dectivted gin utomticlly, even if the conditions for ctivting the control re still fulfilled. The property 'Activtion timeout' cn be set only if the checkbox 'Enbled' is ctivted. 'Dectivtion timeout': The time-out is strted when the control is dectivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the control is ctivted gin utomticlly, even if the conditions for dectivting the control re still fulfilled. The property 'Dectivtion timeout' cn be set only if the checkbox 'Enbled' is ctivted. The following properties cn be set in the 'Detils' tb: Figure 88: Properties in the detil editor of the element 'Fire control' 'Accept commnds 'Fire controls ON/OFF' from FBF' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched off or on, respectively, by commnd on the fire brigde Person Mchine Interfce (PMI). If the checkbox is checked, then ll effects of the control will be switched off or on by the FBF commnd for the corresponding 'Are'. This setting is relevnt only for controls in ccordnce with the VdS definition. 'Controls 'door holders' ppliction' This property indictes whether the control is used for fire door. If the checkbox is ctivted, then fire doors will be shut utomticlly when the control is switched off. This prevents fire doors from remining open in the event of n lrm if the control hs been switched off. If the control ws creted with the templte 'Door holders', then the checkbox 'Controls 'door holders' ppliction' is ctivted in the defult settings. 'OFF llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be switched off: 'Alwys': 'The element cn lwys be switched off. 'Never': The element cn never be switched off. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be switched off if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be switched off if it is in quiescent condition or if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd t the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'

244 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group 'DEACTIVATION llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be dectivted: 'Alwys': The element cn lwys be dectivted. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be dectivted if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be dectivted if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'. 'Rectivtion upon unsuccessful reset' This setting indictes whether n lredy dectivted control is to be rectivted once gin if the event tht triggered the control ws not ble to be reset. Checkbox ctivted: The control is rectivted. The event is treted s new event. Checkbox dectivted: The control is not rectivted. The event is not treted s new event. 'Control test llowed' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched to the 'Control test mode' by commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce Properties of the ssigned cuse elements You cn set dditionl properties in the ssigned cuse elements of the 'Fire control'. The settings re described in the following sections. Assigning to n event If the cuse of the control is n event, you cn set the following properties in the ssigned cuse element: Figure 89: Properties in the detil editor of cuse element when ssigning to n event 'Event ctegory': Event ctegory tht is ssigned to the control s the cuse. 'Threshold': The vlue in this field specifies how mny events of the corresponding event ctegory re required in the element or the subtree, to ctivte the control. If the control is dectivted gin, it is re-ctivted by new event of the given event ctegory. This setting only comes into effect if the control's detil editor, in the 'START mode' field, the 'Vlue rising nd >= threshold (ll cuses OR-combined)' setting is selected. 'Include sub-tree': This setting specifies whether only events in the ssigned element re considered or in the subtree, too

245 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group 13 'Dectivte cuse when event is ACKNOWLEDGED': This setting specifies when the cuse is dectivted: Checkbox ctivted: The cuse is dectivted s soon s the ssigned event is cknowledged. Checkbox dectivted: The cuse is dectivted s soon s the ssigned event disppers. If the ssigned event cnnot be cknowledged, this setting hs no effect. The cuse is lwys dectivted s soon s the event disppers. 'ACTIVE if no communiction to source': This setting specifies the condition of the cuse, if no connection to 'Sttion' exists tht contins the ssigned element. The condition cn be ACTIVE or INACTIVE. Assigning to n 'AVC' / 'IC' event If the cuse of the control is 'AVC' or 'IC' event, you cn specify n dditionl criterion for the ctivtion of the cuse in the ssigned cuse element. Figure 90: Properties in the detil editor of the cuse element when ssigning to n 'AVC'/'IC' event The 'AVC/IC stte' setting specifies, which condition the 'AVC' or 'IC' must be in, so tht the cuse becomes ctive. The following settings re possible: 'AVC/IC: Locl lrming': The 'AVC' / 'IC' is the 'locl lrming' condition. There is no dely time. 'AVC/IC: Globl lrming': The 'AVC' / 'IC' is the 'globl lrming' condition. 'AVC/IC: Alrming delyed (t1/t2/ts)': The dely time t1 or t2 of the 'AVC' or t1 or ts of the 'IC' is running. 'AVC/IC: Alrming delyed, t1 running': The dely time t1 of the 'AVC' or 'IC' is running. 'AVC: Alrming delyed, t2 running': The dely time t2 of the 'AVC' is running. 'IC: Intervention stopped (t1 cknowledged)': The dely time t1 of the 'IC' hs been ended with 'Acknowledge'. For the 'AVC/IC stte' property, mximum of one checkbox my be ctive. Otherwise n error is displyed in the cuse element. Exmple: The cuse is ssigned to the ' --AVC, Fire ALARM' event ctegory nd the 'Detection re' element. In the detil editor of the 'Detection re' element, the 'AVC/IC: Globl lrming' checkbox is ctivted. The cuse is only ctive when 'Fire ALARM' triggers the 'AVC' nd the 'AVC' is in the 'globl lrming' condition

246 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Assigning to n input If the cuse is n input, you cn set the following properties in the ssigned cuse element of the control: Figure 91: Properties in the detil editor of the cuse element when ssigning to n input 'Evlution filter time': This setting specifies how long the signl of the ssigned input must be ctive for the cuse to be evluted s ctive Time control Controlling the time for ctivting nd dectivting ssigned effects 'Time control cuse' cuse element: Configuring the dt nd time for ctivting nd dectivting ssigned effects Assigned effects: Commnds nd outputs WARNING Activtion or dectivtion opertions performed incorrectly in the event of time switchover. If the time is put forwrd by one hour, ctivtion or dectivtion opertions scheduled to tke plce within this switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m., will not be performed. If the time is put bck by one hour, ctivtion or dectivtion opertions scheduled to tke plce within this switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m., will be performed twice. If you hve configured time switchover for the site, do not configure ny ctivtion or dectivtion opertions to tke plce during the switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m. NOTICE Configuring severl cuses Only one cuse element my be ctive within 'Time control' t ny one time. The times for ctivting nd dectivting cuses must not overlp if severl cuses re configured for one 'Time control'. If 'Time control' hs severl cuse elements, do not configure ctivtion nd dectivtion times tht overlp. Cuses Control Effects 'Time control cuse': Activtion nd dectivtion dte nd time 'Time control' Commnd Output Tble 14: Cuses nd effects of the control

247 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Time control properties In the detil editor of the 'Time control' element, the following properties cn be set: 'Overview' tb Customer text 'Detils' tb 'Activtion' events hidden' When the checkbox is checked, ctivted events of the control re not displyed on ny operting unit, re not sved in the Event memory, nd re not printed out. 'OFF llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be switched off: 'Alwys': 'The element cn lwys be switched off. 'Never': The element cn never be switched off. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be switched off if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be switched off if it is in quiescent condition or if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd t the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'. 'Control test llowed' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched to the 'Control test mode' by commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce

248 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Creting nd configuring time control cuse Creting 'Time control cuse' 1. Highlight the element 'Cuses'. 2. Open the 'New element' window. 3. Select 'Add'. The 'Time control cuse' cuse element is creted. Configuring 'Time control cuse' WARNING Activtion or dectivtion opertions performed incorrectly in the event of time switchover. If the time is put forwrd by one hour, ctivtion or dectivtion opertions scheduled to tke plce within this switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m., will not be performed. If the time is put bck by one hour, ctivtion or dectivtion opertions scheduled to tke plce within this switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m., will be performed twice. If you hve configured time switchover for the site, do not configure ny ctivtion or dectivtion opertions to tke plce during the switchover period, e.g., between 02:00.m. nd 03:00.m. NOTICE Configuring severl cuses Only one cuse element my be ctive within 'Time control' t ny one time. The times for ctivting nd dectivting cuses must not overlp if severl cuses re configured for one 'Time control'. If 'Time control' hs severl cuse elements, do not configure ctivtion nd dectivtion times tht overlp

249 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group 13 'Overview' tb Customer text Activtion - Time: Defines the time t which the 'Time control cuse' element will be ctivted on the specified dy Activtion - Dys of the week: Defines the dy/s on which the ctivtion will tke plce t the specified time Dectivtion - Time: Defines the time t which the 'Time control cuse' element will be dectivted on the specified dy Dectivtion - Dys of the week: Defines the dy/s on which the dectivtion will tke plce t the specified time

250 13 'Control' tsk crd Universl control group Assigning time control effects Use the 'Assign' function to ssign commnds nd outputs s effects. Link [ 90]

251 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group Evc control group The evcution control group mkes it possible to configure complete evcution function for ech lrm device group, e.g., on one floor. Two function blocks re vilble for ech control: Alert The ssigning of ll conditions, so tht the corresponding lrm devices trnsmit wrning signl. Evc The ssigning of ll conditions, so tht the corresponding lrm devices trnsmit n evcution signl. Events in the 'Sttion', the 'Detector lines', the 'Section', or the 'Zone' (cuse) initite evcution control. The evcution control group unites the following evcution control elements: 'Universl evc control' 'Phsed evc control' Assigning universl evc control Assigning cuse NOTICE Incorrect cuse link for 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' sounder property is only evluted for one 'Are' or for elements from one 'Are'. w w One or more sounders re ssigned s 'Control' effects. The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' property nd / or 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' is ctive. Only ssign one 'Are' or elements from one 'Are' s the cuse of the 'Control'. 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Evc control group' > 'Universl evc control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Cuses'

252 13 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select n event ctegory or n input t the left in the window. The pproprite tree is shown in the right side of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Select the element you wnt. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Cuses'. Assigning n effect 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Evc control group' > 'Universl evc control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Effects'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Select the element you wnt. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Effects'. In order to nvigte quickly to prticulr device in the window 'New effect dilog', you cn ctivted the checkbox 'Use seril no. ("ID-Nr."):' nd select the seril number of the desired device from the drop-down list

253 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group Universl evc control properties Figure 92: Properties in the detil editor of the 'Universl evc control' element 'START mode' This setting defines the conditions for the ctivtion of the control. The following conditions re possible: 'Undefined (no utom. ctivtion)': The control cn only be ctivted mnully with commnd. 'Formul true': The control is ctivted when the Boolen expression in the field 'Formul' is true. 'Vlue rising nd >= threshold (ll cuses OR-combined)': The control is ctivted s soon s prticulr number of events of the respective event ctegory hs occurred. This vlue is in the detil editor of the cuse element, in the field 'Threshold'. 'STOP mode' This setting defines the conditions for the dectivtion of the control. The following conditions re possible: 'Undefined (no utom. dectivtion)': The control cn only be dectivted mnully with commnd. 'Formul flse': The control is dectivted when the Boolen expression in the field 'Formul' is flse gin. 'All cuses inctive': The control is dectivted when ll ssigned cuses re inctive gin. 'Formul' Severl cuses cn be ssigned with formul. The following opertors re possible: OR = '+' AND = '*' NOT = ' ' When brckets re used, mixture of opertors cn lso be used. Exmple: '1 * (2 + 3)' mens '1 AND (2 OR 3)'. If no formul hs been defined, ll cuses re linked with the OR function

254 13 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group Dely times nd time-out 'Activtion dely': The ctivtion of the control is delyed by the set time fter the ctivtion condition is met. 'Dectivtion dely': The dectivtion of the control is delyed by the set time fter the dectivtion condition is met. 'Activtion timeout': The time-out is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the control is dectivted gin utomticlly, even if the conditions for ctivting the control re still fulfilled. The property 'Activtion timeout' cn be set only if the checkbox 'Enbled' is ctivted. 'Dectivtion timeout': The time-out is strted when the control is dectivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the control is ctivted gin utomticlly, even if the conditions for dectivting the control re still fulfilled. The property 'Dectivtion timeout' cn be set only if the checkbox 'Enbled' is ctivted. The following properties cn be set in the 'Detils' tb: Figure 93: Properties in the detil editor of the 'Universl evc control' element 'Accept commnds 'Fire controls ON/OFF' from FBF' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched off or on, respectively, by commnd on the fire brigde Person Mchine Interfce (PMI). If the checkbox is checked, then ll effects of the control will be switched off or on by the FBF commnd for the corresponding 'Are'. This setting is relevnt only for controls in ccordnce with the VdS definition. 'OFF llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be switched off: 'Alwys': 'The element cn lwys be switched off. 'Never': The element cn never be switched off. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be switched off if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be switched off if it is in quiescent condition or if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd t the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'. 'DEACTIVATION llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be dectivted: 'Alwys': The element cn lwys be dectivted. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be dectivted if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be dectivted if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'

255 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group 13 'Rectivtion upon unsuccessful reset' This setting indictes whether n lredy dectivted control is to be rectivted once gin if the event tht triggered the control ws not ble to be reset. Checkbox ctivted: The control is rectivted. The event is treted s new event. Checkbox dectivted: The control is not rectivted. The event is not treted s new event. 'Control test llowed' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched to the 'Control test mode' by commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce Cuse of the phsed evc control The 2-stge evcution hs seprte cuses for ALERT nd EVAC. The grphic below shows the event ctegories tht cn be ssigned to n element of the hrdwre tree, detection tree, or control tree. Figure 94: 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window with the ' ----All utom. Fire ALARMS' event ctegory NOTICE Incorrect cuse link for 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' sounder property is only evluted for one 'Are' or for elements from one 'Are'. w w One or more sounders re ssigned s 'Control' effects. The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' property nd / or 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' is ctive. Only ssign one 'Are' or elements from one 'Are' s the cuse of the 'Control'. To ssign 'Cuses ALERT' or 'Cuses EVAC', proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Evc control group' in the tree view. 3. In 'Phsed evc control', highlight the 'Cuses ALERT' or 'Cuses EVAC' element. 4. Select 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Click on n event ctegory in the left of the window nd select n event from the list

256 13 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group 6. In the right of the window, select the tree nd mrk the corresponding highlighted element in it. 7. Click on 'Assign'. 'Cuses' is ssigned to the element Effect of the phsed evc control The effect is ssigned to the corresponding hrdwre (sounders). Different tonlities cn be selected for the wrning (ALERT) nd evcution (EVAC) for the sounder. Figure 95: Window 'Assign dilog' for ssigning sounder To ssign the effect, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Evc control group' in the tree view. 3. In 'Phsed evc control', highlight the 'Effects' element. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The 'EVAC sounder' commnd is highlighted, nd the hrdwre tree is displyed t the right of the window. 5. Mrk the corresponding highlighted element in the tree. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'Effects' is ssigned to the element

257 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group Properties of the phsed evc control Figure 96: 'Detils' tb for the 'Phsed evc control' element 'Accept commnds 'Fire controls ON/OFF' from FBF' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched off or on, respectively, by commnd on the fire brigde Person Mchine Interfce (PMI). If the checkbox is checked, then ll effects of the control will be switched off or on by the FBF commnd for the corresponding 'Are'. This setting is relevnt only for controls in ccordnce with the VdS definition. 'OFF llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be switched off: 'Alwys': 'The element cn lwys be switched off. 'Never': The element cn never be switched off. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be switched off if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be switched off if it is in quiescent condition or if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd t the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'. 'DEACTIVATION llowed' This setting indictes whether or not nd under which circumstnces the element cn be dectivted: 'Alwys': The element cn lwys be dectivted. 'NOT if ctivted utomticlly by cuses': The element cnnot be dectivted if it ws ctivted utomticlly by its cuses. The element cn only be dectivted if it ws ctivted by mnul commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce or by 'Fire control'. 'Control test llowed' This setting indictes whether the control cn be switched to the 'Control test mode' by commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce

258 13 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group stge evcution, specil cse [GB] Evcution is undertken in two stges. First, ll floors re wrned (ALERT). After tht, the evcution (EVAC) of individul floors is performed t prticulr intervls (phses), strting with the floor on which the set of fire is locted, in order to prevent blocking of the escpe routes. In the first phse the floor on which the fire is locted s well s the one bove nd the two top floors, ll bsement floors nd possibly the ground floor re evcuted. In dditionl phses, one upper nd one lower floor re lso evcuted t predefined intervls. If need be, dditionl floors cn be evcuted during the sme phse. Floor Evcution phses UG EG Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4 Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 8 Floor 9 Floor 10 UG EG Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor 11 Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Tble 15: Exmple of evcution process in the event of fire on the fifth floor UG EG Floor Bsement Ground floor Floor 1-5 Evcution phses Evcution if fire breks out on the fifth floor: Phse 1: Floor 5, floor 6, floor 10, floor 11, nd bsement Phse 2: Floor 4, floor 7 Phse 3: Floor 3, floor 8 Phse 4: Floor 2, floor 9 Phse 5: EG

259 'Control' tsk crd Evc control group 13 Configurtion exmple for the 2-phse evcution control element w w Ech floor is represented by one section. Ech floor is equipped with combined 'ALERT sounder'/'evac sounder'. 1. Crete the 'Phsed evc control' element for ech floor. 2. In the first 'Phsed evc control', highlight the 'Cuses ALERT' element. 3. Assign 'Cuses ALERT' with ll sections. Leve the dely times of the sections t '00:00:00' s immedite wrning is required on ech floor. 4. Use multiselection to select ll sections nd use the 'Copy' function to copy them. 5. Highlight 'Cuses EVAC'' nd insert the sections using the 'Pste' function. 6. Repet the 'Pste' function for ech 'Cuses ALERT' nd 'Cuses EVAC' element in ech 'Phsed evc control' element. 7. Configure the dely times for evcution. Use the column for floor 5 in the bove tble to do this. Open 'Phsed evc control / 4th floor' > 'Cuses EVAC'. Evcution phse 1: Highlight 'Section / 3rd floor' nd 'Section / 4th floor' in turn nd set ech to 5 minutes in the 'Dely' detil editor. Evcution phse 2: Highlight 'Section / 2nd floor' nd 'Section / 5th floor' in turn nd set ech to 10 minutes in the 'Dely' detil editor. Continue up to evcution phse Using this method nd referring to the tble bove, configure the dely times for evcution for ech 'Phsed evc control' element. Figure 97: 2-stge evcution

260 13 'Control' tsk crd Counter control group nd lrm counter control 13.6 Counter control group nd lrm counter control The 'Counter control group' groups the control elements 'Alrm counter control'. With the 'Alrm counter control', the following events of the 'Sttions' cn be registered: ' --All Fire ALARMS' 'All test ctivtions' The 'Counter control group' nd 'Alrm counter control' elements re not vilble in the 'Control tree' s stndrd. They must be creted, if required. Informtion on the cretion of 'Control tree' cn be found in chpter 'Creting control tree [ 232]'. Assigning 'Alrm counter control' The 'Alrm counter control' element cn be ssigned to one or more 'Sttions'. While doing this, one or both event ctegories of 'Sttion' cn be ssigned. Figure 98: Assigning lrm counter control 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Counter control group' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Alrm counter control'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog' window opens. The 'Detection tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Select the event ctegory on the left in the window. 6. On the right in the window, select the desired 'Sttion'. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Sttion' is ssigned to 'Alrm counter control'. Switching the lrm counter off nd on You cn configure stndrd button or fvorite such tht you cn switch the lrm counter off nd t the touch of button. To do tht, ssign the stndrd button or the fvorite to the 'OFF' or 'ON' commnds nd to 'Counter control group' or 'Alrm counter control'

261 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group Dmper control group Contins the 'Fire dmper control' nd 'Smoke extrction control' elements Control of fire nd smoke dmpers tht re connected to the FS20 vi inputs nd outputs, e.g., vi n input/output module on the detector line Cuses which cn be ssigned: Events ssocited with the 'Site' nd inputs Assigned effects: Outputs nd other controls The dmper ctutor is controlled vi outputs The output / dmper stte is monitored vi inputs Cuses Control Effects Event, input 'Fire dmper control' 'Smoke extrction control' Tble 16: Cuses nd effects of the control Inputs nd outputs tht re connected to the dmpers Exmple of fire dmper control A fire dmper control corresponds to the ventiltion zone. Fire dmper control could be ctivted by fire lrm, for exmple. In the event of fire lrm, the open fire dmpers re closed. Exmple of smoke dmper control Smoke dmper control could be ctivted by n input, for exmple. If the input is ctivted by the fire brigde, the smoke dmpers re opened Creting nd configuring dmper control 1. Crete 'Dmper control group' in the control tree nd underneth this 'Fire dmper control' or 'Smoke extrction control'. 2. Assign the cuse element to n event or to n input nd mke the settings for the cuse element properties. 3. Assign the pre-configured effect elements to n FDCIO222/4 input/output module in ccordnce with the wiring. Link [ 263] An output with monitoring must be configured for ech dmper. For 'Fire dmper control': The output without monitoring is optionl nd is only required if you wnt to connect the dmper ctutor to the FDCIO222/4 using both poles. 4. Optionl: Crete dditionl chnnels under the 'Fire dmper control' or 'Smoke extrction control' nd ssign them to FDCIO222/4. An output with monitoring must be configured for ech dmper. For 'Fire dmper control': The output without monitoring is optionl nd is only required if you wnt to connect the dmper ctutor to the FDCIO222/4 using both poles

262 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 5. In the hrdwre tree for the ssigned FDCIO222/4 outputs, set the following 'Output mode': 'Inctive: On / ctive: Off' 6. For 'Fire dmper control': Set the properties of the control. Link [ 268] 7. Set the properties of the ssigned effects. Link [ 269] 8. In the 'Globl behviour' element, configure the properties for the BACnet notifictions nd the BACnet priorities for the dmper controls. Link [ 290] If necessry, ctivte the 'BACnet lrm notifiction in section enbled' property to send 'Section summry' to sub-systems over BACnet. The dmper control hs been configured. 9. Optionl: Export the BACnet prmeters s n EDE file to enble subsequent configurtion of the Desigo PX controller. Link [ 270] Dmper control sttes The dmper control stte nd the disply of this stte on the PMI re dependent on the limit vlue for open or closed dmpers OR on the stte of the 'Min dmper'. Fire dmper control Fixed stte: It is not possible to chnge the ssignment between the stte of the control nd the stte of the fire dmper. Control stte Inctive Active Fire dmper stte Open Closed Smoke dmper control: Chngeble stte: The ssignment between the stte of the control nd the stte of the smoke dmper cn be inverted if wired ccordingly. The tble below shows the defult stte tht pplies in ech cse: Control stte Inctive Active Smoke dmper stte Closed Open You will find more informtion on the messge texts tht re displyed on the PMI when dmper control is ctivted, dectivted, or mlfunctions in document

263 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group Assignment of effects dependent on wiring The ssignment of effects is dependent on how the FDCIO222/4 is wired to the contcts of the fire/smoke dmper ctutor. An output with monitoring must be configured for ech dmper. The output without monitoring is optionl nd is only required if you wnt to connect the dmper ctutor to the FDCIO222/4 using both poles. Monitoring the control with the inputs of the FDCIO222/4 With the FDCIO222/4, it is possible to monitor whether control of the dmper ctutor (e.g., 'Close dmper') hs been performed correctly (e.g., 'Dmper closed'). Motor 'M' of the dmper ctutor is controlled vi one output (fire dmper) or vi two outputs (smoke dmper) on the FDCIO222/4. The dmper stte is monitored vi two inputs on the FDCIO222/4. You will find more informtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Description of the effect elements The following effects re pre-configured: 'Fire dmper control' 'Fire dmper output/supervised': Control of the dmper ctutor motor for opening or closing the dmper. The inputs for monitoring the dmper stte re locted under this output. 'Dmper output/not supervised': The wiring for the energy supply cn be routed vi this output. 'Smoke extrction control' 'Smoke extrction dmper output/supervised': Counterclockwise control of the dmper ctutor motor for opening the dmper. The inputs for monitoring the dmper stte re locted under this output. 'Dmper output/not supervised': Clockwise control of the dmper ctutor motor for closing the dmper. This output is inverted by defult becuse the norml condition of the dmper is 'closed', i.e., when the control is in the inctive stte, the output contct is closed/ctive

264 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group Effects which cn be ssigned Fire dmper output/supervised Dmper output/not supervised Fire dmpers: Wiring nd ssignment This chpter describes the wiring nd ssignment spects bsed on the defult sttes of the dmper controls [ 262]. Input/Output of the FDCIO222/4 in Engineering Tool Contct on the FDCIO222/4 21:Output OUT A M1 22:Output OUT B M2 Input 'Dmper inctive' 11:Input IN 1 S4 nd S6 Input 'Dmper ctive' 12:Input IN 2 S1 nd S2 Wired to contct/s...on the dmper ctutor Contct position with 'Input 'Dmper inctive'', fire dmper open AC IN DC IN - AC IN DC IN OUT B OUT A FDCIO222/4 M 1 2 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN Contcts S4 nd S6 closed: Dmper stte 'Open'

265 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 13 Contct position with 'Input 'Dmper ctive'', fire dmper closed AC IN DC IN - AC IN DC IN OUT B OUT A FDCIO222/4 M 1 2 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN Contcts S1 nd S2 closed: Dmper stte 'Closed'

266 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group Effects which cn be ssigned Smoke extrction dmper output/supervised Dmper output/not supervised Smoke dmpers: Wiring nd ssignment This chpter describes the wiring nd ssignment spects bsed on the defult sttes of the dmper controls [ 262]. Input/Output of the FDCIO222/4 in Engineering Tool Input on the FDCIO222/4 21:Output OUT A M2 22:Output OUT B M3 Input 'Dmper inctive' 11:Input IN 1 S1, S2 Input 'Dmper ctive' 12:Input IN 2 S4, S6 Wired to contct/s...on the dmper ctutor Contct position with 'Input 'Dmper inctive'', smoke dmper closed AC IN AC IN DC IN + DC IN OUT D OUT C OUT B OUT A FDCIO222/4 M S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN LINE + LINE - LINE + LINE - 1 Contcts S4 nd S6 closed: Dmper stte 'Closed'

267 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 13 Contct position with 'Input 'Input 'Dmper ctive'', smoke dmper open AC IN AC IN DC IN + DC IN OUT D OUT C OUT B OUT A FDCIO222/4 M S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN LINE + LINE - LINE + LINE - 1 Contcts S1 nd S2 closed: Dmper stte 'Open'

268 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group Fire dmper control properties 'Overview' tb Specific properties for 'Fire dmper control': 'Threshold 'closed'' (priority 1) A 'Fire dmper control' corresponds to the ventiltion zone. The limit vlue corresponds to subset of fire dmpers within the ventiltion zone. As soon s the limit vlue is reched, i.e., the fire dmpers constituting the subset re closed, the control becomes ctive nd the stte of the 'Fire dmper control' / ventiltion zone is displyed on the PMI. The control is lso ctive if the 'Min dmper' is closed. The control stte nd the disply of this stte on the PMI re dependent on the limit vlue OR on the stte of the 'Min dmper'. 'Threshold 'open'' (priority 2) A 'Fire dmper control' corresponds to the ventiltion zone. The limit vlue corresponds to subset of fire dmpers within the ventiltion zone. As soon s the limit vlue is reched, i.e., the fire dmpers constituting the subset re open, the control becomes inctive. The control is lso inctive if the 'Min dmper' is open. While the 'Min dmper' is closed, the control is unble to switch to the 'Inctive/Open' stte. The control stte nd the disply of this stte on the PMI re dependent on the limit vlue OR on the stte of the 'Min dmper'. Recommendtion for the 'Threshold 'closed'' nd 'Threshold 'open'' prmeter vlues w You hve no specific requirements for the prmeter vlues. Enter vlue for ech of 'Threshold 'closed'' nd 'Threshold 'open'' corresponding to the number of dmpers in this 'Fire dmper control'. The effect of entering the number of dmpers in the 'Fire dmper control' s prmeter vlue is tht ll dmpers must be open or closed in order for the stte of the 'Fire dmper control' to be 'open' or 'closed'. If, contrry to the bove recommendtion, the sum of the prmeter vlues of 'Threshold 'closed'' nd 'Threshold 'open'' corresponds to the number of dmpers in this 'Fire dmper control', both conditions ('closed' nd 'open') cn be met t the sme time. In this cse the control stte is 'closed'. Exmple of use The 'open' stte of the 'Fire dmper control' cn be ssigned s cuse for n dditionl control in order to switch on fn. NOTICE! Check tht ctivting fns will not dmge ny of the dmpers. The 'closed' stte of the 'Fire dmper control' cn be used to check nd ensure tht ll fire dmpers re closed in the event of fire

269 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 13 You will find more informtion on the messge texts tht re displyed on the PMI when dmper control is ctivted, dectivted, or mlfunctions in document 'BACnet object nme' Customer-specific object nme for the BACnet object. The 'BACnet object nme' cn be selected in ccordnce with the project-specific nming system for the relevnt BACnet project Properties of the ssigned effects 'Overview' tb 'Min dmper' ('Fire dmper control' only) If the checkbox is checked, the dmper is the min dmper. The stte of the control/ventiltion zone is set to 'closed' if the min dmper is 'closed'. 'Timeout 'close'' Defines the time within which the 'closed' stte must be confirmed once the control hs ctivted the output. 'Timeout 'open'' Defines the time within which the 'open' stte must be confirmed once the control hs ctivted the output. Cscding of dmper controls You cn ssign the 'Effects' element to nother dmper control. Effect elements with reference to nother dmper control cn lso be defined s the 'Min dmper'. 'BACnet object nme' Customer-specific object nme for the BACnet object. The 'BACnet object nme' cn be selected in ccordnce with the project-specific nming system for the relevnt BACnet project

270 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group EDE export Contins the BACnet prmeters for the dmper controls Cn be used for the configurtion of Desigo PX controllers Softwre required: XSLT processor for converting the SiB-X export on the bsis of n XSLT style sheet Exmple: Commnd Line Trnsformtion Utility (msxsl.exe) Provided by FS20: XSLT style sheet Generting n EDE export w You hve n XSLT processor or equivlent softwre with this functionlity, e.g., msxsl.exe. w You hve creted nd configured the dmper controls. Link [ 261] 1. Perform the SiB-X export for the site in SintesoWorks. Link [ 96] 2. In SintesoWorks, select 'Help' menu > 'View dditionl documents' > 'EDE_export'. The XSLT style sheet cn be found inside the 'EDE_export' folder in XSL formt. 3. Use the SiB-X export s n input document nd the XSL file s style sheet for generting the EDE export in your XSLT processor. The EDE export only contins the BACnet prmeters for the dmper controls. It does not contin BACnet prmeters for ny other site elements Configuring LEDs for dmper control The stte of the fire nd/or smoke dmpers cn be displyed on n LED indictor FTO200x. Exmple: Stte of fire dmper displyed by mens of two LEDs on LED indictor FTO2008 Open: LED 1 lights up green Closed: LED 1 lights up red Dmper moving, i.e., is in the process of closing or opening: LED 1 nd 2 OFF Timeout occurred while opening or closing the dmper or fult is pending: LED 1 OFF, LED 2 lights up yellow Configuring n LED indictor 1. Select the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd nd crete n LED indictor FTO2008 for the relevnt sttion. 2. Go to the 'Overview' tb nd set the ddress of the LED indictor to vlue of between 20 nd 35 in ccordnce with the DIP switch setting on the LED indictor. 3. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd nd crete the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' element for the relevnt sttion. 4. Assign the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' element to the LEDs of the FTO2008 in the hrdwre tree

271 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 13 Configuring LED 1 for the 'Open' (green) nd 'Dmper moving' (OFF) dmper sttes 1. Select 'LED/output 1' nd ssign the LED s follows: Go to the left of the 'New cuse dilog' nd select the 'Dmper chnging position' event under 'Events 'Informtion''. On the right-hnd side, select the required 'Fire dmper output/supervised' from the control tree: 'Control tree' > 'Sttion' > 'Dmper control group' > 'Fire dmper control' > 'Effects' > 'Fire dmper output/supervised'. Click on 'Assign'. 2. Select the cuse element tht hs been creted under 'LED/output 1' nd set the following properties on the 'Overview' tb: Colour: 'Green' Priority: '01 (highest)' LED mode: 'Inctive: On / ctive: Off' Configuring LED 1 for the 'Closed' dmper stte 1. Assign 'LED/output 1' to nother cuse s follows: Go to the left of the 'New cuse dilog' nd select the ' ----Technicl messge: Dmper/confirmed' event under 'Events 'Technicl messge''. On the right-hnd side, select the sme 'Fire dmper output/supervised' s for the first ssignment from the control tree: 'Control tree' > 'Sttion' > 'Dmper control group' > 'Fire dmper control' > 'Effects' > 'Fire dmper output/supervised'. Click on 'Assign'. 2. Select the cuse element tht hs been creted under 'LED/output 1' nd set the following properties on the 'Overview' tb: Colour: 'Red' Priority: '02' LED mode: 'Inctive: Off / ctive: On' Configuring LED 1 for the 'Timeout/Fult' (OFF) dmper stte 1. Assign 'LED/output 1' to nother cuse s follows: Go to the left of the 'New cuse dilog' nd select the 'All fults' event under 'Events 'Fult''. On the right-hnd side, select the sme 'Fire dmper output/supervised' s for the first ssignment from the control tree: 'Control tree' > 'Sttion' > 'Dmper control group' > 'Fire dmper control' > 'Effects' > 'Fire dmper output/supervised'. Click on 'Assign'. 2. Select the cuse element tht hs been creted under 'LED/output 1' nd set the following properties on the 'Overview' tb: Colour: 'Green' Priority: '03' LED mode: 'Inctive: On / ctive: Off'

272 13 'Control' tsk crd Dmper control group 3. Assign the sme 'LED/output 1' element to nother cuse s follows: Go to the left of the 'New cuse dilog' nd select the ' ----Technicl messge: Dmper/unexpected' event under 'Events 'Technicl messge''. On the right-hnd side, select the sme 'Fire dmper output/supervised' s for the first ssignment from the control tree: 'Control tree' > 'Sttion' > 'Dmper control group' > 'Fire dmper control' > 'Effects' > 'Fire dmper output/supervised'. Click on 'Assign'. 4. Select the cuse element tht hs been creted under 'LED/output 1' nd set the following properties on the 'Overview' tb: Colour: 'Green' Priority: '04' LED mode: 'Inctive: On / ctive: Off' Configuring LED 2 for the 'Timeout/Fult' dmper stte Select 'LED/output 2' nd ssign the LED s follows: Go to the left of the 'New cuse dilog' nd select the 'All fults' event under 'Events 'Fult''. On the right-hnd side, select the sme 'Fire dmper output/supervised' s for the first ssignment from the control tree: 'Control tree' > 'Sttion' > 'Dmper control group' > 'Fire dmper control' > 'Effects' > 'Fire dmper output/supervised'. Click on 'Assign'

273 'Control' tsk crd Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] The extinguishing stndrd interfce SST is used for the control nd indiction of the extinguishing ctivtion of third prty extinguishing control instlltion. The input/output module FDCIO224, which is integrted in the fire control pnel, is used s n interfce between the fire control pnel nd the extinguishing control instlltion. The inputs of the fire control pnel for the extinguishing control equipment re monitored for short-circuit nd open line. The following events re evluted by the extinguishing control system vi the inputs of the input/output module: 'Input 'Dischrged'' 'Fult extinguish.' Extinguishing is ctivted vi n output of the input/output module. Creting n output for extinguishing ctution An output of the input/output module is used to ctute the extinguishing process vi the extinguishing control system. The commnd for the extinguishing ctution is give by detector zone(s) of the fire control pnel. Figure 99: 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window for ssigning the cuse for the extinguishing ctution Figure 100: 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window for ssigning the effect for the extinguishing ctution To ssign the cuse nd effect of the extinguishing ctution, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion' in the tree view nd crete 'Fire control group' element nd 'Fire control' element below this. 3. Select 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 4. Highlight 'Cuses' nd, in the 'New cuse dilog' window, highlight 'Event' in the ' ----All utom. Fire ALARMS' list. 5. Select the relevnt utomtic zone(s) nd click on 'Assign'. 'Cuses' is ssigned to the zone(s)

274 13 'Control' tsk crd Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] 6. Highlight 'Fire control' nd set the conditions for extinguishing ctivtion in the detil editor, 'Overview' button. 7. Highlight 'Effects' nd, in the 'New effect dilog' window, highlight 'Output/NO confirmtion'. 8. Select the relevnt 'Output' of input/output module FDCIO224 nd click on 'Assign'. 'Effects' is ssigned to the 'Output'. Assigning 'Input 'Dischrged'' An input of the input/output module serves is used to confirm extinguishing ctivted. Figure 101: 'Assign dilog' window for ssigning the 'Input 'Dischrged'' element To ssign 'Input 'Dischrged'', proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Section' nd crete n 'XC10 zone' element. 4. Open 'XC10 zone' nd highlight 'Input 'Dischrged''. 5. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Input 'Dischrged'' is highlighted nd the 'Hrdwre tree' ppers. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. In the 'Assign dilog' window, select the relevnt 'Input' of input/output module FDCIO224 nd click on 'Assign'. 'Input 'Dischrged'' is ssigned to the 'Input'

275 'Control' tsk crd Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] 13 Creting 'Fult extinguish.' input Figure 102: 'New element' window for creting the technicl zone for 'Fult extinguish.' Figure 103: 'Assign dilog' window for ssigning the 'Fult extinguish.' input To crete nd ssign the 'Fult extinguish.' input, proceed s follows: 1. Highlight 'Section'. 2. In the 'New element' window, select the zone 'Type:' in the 'Technicl zone' nd 'Fult extinguishing system' in the 'Templte:' field, nd click on 'Add'. 3. Highlight the 'Technicl zone' zone. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window nd highlight 'Input'. The 'Hrdwre tree' is shown. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Select the relevnt 'Input' of input/output module FDCIO224 nd click on 'Assign'. 'Technicl zone' is ssigned to the 'Input'. Creting fire brigde operting pnel (FBF) You will find more informtion in chpter 'Fire brigde periphery [DE] [ 338]'

276 13 'Control' tsk crd Extinguishing stndrd interfce SST [DE] Configuring the visibility on the fire brigde operting pnel (FBF) To ensure tht the extinguishing system ctivtion is correctly signled by the LED on the fire brigde operting pnel, the 'XC10 zone' element must be ssigned to the fire brigde operting pnel. Figure 104: 'Assign dilog' window for ssigning the visibility on the fire brigde operting pnel (FBF) To ssign the visibility on the fire brigde operting pnel (FBF), proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'FBF' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Visible Extinguishing zones'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Visible Extinguishing zones' is highlighted nd the 'Detection tree'is shown. The 'XC10 zone' element tht cn be ssigned is highlighted. 5. Select 'XC10 zone' nd click on 'Assign'. 'Visible Extinguishing zones' is ssigned to 'XC10 zone'

277 'Control' tsk crd Externl lrm indictor Externl lrm indictor The externl lrm indictor output of FDnet device cn be used for ny evcution control or fire control. Assigning externl lrm indictor output Figure 105: 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window with 'Output/NO confirmtion' w The output for the externl lrm indictor is not used for direct ctivtion. The option 'Direct ctivtion of externl AI' is set in the detil editor of the detector for the setting 'No direct ctivtion'. 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'Fire control group' > 'Fire control' - OR - 'Evc control group' > 'Universl evc control' or 'Phsed evc control'. 3. Highlight 'Effects'. 4. Select 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Highlight 'Output/NO confirmtion' t the left of the window. 6. Open the corresponding FDnet device in the hrdwre tree. 7. Highlight 'Ext. AI' nd click on 'Assign'. The effect of the control is ssigned to the externl lrm indictor output. See lso 2 Automtic fire detectors [ 153]

278 13 'Control' tsk crd Loop sounder, loop sounder/becon, nd bse sounder Loop sounder, loop sounder/becon, nd bse sounder 'Sounder', 'Sounder becon', nd 'Bse sounder' cn be ssigned to the following controls: In the lrming control group s: Internl 'Sounder' Externl 'Sounder' In the evc control group for: Universl evcution 2-stge evcution Assigning 'Sounder' Figure 106: 'Control' tsk crd, lrming nd evc control groups, with 'New effect dilog' window for ssigning sounder 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Depending on the ppliction in question, open the following in the tree view: 'Alrming control group' > 'Internl sounder control' or 'Externl sounder control' - OR - 'Evc control group' > 'Universl evc control' or 'Phsed evc control' 3. Highlight 'Effects'. 4. Select 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 'Assign dilog' is highlighted t the left of the 'Sounder' window. 5. In 'Hrdwre tree', select the 'Sounder' chnnel. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'Effects' is ssigned to 'Sounder'

279 'Control' tsk crd Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO Configuring 'Sounder' Figure 107: 'Control' tsk crd with 'Hrdwre' detil editor The 'Sounder' configurtion is displyed in the detil editor of the 'Control' tsk crd, provided tht the following conditions re met: 'Sounder' is ssigned to the control effect. 'Sounder' is highlighted in the tree view. In the detil editor the following configurtions re possible: Using 'Hrdwre', 'ALERT tone' nd 'EVAC tone' nd 'Sounder volume' cn be set. With 'Sounder becon' using 'Hrdwre', 'Becon ctivtion' cn dditionlly be configured. Using 'Overview', time limit cn be set for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion' seprtely. The settings for 'Sounder' cn lso be viewed in the detil editor of the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd, using 'Overview' nd 'Control' Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO223 You cn use the two inputs/outputs of the input/output module FDCIO223 for the connection of 'Sounder' lines. You cn ssign 'Sounder' line s n effect for the following controls: 'Internl sounder control' 'Externl sounder control' 'Universl evc control' 'Phsed evc control' Assigning the 'Sounder' line Figure 108: Assigning sounder line 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' nd then one of the following controls: 'Alrming control group' > 'Internl sounder control' or 'Externl sounder control' 'Evc control group' > 'Universl evc control' or 'Phsed evc control' 3. Highlight the element 'Effects'

280 13 'Control' tsk crd Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 5. Open the FDCIO223 input/output module nd select 'Collective/input/sounder/output'. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'Collective/input/sounder/output' is ssigned to 'Effects'. Setting the properties of the 'Sounder' line 1. Highlight the ssigned 'Sounder' line in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The following properties cn be set in the 'Overview' tb: Figure 109: Settings in the detil editor of the sounder line 'Enbled': The two settings 'Enbled' specify whether time-out is used for the ctivtion of the control. The time-out cn be set seprtely for 'Mnned opertion' nd 'Unmnned opertion'. 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'': This setting specifies the durtion of the time-out in 'Mnned opertion'. The timeout is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the sounder is dectivted utomticlly

281 'Control' tsk crd Sounder line vi input/output module FDCIO 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'': This setting specifies the durtion of the time-out in 'Unmnned opertion'. The time-out is strted when the control is ctivted. After the expirtion of the set time, the sounder is dectivted utomticlly. NOTICE Incorrect cuse link for 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' / 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' sounder property is only evluted for one 'Are' or for elements from one 'Are'. w w One or more sounders re ssigned s 'Control' effects. The 'Activtion timeout 'mnned'' property nd / or 'Activtion timeout 'unmnned'' is ctive. Only ssign one 'Are' or elements from one 'Are' s the cuse of the 'Control'. You will find description of the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tb in chpter 'Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163]'. You cn lso set the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd. You will find more informtion on input / output module FDCIO223 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163] 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

282 13 'Control' tsk crd Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output You cn configure the two inputs / outputs of the input / output module FDCIO223 s monitored inputs nd / or outputs. You cn ssign one monitored input s cuse for the following controls: 'Fire control' 'Universl evc control' 'Phsed evc control' You cn ssign one monitored output s n effect for the following control: 'Fire control' You will find more informtion on input / output module FDCIO223 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163] 2 Applicble documents [ 15] Configuring monitored input Assigning input Figure 110: Assigning input 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Fire control group' > 'Fire control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Cuses'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog, Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select 'Input' t the left in the window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Open the FDCIO223 input/output module nd select 'Collective/input/sounder/output'. 7. Click on 'Assign'. 'Collective/input/sounder/output' is ssigned to 'Cuses'

283 'Control' tsk crd Input/output module FDCIO223 with monitored input/output 13 Setting properties of the input 1. Highlight the ssigned input in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. The following properties cn be set in the 'Overview' tb: Figure 111: Settings in the detil editor of the input 'Evlution filter time': This setting specifies the minimum mount of time the signl of the ssigned input must be ctive for the control to be evluted s ctive. You will find description of the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tb in chpter 'Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163]'. You cn lso set the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Configuring monitored output Assign output Figure 112: Assign output 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'Fire control group' > 'Fire control' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Effects'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 5. Select 'Output/NO confirmtion' t the left in the window. The 'Hrdwre tree' is depicted t the right of the window. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 6. Open the FDCIO223 input/output module nd select 'Collective/input/sounder/output'. 7. Click on 'Assign'. 'Collective/input/sounder/output' is ssigned to 'Effects'

284 13 'Control' tsk crd Addressble lrm indictor FDCAI221 Setting properties of the output 1. Highlight the ssigned output in the tree view. 2. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. You will find description of the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tb in chpter 'Input/output module FDCIO223 [ 163]'. You cn lso set the properties in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd Addressble lrm indictor FDCAI221 The ddressble lrm indictor FDCAI221 cn be ssigned to ny cuse using control. The ddressble lrm indictor cn be ssigned to the effects of the following controls: 'Fire control group': 'Fire control' 'Evc control group': 'Universl evc control' Phsed evc control Assigning n ddressble lrm indictor 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd. 2. Open the control you wnt in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Effects'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 5. Select the ddressble lrm indictor in the tree view of the ssignble elements. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'Effects' is ssigned to the ddressble lrm indictor. Figure 113: Assigning FDCAI

285 'Control' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls A fire control group must be configured with the two fire controls 'ÜE ktiv/bestätigt' nd 'Summenlrm' in order to operte key sfe dpter [DE]. Prerequisite The key sfe dpter hs been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE] [ 355]'. Creting fire control group 1. Select the 'Control' tsk crd nd crete new 'Fire control group' for the sttion with the key sfe dpter, e.g., using the context menu. 2. Edit the customer text for the 'Fire control group', e.g., 'Key sfe dpter'. 3. Crete two elements of type 'Fire control' with the templte 'Stndrd Fire control' or without BFST function for the 'Fire control group', e.g., using the context menu. 4. Edit the customer text for the two 'Fire controls': 'Fire controls 1': 'ÜE ktiv/bestätigt' 'Fire controls 2': 'Summenlrm' Assigning the 'ÜE ktiv/bestätigt' fire control 1. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Cuses' to the control s follows: Select the ' --Activtion/confirmed' element under 'Events 'Activtion'' in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. Select the 'RT fire control' element in the control tree on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'

286 13 'Control' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls 2. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Effects' to the control s follows: Select the 'Output/NO confirmtion' element under 'Outputs' in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FCI2008: Select the output I/O 2 under FCI2008 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. Or When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FDCIO222/224: Select the output 22 under FDCIO222/224 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'

287 'Control' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls 13 Assigning the 'Summenlrm' fire control 1. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Cuses' to the control s follows: Select the ' --All Fire ALARMS' element under 'Events 'Alrm nd Prelrm'' in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. Select one or more sttions which re to ctivte the key sfe dpter on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'

288 13 'Control' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls 2. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Effects' to the control s follows: Select the 'Output/NO confirmtion' element under 'Outputs' in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FCI2008: Select the output I/O 3 under FCI2008 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. Or When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FDCIO222/224: Select the output 21 under FDCIO222/224 in the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. See lso 2 Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone [ 230] 2 Assigning LEDs [ 357]

289 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion 'Opertion' tsk crd The 'Opertion' tsk crd contins the logicl elements for the globl system configurtion nd for configuring the opertion nd indiction units Globl system configurtion The element 'Globl system configurtion' is vilble once per 'Site' nd contins the following elements: 'Globl behviour' 'Globl PIN configurtion' 'Country settings' 'Globl system time' You will find informtion on this in the following chpters

290 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion System behvior The 'Globl behviour' element contins the settings for the system behvior: 'Events': The event ctegories in the system re displyed with the corresponding properties. 'Commnds': The system commnds re displyed with the corresponding ccess levels. Properties for 'Globl behviour' on the 'Overview' tb 'System wide isoltion of ll buzzers enbled' This setting specifies whether the 'Buzzers' of ll 'Sttions' cn be switched off system-wide with commnd. Properties for 'Globl behviour' on the 'Detils' tb 'Type of ddress informtion' This setting specifies which ddress informtion is displyed in messges: Pln no. nd/or element ddress. The setting is depending on the element nd on the vilbility of the pln no. 'BACnet lrm notifiction in section enbled' If this checkbox is checked, BACnet notifiction or 'Section summry' is creted if n lrm occurs within n FS20 section. The BACnet object type of the 'Section summry' is 'Binry Vlue'. The 'Section summry' cn be trnsmitted to subsystems, e.g., to Desigo PX. 'BACnet notifictions of detector lines enbled' If this checkbox is checked, BACnet notifiction is creted if fult or informtion event occurs on n FS20 detector line or on device within the detector line. A 'Line fult summry' or 'Line informtion summry' is creted, the BACnet object type of which is 'Life-Sfety'. 'BACnet priority of Fire/Smoke extrction dmpers, commnding vi control' This setting defines the BACnet priority for fire nd smoke dmpers when the dmpers re controlled utomticlly by dmper controls

291 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion 14 'BACnet priority of Fire/Smoke extrction dmpers, commnding vi Operting terminl' This setting defines the BACnet priority for fire nd smoke dmpers when the dmpers re controlled mnully vi n operting terminl. 'Enbled' This setting specifies whether reminder messge is displyed before the 'Time limited isoltion' of 'Zone' or 'Detector' expires nd the 'Zone' or the 'Detector' is switched bck on gin utomticlly. ' --Expiry reminder of time lim. isol.' This setting specifies when the reminder messge is displyed. If, for exmple, the setting is '00:05', reminder messge is displyed five minutes before the durtion of the isoltion (bypss) expires nd the 'Zone' or the 'Detector' is switched bck on gin utomticlly. This setting pplies for ll 'Zones' nd 'Detectors' within the 'Site'. 'Dnger level ltching in instlltion test mode' This setting specifies whether the dnger levels from detectors re ltched in 'Automtic zone' when the 'Zone' is in 'Instlltion test' mode. A single individul cn use this setting to test 'Zone' with multi-detector dependency. If detector with ltched dnger level reches higher dnger level, then the higher dnger level will be ltched. The ltched dnger levels re deleted in the following cses: The 'Instlltion test' mode is ended. The 'Zone' reches 'PRE-STAGE' or 'MAIN STAGE', respectively, nd the corresponding event messge is cknowledged or reset. In ddition, the dnger levels of the detector must lso return to 0. 'Wlk test ctivtion mode' This setting specifies which lrm devices re ctivted in the 'Wlk test' mode. 'Durtion of sounder ctivtion in wlk test' This setting specifies the length of time for which the lrm devices re ctivted in 'Wlk test' mode. 'Suppress messges 'Chnge recommended'/'chnge required' from FDnet devices' This setting specifies whether the service informtion messges 'Chnge recommended' nd 'Chnge required' should be displyed. See lso 2 Multi-detector dependency with ltching [ 220]

292 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion Globl PIN configurtion The PINs for the ccess levels of 'Site' cn be set either in 'SintesoWorks' or t 'Sttion'. The required pre-setting is specified in 'SintesoWorks'. After firmwre updte, ll PINs re deleted nd must be reset. If the configurtion of the 'Site' is converted nd loded in the 'Sttion', the set PINs remin vlid. Pre-setting for PIN configurtion 1. Select the 'Opertion'' > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'Globl PIN configurtion' tsk crd. 2. Set the 'Overview' on the 'PIN configurtion method' tb. PIN configurtion NOTICE No firmwre updte possible due to no 'Access level 3' At lest one PIN with 'Access level 3' must be configured. w 'Globl PIN configurtion' is configured for the 'PIN configurtion in Engineering tool'. 1. Select 'Mndtory PIN' nd enter the PIN on the 'Overview' tb. 2. Crete the 'Globl PIN configurtion' element for the 'Optionl PIN'. 3. Select 'Optionl PIN' nd enter the PIN on the 'Overview' tb. A mximum of 10 PINs with 'Access level' cn be configured. At lest one PIN must be configured. Ech PIN must be unique Country settings Country-specific settings re defined in the 'Country settings' element

293 'Opertion' tsk crd Globl system configurtion Mster clock The 'Globl system time' element shows which 'Sttion' is the mster clock. When the first 'Sttion' is creted, SintesoWorks ssigns this element to the first 'Sttion' (ddress 1) utomticlly. The link to the 'Sttion' my therefore be deleted or need to be chnged. If this is the cse, then the link must be creted gin. Figure 114: Assign mster clock To ssign the mster clock, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Globl system configurtion' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Globl system time'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. At the right in the window, the 'Hrdwre tree' is displyed. 5. Select the relevnt 'Sttion' nd click on 'Assign'. 'Globl system time' is ssigned to the 'Sttion'

294 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) 14.2 Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) The 'PMI' element contins the configurble elements of the Person Mchine Interfce: Bsic settings 'LEDs' 'Stndrd keys' 'Fvorite keys' Visibility You will find informtion on these elements in the following chpters Bsic settings You will find the bsic settings for the Person Mchine Interfce in the detil editor of the 'PMI' element. 'Overview' tb The following properties cn be set in the 'Overview' tb: 'Logout timeout' This setting specifies the length of time fter which the Person Mchine Interfce of the 'Sttion' utomticlly switches bck to 'Defult ccess level' if no key is pressed. 'Opertion timeout 'ALARM'' This setting specifies the length of time fter which the Person Mchine Interfce of the 'Sttion' utomticlly switches from the menu disply to the messge disply if no key is pressed. This time-out is used if ALARM events re present. 'Opertion timeout 'NO lrm'' This setting specifies the length of time fter which the Person Mchine Interfce of the 'Sttion' utomticlly switches from the menu disply to the messge disply if no key is pressed. This time-out is used if no ALARM events re present. The time outs re only used if the corresponding 'Enbled' checkbox is ctivted. 'Defult ccess level' This setting specifies the stndrd ccess level of the 'Sttion'. If the 'Sttion' hs key switch, then this setting is for the 'off' position

295 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) 14 'Access level 'key switch'' If the 'Sttion' hs key switch, then this setting specifies the ccess level in the 'on' position. 'Detils' tb The following properties cn be set in the 'Detils' tb: 'Reminder buzzer' This setting specifies t which events the 'Buzzer' is rectivted t regulr intervls s reminder tht something needs to be done. Exmple: In the cse of n ALARM event, the 'Buzzer' sounds twice every 15 seconds briefly. 'Defult lrm view' This setting specifies in which view messges re shown on the disply in the cse of n lrm e.g. 'Stndrd messge view' or 'Extended messge view'. You will find informtion on the vrious views in the document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. 'Enbled' This setting specifies whether time-out is used for the disply bcklight. 'Bcklight timeout' This setting specifies fter which time period the disply bcklight is switched off. The bcklight is only switched off when the following occurs: An lrm event hs occurred. No uncknowledged event hs occurred. The 'Buzzer' is not ctive. No key is pressed

296 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) LEDs Functions of the LEDs Signl events nd sttes Help guide the opertor Configuring LEDs Ech LED cn be ssigned to up to twelve cuses. For ech cuse, you cn set the LED properties e.g., 'Priority', 'LED mode', nd 'Colour'. Assigning cuses to LEDs You cn ssign the following types of cuses: Pre-defined cuse: You select n event from pre-defined list. If the event occurs within the visibility of the 'Sttion', the LED is ctivted. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Assigning the pre-defined cuse [ 297]'. Event in specific element within the 'Site': You select n event nd the element, including its subelements, in which the event must occur so tht the LED is ctivted. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Assigning event [ 298]'. When you configure LED, you must chnge the inscription on the LED on the Person Mchine Interfce, if required. You will find editble inscription strips for the Person Mchine Interfce in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

297 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Assigning the hrdwre ID to the LED The figure below shows the ssignment of the hrdwre ID to the corresponding LED on the Person Mchine Interfce. The numbers correspond to the hrdwre ID of the LED ~ ghi pqrs bc jkl tuv def mno wxyz * 0 # C ok Figure 115: Assigning the hrdwre ID to the LED on the Person Mchine Interfce You will find the hrdwre ID in the detil editor of the LED in the 'HW ID LED' field. Figure 116: Detil editor of LED with detils of the hrdwre ID Assigning the pre-defined cuse You cn ssign the pre-defined cuses to ech configurble LED. You cn ssign severl pre-defined cuses to one LED. If you ssign severl cuses, the LED properties must be different from ech other e.g. 'Priority', 'LED mode', or 'Colour'. Assigning n LED with pre-defined cuse 1. Select the 'Opertion'' > 'Sttion' > Element with LEDs > LED tsk crd. 2. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 3. Select 'Pre-defined cuses' t the left in the window nd highlight 'Stndrd' t the right in the window. 4. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Cuse / Undefined' element is creted under the LED. 5. Highlight the 'Cuse / Undefined' element. 6. Set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. 7. If required, chnge the inscription on the LED on the device. You will find editble inscription strips in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'

298 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Setting the properties of the ssigned cuse element on the 'Overview' tb 'Event filter': Event tht ctivtes the cuse nd thus the LED. All events within the configured visibility of the element re evluted. 'Colour': Color of the LED when ctivted. 'LED mode': Lighting mode of the LED when ctivted. 'Priority': Priority of the cuse compred with other cuses which re ssigned to the sme LED. 'Include unrelible events': If the checkbox is checked, the unrelible events will be included in the evlution of the cuse. An unrelible event is n event from nother sttion which lost the connection fter the event occurred Assigning event You cn ssign one or more events within the 'Site' to ech configurble LED. If you ssign severl cuses, the LED properties must be different from ech other, e.g., 'Priority', 'LED mode', or 'Colour'. Assigning n LED to n event 1. Select the 'Opertion'' > 'Sttion' > Element with LEDs > LED tsk crd. 2. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 3. Select n event ctegory on the left in the window. 4. On the right in the window, select tree nd n element. 5. Click on 'Assign'. The event is ssigned to the LED. 6. Highlight the ssigned event nd set the properties you wnt in the detil editor. Setting the properties of the ssigned event 'Colour': Color of the LED when ctivted. 'LED mode': Lighting mode of the LED when ctivted. 'Priority': Priority of the cuse compred with other cuses which re ssigned to the sme LED. 'Include unrelible events': If the checkbox is checked, the unrelible events will be included in the evlution of the cuse. An unrelible event is n event from nother sttion which lost the connection fter the event occurred

299 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Stndrd keys Figure 117: 'Stndrd keys' element in the tree view Ech stndrd key cn be ssigned function or toggle function. With tht you cn quickly crry out often used ctions nd commnds. You cn configure the following types of functions: 'Dilog': The key is ssigned to specific view on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce. Pressing on the key shows the view on the disply e.g. 'Dilog 'Config viewer, Topology'' > 'Detection tree'. 'Action': The key is ssigned to pre-defined ction. Pressing on the key executes the ction e.g. 'All sounders OFF'. Commnds: Commnd for specific element: The key is ssigned to commnd nd n element within the 'Site'. Pressing on the key executes the commnd for this element, e.g., 'Detector test' for prticulr 'Mnul zone'. Commnd for the 'Zone' element ctegory: The key is ssigned to commnd nd the 'Zone' element ctegory. Pressing on the key shows the window for entering the ddress for the 'Zone'. After entering the ddress, the commnd for the corresponding element is executed. When you configure stndrd key, you my hve to chnge the inscription on the stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce. You will find editble inscription strips for the Person Mchine Interfce in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. You will find informtion on configurtion of stndrd keys in chpter 'Configuring stndrd keys nd fvorites [ 303]'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

300 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Fvorites Figure 118: 'Fvorite keys' element in the tree view There re mximum of eight fvorites of which three re preconfigured. Ech fvorite cn be ssigned function. With tht you cn quickly crry out often used ctions nd commnds. The fvorites re represented in the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce. The first three fvorites re ssigned to the three softkeys in the min menu. All fvorites re listed in the 'Fvorites' menu. To execute fvorite function, you must press the corresponding key on the keypd. You will find informtion on the keys in the Person Mchine Interfce in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. You cn configure the following types of functions: 'Function': The fvorite is ssigned to function from the 'Functions' menu of the 'Sttion'. Pressing on the key shows the corresponding window for entering the element ctegory or the ddress on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce. 'Dilog': The fvorite is ssigned to specific view on the disply. Pressing on the key shows the view on the disply e.g. 'Dilog 'Config viewer, Topology'' > 'Detection tree'. 'Action': The fvorite is ssigned to pre-defined ction. Pressing on the key executes the ction e.g. 'All sounders OFF'. Commnds: Commnd for specific element: The fvorite is ssigned to commnd nd n element within the 'Site'. Pressing on the key executes the commnd for this element e.g. 'Detector test' > 'Mnul zone'. Commnd for the element ctegory: The fvorite is ssigned to commnd nd n element ctegory e.g. 'Zone' or 'Section'. Pressing on the key shows the window for entering the ddress for the element ctegory on the disply. After entering the ddress, the commnd for the corresponding element is executed

301 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) 14 Configurble fvorites for FT2080 You cn exclusively configure the following fvorites for the fire terminl (Touch): - 'Action' > 'All sounders OFF' - 'Action' > 'All sounders ON' - 'Dilog 'Messge viewer, Messge summry'' > 'Reset selection' - 'Dilog 'Config viewer, Topology'' - 'Dilog 'Admin viewer, Add user'' - 'Dilog 'Admin viewer, Delete user'' - 'Dilog 'Admin viewer, LED test'' > 'LED test' You will find informtion on configurtion of fvorites in chpter 'Configuring stndrd keys nd fvorites [ 303]' Creting fvorites Three fvorites re preconfigured. 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' > 'PMI' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Fvorite keys'. 4. Open the 'New element' window. 5. Enter the number of fvorites required in the 'Amount:' field. 6. Click on 'Add'. The 'Fvorite' element is creted

302 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Text for fvorites For 'Function' nd 'Action', there re pre-defined texts, which re shown on the Person Mchine Interfce disply, e.g., 'Action' 'All sounders OFF'. The pre-defined text is only displyed if the 'Customer text' field for the 'Fvorite' element is empty. When you enter customer text for the 'Fvorite' element, this text is displyed on the Person Mchine Interfce insted of the pre-defined text. If there re no predefined texts vilble, you must provide customer text. Customer text for fvorites If the customer text is used for softkey, you cn enter mximum of 13 chrcters per line. If you wnt to enter more text, you cn use two lines. To insert line brek, enter the following text: $(BR) Exmple of customer text covering two lines: Figure 119: Exmple of customer text covering two lines Defining the position of the fvorites The position specifies t which plce the fvorite is displyed in the 'Fvorites' menu. The positions re from top left to bottom right. The fvorites with positions '1' to '3' re ssigned to the three softkeys in the min menu. To crete further fvorite, it hs the position '0' by defult. You must set the position to t lest '1'. Figure 120: Detil editor of the fvorite with detils of the position To define the position of the fvorite, proceed s follows: 1. Highlight the 'Fvorite' element in the tree view. 2. Select the 'Overview' tb in the detil editor. 3. In the 'Position' field enter the position of the fvorite. The fvorites re correspondingly rrnged

303 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Configuring stndrd keys nd fvorites Assigning the hrdwre ID to the stndrd key The figure below shows the ssignment of the hrdwre ID to the corresponding stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce. The numbers correspond to the hrdwre ID of the stndrd key. ~ ghi pqrs bc jkl tuv def mno wxyz * 0 # 9 C ok Figure 121: Assigning the hrdwre ID to the stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce You will find the hrdwre ID in the detil editor of the stndrd key in the 'HW ID KEY' field. Figure 122: Detil editor of stndrd key with detils of the hrdwre ID Fvorites hve no hrdwre ID

304 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Assigning stndrd keys nd fvorites To ssign function to stndrd key or fvorite, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'Sttion' > 'PMI' > 'Stndrd keys' or 'Fvorite keys'. 3. Highlight 'Key' element or 'Fvorite'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 5. Select type of function on the left in the window: 'Function', 'Dilog', 'Action', or commnd. Depending on the selected type of function, the selection on the right in the window is dpted. The selection options re described below. 6. On the right in the window, select the desired element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The stndrd key or the fvorite is ssigned to the function. 8. If required, chnge the inscription on the stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce. You will find editble inscription strips in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Assigning to 'Function' If you select 'Function' on the left in the window, you cn select 'Stndrd' on the right in the window. You cn set the properties of the function in the detil editor of the ssigned function. Figure 123: Assigning fvorite to function 'Function' cnnot be ssigned to stndrd key, but must be ssigned to fvorite

305 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) 14 Assigning to 'Dilog' If you select 'Dilog' on the left in the window, you cn select 'Stndrd' on the right in the window. You cn set the properties of the view in the detil editor of the ssigned 'Dilog'. Figure 124: Assigning stndrd key or fvorite to n 'Dilog' function Assigning to 'Action' If you select 'Action' on the left in the window, you cn select pre-defined ction on the right in the window. Figure 125: Assigning stndrd key or fvorite to n 'Action' function

306 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Assigning to commnd for specific element If you select commnd on the left in the window, you cn select tree nd the element on the right in the window for which the commnd is to be executed. Figure 126: Assigning stndrd key or fvorite to commnd nd n element Assigning to commnd for 'Zone' If you select 'Commnd/element ctegory' on the left in the window, you cn select commnd from the list on the right in the window. The commnd cn be pplied for 'Zones'. Figure 127: Assigning stndrd key or fvorite to commnd nd n element ctegory You cn lso ssign the 'Function', 'Dilog', 'Action', nd 'Commnd/element ctegory' functions vi the 'New element' window

307 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Properties of the ssigned functions In the detil editor of the functions which re ssigned to the stndrd keys nd the fvorites, you cn set different properties depending upon the ssigned functions. The settings re described in the following sections. 'Access level' This setting specifies the ccess level which is required for executing the functions. You cn set this property for ech function. Assigning to 'Function' If the fvorite is ssigned to 'Function', you cn set the following properties in the detil editor of the function: Figure 128: Properties in the detil editor of the function 'Function': This setting specifies which function from the 'Functions' menu should be executed. Assigning to 'Dilog' If the stndrd key or the fvorite is ssigned to 'Dilog', function, you cn set the following properties in the detil editor of the function: Figure 129: Properties in the detil editor of the 'Dilog' function 'Dilog nme': View tht should be shown on the disply of the Person Mchine Interfce. 'Dilog rgument': Additionl setting for the view. The selection is dependent on the setting in the 'Dilog nme' field. Assigning to commnd for specific element If the stndrd key or the fvorite is ssigned to commnd function for specific element, you cn set the following properties in the detil editor of the function: Figure 130: Properties in the detil editor of the commnd function 'Commnd prmeter': The ssigned commnd is specified in more detil with this setting. If you hve e.g. ssigned the 'Set PS' commnd s function, you must set the desired 'Prmeter set'. The 'Commnd prmeter' property is only displyed in the detil editor if commnd ws ssigned, which requires more detiled specifiction. 'Enbled' nd 'Reverse commnd': These settings re used when you configure stndrd key with toggle function. Link [ 308]

308 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Assigning to commnd for n element ctegory If the stndrd key or the fvorite is ssigned to commnd function for n element ctegory, you cn set the following properties in the detil editor of the function: Figure 131: Properties in the detil editor of the commnd function 'Access level': Defines the ccess level for the commnd Toggle function You cn ssign commnd nd the ssocited reverse commnd to stndrd key, e.g., switch off / switch on nd ctivte / dectivte. Pressing on the key executes either the commnd or the reverse commnd. Which commnd is performed when key is pressed depends on the current condition of the LED which is ssigned to the stndrd key: LED inctive: The commnd is executed by pressing key gin. LED ctive: The reverse commnd is executed by pressing key gin. This mens the LED must be configured such tht it is ctive when the commnd hs been crried out. Exmple: The stndrd key is ssigned to 'Automtic zone' 2. Commnd = 'Detector test' Reverse commnd = 'Detector test END' The LED is ctive if 'Automtic zone' 2 is in the 'Detector test' sttus. When the ssigned 'Zone' is switched off, you cnnot execute ny commnds for this zone using the toggle function of the stndrd key. To configure stndrd key to the toggle function, you must first configure the stndrd key nd then the LED. You will find informtion on this in the following chpters. You will find informtion on how to ssign the hrdwre IDs to the respective LED nd stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce in the following chpters: 'Assigning the hrdwre ID to the LED [ 297]' 'Assigning the hrdwre ID to the stndrd key [ 303]' A toggle function cnnot be configured for fvorites. When you configure stndrd key for toggle function, you my hve to chnge the inscription on the stndrd key nd the LED on the Person Mchine Interfce. You will find editble inscription strips for the Person Mchine Interfce in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

309 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Configuring stndrd key for the toggle function Configuring the commnd Figure 132: Assigning stndrd key to commnd nd n element 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'PMI' > 'Stndrd keys' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Key' element. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 5. Select commnd on the left in the window e.g. 'Detector test'. 6. On the right in the window, select n element, e.g., 'Zone' from the 'Detection tree'. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Key' is ssigned to the commnd nd the element. The commnd is displyed under the 'Key' in the tree view

310 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Configuring reverse commnd Figure 133: Configuring reverse commnd 1. Highlight the ssigned commnd in the tree view. 2. Select the 'Overview' tb in the detil editor. 3. Check the 'Enbled' checkbox. 4. In the 'Reverse commnd' field, select the reverse commnd, e.g., 'Detector test END'. The reverse commnd is configured. When you ssign commnd which requires more detiled specifiction, you must set the 'Reverse commnd prmeter' property dditionlly in the detil editor. If you hve ssigned the 'OFF/timer' commnd, for exmple, you must set the desired time. Figure 134: Configuring reverse commnd

311 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) 14 Assigning the stndrd key to the LED Figure 135: Assigning the stndrd key to the LED 1. Highlight the configured stndrd key in the tree view. 2. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New effect dilog' window opens. 3. Select 'Relted LED' t the left in the window. At the right in the window, the 'Opertion tree' is displyed. 4. Select the pproprite LED for the stndrd key. 5. Click on 'Assign'. The stndrd key is ssigned to the LED

312 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Person Mchine Interfce (PMI) Configuring LED for the toggle function Figure 136: Assigning LED to n event 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'PMI' > 'LEDs' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the pproprite LED for the stndrd key. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'New cuse dilog' window opens. 5. Select n event ctegory on the left in the window e.g. 'Detector test mode'. 6. On the right in the window, select the sme element from the 'Detection tree' tht you hve ssigned to the stndrd key. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The LED is ssigned to the 'Zone'. 8. Highlight the ssigned cuse element nd set the LED properties in the detil editor. The LED properties re described in chpter 'Assigning event [ 298]'. 9. If required, chnge the inscription on the LED nd the stndrd key on the Person Mchine Interfce. You will find editble inscription strips in the 'Inscription strips' document. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

313 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Visibility The visibility defines which prts of 'Site' cn be viewed nd/or operted on 'Sttion'. You cn configure the visibility s follows: 'Site': Visibility for the entire 'Site' 'Site without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the 'Site' 'Sttion': Visibility for 'Sttion' within the 'Site' with ll 'Ares' in this 'Sttion', incl. 'Hrdwre tree' 'Sttion without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the 'Sttion' 'Are': Visibility for n 'Are' within 'Sttion' Additionlly, you cn define which event ctegories re visible for ech ssigned element. Types of visibility Stndrd visibility: The norml visibility if no dditionl conditions re met. Stndby visibility: This visibility is ctivted when monitored 'Sttion' fils. Expnded visibility: This visibility cn be ctivted mnully t the Person Mchine Interfce. You will find informtion on this in the following chpters. You will find more informtion bout the visibility in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

314 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Properties of the visibility Figure 137: Properties in the detil editor of the visibility 'Mx. ccess level' In this field you cn define the mximum ccess level tht is possible on the 'Sttion' when this visibility is ctive. If severl visibilities re ctive simultneously, e.g. the stndrd visibility nd the expnded visibility, the mximum vlue tht is set in the 'Mx. ccess level' field is vlid. 'Visible secondry events' This setting specifies from which normlly not visible elements, the ctivtion messges re displyed if they re ctivted by n element in the visible prt. You cn define the visible event ctegories in the detil editor of the elements ssigned to the visibility in the 'Overview' tb. Figure 138: Properties in the detil editor of the element ssigned to the visibility 'ALL event ctegories visible' If this checkbox is ctivted, ll the event ctegories re visible. 'Visible event ctegories' If only specific event ctegory is to be visible e.g. 'ALARMS' nd 'Fults', you cn define the event ctegory here. The setting is only possible if the 'ALL event ctegories visible' checkbox is dectivted

315 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Stndrd visibility The stndrd visibility defines which events in which elements cn be viewed nd / or operted on the 'Sttion' in norml opertion. You cn configure the visibility s follows: 'Site': Visibility for the entire 'Site' 'Site without res': Visibility for ll 'Site' events, but not for the detection tree 'Sttion': Visibility for 'Sttion' within the 'Site' with ll 'Ares' in this 'Sttion', incl. 'Hrdwre tree' 'Sttion without res': Visibility for ll 'Sttion' events, but not for the detection tree 'Are': Visibility for n 'Are' within 'Sttion' Additionlly, you cn define which event ctegories re visible for ech ssigned element. When creting 'Sttion', the 'Stndrd visibility' element is pre-configured with visibility of its own 'Sttion'. You cn dd dditionl elements to the preconfigured visibility or delete it nd replce it with different visibility. Configuring stndrd visibility Figure 139: Configuring stndrd visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' > 'PMI' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Stndrd visibility'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select the visibility you wnt on the left in the window. 6. On the right in the window, select the corresponding element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Stndrd visibility'

316 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Stndby visibility A 'Sttion' with stndby visibility monitors one or more 'Sttions' or mngement sttions. If monitored 'Sttion' or mngement sttion fils, the stndby visibility becomes ctive. This provides you with visibility of the 'Sttion' with stndby visibility for the filed 'Sttion' or mngement sttion. The stndby visibility hs to be dectivted vi the Person Mchine Interfce of the 'Sttion'. You will find more informtion in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. There re two different stndby visibilities: 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl': For monitoring FS20 'Sttions'. 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion': For monitoring mngement sttion. Creting stndby visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' nd highlight the 'PMI' element. 3. Open the 'New element' window. 4. In the 'Type:' field select 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl' or 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion'. 5. Click on 'Add'. The stndby visibility is creted. You cn lso crete the stndby visibility using the 'Assign' function

317 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility 14 Configuring 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl' During configurtion, you must define which 'Sttion' is monitored nd which visibility the monitored 'Sttion' hs. w The element 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl' is creted. 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'PMI' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. On the left in the window, from the 'Visibility' list, select the visibility of the monitored 'Sttion'. 6. On the right in the window, select the corresponding element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned to the stndby visibility. 8. On the left in the window, from the 'PMI supervision for stndby visibility' list, select the 'Visibility ctivtion upon filure of Operting terminl..' entry. 9. On the right in the window, select the 'Sttion' which is to be monitored. 10. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Sttion' is ssigned to 'Stndby visibility for Operting terminl'

318 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Configuring 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion' w w The element 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion' is creted. The 'Sttion' is configured with 'BACnet client supervision'. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Globl BACnet configurtion [ 380]'. 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'PMI' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. On the left in the window, from the 'Visibility' list, select the visibility of the monitored mngement sttion. 6. On the right in the window, select the corresponding element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned to the stndby visibility. 8. On the left in the window, from the 'PMI supervision for stndby visibility' list, select the 'Visibility ctivtion upon filure of Mngement sttion..' entry. 9. On the right in the tree, select 'BACnet client supervision'. 10. Click on 'Assign'. 'BACnet client supervision' is ssigned to 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion'. See lso 2 Globl BACnet configurtion [ 380]

319 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Expnded visibility Expnded visibility enbles incresed visibility compred ginst stndrd visibility. The expnded visibility is used so tht e.g. the commissioning or mintennce personnel cn temporrily ccess other prts of the system. If, for exmple, 'Sttion' in the stndrd visibility only hs visibility for one 'Are', the expnded visibility cn be configured in such wy tht the entire 'Sttion' becomes visible on ctivtion. The expnded visibility cn be configured such tht it cn only be ctivted with the filure of monitored 'Sttion'. The expnded visibility hs to be ctivted nd dectivted by commnd on the Person Mchine Interfce. The expnded visibility is used in [AT] to give the 'Sttions' visibility of the rest of the system in the event of system collpse due to severl network errors, in ccordnce with TRVB S 123. Creting expnded visibility Figure 140: Creting expnded visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' nd highlight the 'PMI' element. 3. Open the 'New element' window. 4. Select 'Expnded visibility' in the 'Type:' field. 5. Click on 'Add'. The 'Expnded visibility' element is creted. You cn lso crete the stndby visibility using the 'Assign' function. Configuring expnded visibility Figure 141: Configuring expnded visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open the 'Sttion' > 'PMI' in the tree view. 3. Highlight the element 'Expnded visibility'. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. On the left in the window, from the 'Visibility' list, select the expnded visibility. 6. On the right in the window, select the corresponding element. The element is ssigned with 'Expnded visibility'

320 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Configuring expnded visibility with monitoring If you configure the expnded visibility such tht it cn only be ctivted in the event of filure of monitored 'Sttion' then you must ssign the 'Sttion' to be monitored dditionlly. Figure 142: Assigning expnded visibility nd monitored 'Sttion' w The expnded visibility is creted nd configured ccording to the bove mentioned steps. 1. Highlight the 'Expnded visibility' element in the tree view. 2. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 3. On the left in the window, from the 'PMI supervision for expnded visibility' list, select the 'Visibility ctivtion by commnd upon filure of Operting terminl..' entry. 4. On the right in the window, select the 'Sttion' which is to be monitored. 5. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Sttion' is ssigned to 'Expnded visibility' Configuring visibility on FC2080 Becuse of the fct tht the FC2080 fire control pnel hs no integrted operting unit, you must configure t lest one operting unit within the 'Site' in such wy tht it hs visibility of the FC2080. Figure 143: Configuring visibility on FC2080 w w The 'FC2080' element is present in the structure tree. The 'Sttions' tht re to hve visibility of the FC2080 re present in the structure tree. 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the 'Sttion' tht is to hve visibility of the FC Open the 'PMI' window nd highlight the 'Stndrd visibility' element. 4. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 5. Select the desired visibility on the left in the window. 6. On the right in the window, select the 'FC2080' element. 7. Click on 'Assign'. The visibility on the FC2080 is configured

321 'Opertion' tsk crd Visibility Configuring visibility for Sinteso Mobile To configure 'Visibility' for smrtphones in FXS2002, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Sinteso Mobile' element for the 'Sttion'. 3. Open 'Sinteso Mobile' in the tree view. 4. Select 'Stndrd visibility'. 5. Select 'Assign'. 6. In the 'Assign' window, select the 'Sttion' on which you wnt to set 'Visibility' for smrtphones nd confirm your choice by clicking 'Assign'. 7. Go to the tree view nd select the ssigned 'Sttion'. Then select the 'Overview' tb. 8. Activte the 'ALL event ctegories visible' option. 'Visibility' for smrtphones hs now been specified. All 'Event ctegories of the 'Sttion' re visible for smrtphones. Figure 144: Configuring visibility

322 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT2011 Floor repeter terminl (FRT) The following cn be configured for the floor repeter terminl: Visibility Cuses for the ctivtion of the LEDs Six keys Floor repeter disply (FRD) The following cn be configured for the floor repeter disply: Visibility Cuses for the ctivtion of LED FT2010/FT2011 core nd configurtion groups In order to configure the floor repeter terminl (FRT) or floor repeter disply (FRD), n 'Opertion' element is creted in the 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)' tsk crd for ech FDnet where floor repeter terminls or displys re connected to the FRT/FRD core detector line. 'FRT configurtion group' elements cn be creted for the floor repeter terminls nd 'FRD configurtion group' for the floor repeter displys. Ech of these elements cn be ssigned to up to eight 'FRT' (FT2010) or 'FRD' (FT2011). It is currently lso possible to ssign 'FRT' or 'FRD' which re connected to nother FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001). Only ssign chnnels tht re connected to the FRT/FRD core ssigned to the 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)'

323 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Configurtion fter reding in the hrdwre Creting 'FRT/FRD core' elements nd ssigning them to the FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001) 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'FRT/FRD core' is highlighted nd in Hrdwre tree the element 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)' is highlighted. 4. Click on 'Assign'. 'FRT/FRD core' is creted nd ssigned to the FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001). Creting 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' elements Crete the 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' element for 'FRT/FRD core'. Link [ 77]

324 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT2011 Assigning configurtion groups to the chnnel of the FT2010 or FT2011 device 1. Highlight 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' in the tree view. 2. Select 'Assign'. In the 'Assign dilog' window, 'FRT' or 'FRD' is highlighted nd the Hrdwre tree is displyed. The 'FRT' or 'FRD' element of the 'FT2010' or 'FT2011' device is highlighted. 3. Select the element nd click on 'Assign'. The configurtion group is ssigned to the chnnel of the FT2010 or FT2011 device Pre-configuring the 'FT2010/FT2011 core' element Creting 'FRT/FRD core' elements 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'FRT/FRD core' element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] Creting 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' elements Crete the 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' element for 'FRT/FRD core'. Link [ 77] Creting 'FRT' or 'FRD' elements Crete the 'FRT' or 'FRD' element for 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group'. Link [ 77] In lter step, once the hrdwre hs been red in nd is loded in the SintesoWorks, the elements still hve to be ssigned to the hrdwre vi the Assign function: 'FRT/FRD core' with 'FDnet line crd (onbord/fcl2001)' 'FRT configurtion group' with 'FRT chnnel' or 'FRD configurtion group' with 'FRD chnnel'

325 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Setting views in the Person Mchine Interfce disply Figure 145: Detil editor of configurtion group In the detil editor of the configurtion group, users cn select between the norml 2-line view or the extended 4-line view. Checkbox unchecked Checkbox checked Norml 2-line view Extended 4-line view Tble 17: 'Disply Extended messge view' in detil editor

326 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Visibility Disply The 'Visibility' element cn be used to determine which events cn be shown in the disply for the floor repeter terminl (FRT) nd floor repeter disply (FRD). The following selection is vilble: 'Site': Visibility for the entire 'Site' 'Site without res': Visibility for ll events from the Hrdwre tree of the 'Site' 'Sttion': Visibility for 'Sttion' within the 'Site', with ll res in this 'Sttion' 'Sttion without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the 'Sttion' 'Are': Visibility for one 'Are' within control pnel 'Section': Visibility for one 'Section' within control pnel 'Zone': Visibility for one 'Zone' within control pnel This cn be restricted further, so tht for exmple only the lrm nd fult event ctegories re displyed insted of ll events of n re. Assigning 'Visibility' 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Sttion' > 'FRT/FRD core' > 'FRT configurtion group' or 'FRD configurtion group' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Visibility'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The event ctegories of 'Visibility' re displyed. 5. Select the event ctegory nd the corresponding 'Sttion', 'Are', 'Section', or 'Zone' element, nd click on 'Assign'. 'Visibility' is ssigned to the element. Selecting element ctegories One or more event ctegories cn be selected in the detil editor of the ssigned elements. Figure 146: 'Section' detil editor for selecting specific event ctegories

327 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT LEDs The LEDs on the Person Mchine Interfce signl events nd conditions. In ddition, the LEDs support the opertor's orienttion. Figure 147: 'Progrmmble LED', 'Cuse' detil editor The following LEDs properties cn be configured: Criterion tht should ctivte the LED Color of the LED LED mode when LED is ctivted The visibility must be configured on the corresponding ctegory so tht the LED becomes ctive Function keys Frequently used commnds cn be ssigned to the function keys, e.g.: Activte/Dectivte, Test, Configurtion ('Set PS MANNED', 'Switch to UNMANNED', etc.). Assigning function to the function keys 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'Sttion' > 'FRT/FRD core' > in the exmple 'FRT configurtion group' > 'FRT' > 'Function keys'. 3. Highlight the corresponding 'Function key'. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 1. In the window, select 'Commnds 'Configurtion'', for exmple, followed by function. The Detection tree is now shown. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 2. Highlight e.g. 'Are', nd click on 'Assign'. 'Function key' is ssigned to 'Are'. Assigning commnds Commnds re ssigned in the sme wy s with stndrd keys. You will find more informtion on this in chpter 'Configuring stndrd keys nd fvorites [ 303]'. The visibility must be configured on the corresponding ctegory so tht the function key becomes ctive

328 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Assigning the configurble keys nd LEDs Assigning the key ID to the key The figure below shows the ssignment of the key ID to the corresponding configurble key on the Person Mchine Interfce of the floor repeter terminl. The numbers correspond to the key ID Figure 148: Assigning the key ID to the key on the Person Mchine Interfce of the floor repeter terminl You will find the key ID in the detil editor of the key in the 'Key ID' field. Figure 149: Detil editor of key with detils of the key ID

329 'Opertion' tsk crd Floor repeter terminl FT2010 nd floor repeter disply FT Assigning the LED ID to the LED The figures below show the ssignment of the LED ID to the corresponding configurble LED on the Person Mchine Interfce of the floor repeter terminl nd floor repeter disply. The numbers correspond to the LED ID Figure 150: Assigning the LED ID to the LED on the Person Mchine Interfce of the floor repeter terminl 1 Figure 151: Assigning the LED ID to the LED on the Person Mchine Interfce of the floor repeter disply You will find the LED ID in the detil editor of the LED in the 'LED ID' field. Figure 152: Detil editor of LED with detils of the LED ID

330 14 'Opertion' tsk crd LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT2001 You will find detils on the technicl term 'FDnet' in the chpter 'Glossry'. The following devices cn be used s mimic disply: LED indictor FTO2002: For instlltion in the control pnel. This contins 24 LED groups with one red nd one yellow LED ech. Mimic disply driver FT2001: It controls up to 48 LEDs tht re instlled on ground pln pnel. Communiction is vi the FDnet. The mimic disply driver hs the following inputs nd outputs: Two control outputs for locl buzzer nd LED 'SystemOn' Two inputs for 'Silence buzzer' nd 'START LED test' There re two elements for creting the mimic disply in the 'Opertion' tsk crd: 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' With the 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' element, the visibility of ech LED group (red/yellow) cn be configured for 'Section' or 'Zone'. 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' Ech LED cn ssign ny event to the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' element. Both elements must be creted. Pre-configurtion To crete the mimic disply, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Sttion' element, for exmple, for the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs'. Link [ 77] In lter step once the hrdwre hs been red in nd is loded in SintesoWorks, the hrdwre must still be ssigned vi the Assign function

331 'Opertion' tsk crd LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT When the hrdwre hs lredy been red in To crete nd ssign the mimic disply, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 4. Highlight 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs', for exmple. 5. In the hrdwre tree, select the corresponding 'LEDs' (LED indictor FTO2002) or 'LEDs/outputs' (FT2001) element. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The mimic disply is creted nd ssigned to the hrdwre Element 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' Assigning events Figure 153: Window 'Assign dilog' for ssigning 'Visibility' of the element 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' to n event To ssign the 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' element to n event, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Visibility' element. 4. 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' is highlighted t the left of the window. 5. In the 'Detection tree', select the 'Section' or the 'Zone'

332 14 'Opertion' tsk crd LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT Click on 'Assign'. The 'Visibility' element of 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups' is ssigned to the section or zone. 7. Repet these steps for ech 'Visibility' element (ech 'Visibility' element corresponds to one of the 24 LED groups, from top to bottom). Setting properties Figure 154: Detil editor 'LED ind./mimic 24 LED groups', 'Overview' 'LED mode': Defines which sttes of the reference elements re indicted by the LED of n LED group. Alrm nd fult: Red LED: Alrm (ctivtion in Fire/Evc controls) -> LED permnently on. Yellow LED: Fult -> LED intermittent Alrm, fult nd off: Red LED: Alrm (ctivtion in Fire/Evc controls) -> LED permnently on. Yellow LED: Fult -> LED intermittent, Off -> LED permnently on. The criterion is met when t lest one event of the corresponding event ctegory occurs in the referenced element or in its subtree. 'Supply supervision enbled': Defines whether locl supply is present which is to be monitored

333 'Opertion' tsk crd LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT Element 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' Assigning events Figure 155: 'New cuse dilog' window for ssigning 'Visibility' of the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' to n event To ssign the 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' element to n event, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Open 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' in the tree view. 3. Highlight 'Visibility' element. 4. In the 'Assign dilog' window, highlight n event ctegory, e.g., 'All technicl messges'. 5. Select n element from the tree you wnt, e.g., 'Technicl zone' from the Detection tree. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Visibility' element of 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' is ssigned to the event ctegory. 7. Repet these steps for ech 'Visibility' element (ech 'Visibility' element corresponds to one of the 48 LEDs, from top to bottom)

334 14 'Opertion' tsk crd LED indictor FTO2002 nd mimic disply driver FT2001 Setting properties Figure 156: 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs', 'Overview' detil editor 'Supply supervision enbled': Defines whether locl supply is present which is to be monitored. Figure 157: 'Visibility', 'Overview' detil editor In the detil editor of the 'Visibility' element, the following properties cn be set: 'LED mode': Defines the mode of the LED in ctive or inctive sttus, respectively. 'Threshold': Defines how mny events from the defined event ctegory need to be ctive t the sme time in the ssigned element or its subtree for the cuse to be considered ctive by the control. 'ACTIVE if no communiction to source': Defines the cuse's defult sttus (ctive or quiet) should communiction be interrupted to the sttion where the referenced element is stored

335 'Opertion' tsk crd Event printer Configuring mimic disply driver FT2001 Figure 158: 'LEDs/outputs' detil editor In the detil editor the following properties cn be set: 'Suppress LED test, connector 1', 'Suppress LED test, connector 2' Blocks the triggering of n LED test of the outputs on connection 1 or 2 vi the locl input. 'Output mode, connector 1', 'Output mode, connector 2' Active mode of outputs connected to connection 1 or 2: 'LEDs, bright mode' 'LEDs, dimmed mode' 'Relys' See lso 2 Element 'LED ind./mimic 48 LEDs' [ 333] 14.6 Event printer The event printer logs ll site events from its configured visibility. An internl or externl event printer is connected to 'Sttion' vi the RS232 nd RS845 interfces. These interfces re red in when the Sttion is powered up. You will find description of the commissioning of the externl Fujitsu DL3750+ printer in document A6V See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Depending on the printer used, the following elements must be creted in the 'Opertion' tsk crd nd ssigned to the hrdwre: 'Built-in printer' 'Externl printer' Pre-configuring element printer To crete the 'Built-in printer'/'externl printer' element, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd, long with the interfce to which the printer is connected. 2. Crete the 'Sttion' or 'Built-in printer' element for the 'Externl printer'. Link [ 77] Once the hrdwre hs been red in nd is loded to SintesoWorks, the element hs to be ssigned to the hrdwre using the Assign function

336 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Event printer Hrdwre is lredy red in Figure 159: 'Assign dilog' window for creting nd ssigning the 'Built-in printer' or 'Externl printer' element To crete the 'Built-in printer'/'externl printer' element nd ssign it to the hrdwre, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, highlight the 'Sttion' with the interfce to which the printer is connected. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 4. In the 'Assign dilog' window, select 'Built-in printer'/'externl printer'. In the Hrdwre tree, the 'RS232 module (FCA2001)'/'Ethernet interfce' element is highlighted under 'RS232 printer'/'ethernet printer'. 5. Highlight the element nd click on 'Assign'. The element is creted nd ssigned to the hrdwre

337 'Opertion' tsk crd Event printer 14 Visibility configurtion The visibility tht the event printer logs is defined in the 'Visibility' element. The following selection is vilble: 'Site': Visibility for the entire site. 'Site without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the site. 'Sttion': Visibility for one 'Sttion' within the site, with ll res in this 'Sttion' 'Sttion without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the 'Sttion'. 'Are': Visibility on n re within control pnel Figure 160: 'Assign dilog' window for ssigning the visibility To configure the visibility, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'Built-in printer'/'externl printer' nd highlight 'Visibility'. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Visibility' list nd the 'Hrdwre tree' or detection tree re displyed. 4. Select the site, sttion, or re nd click on 'Assign' (you cn ssign the visibility to severl elements). 'Visibility' is ssigned to the corresponding element

338 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] 14.7 Fire brigde periphery [DE] The fire brigde periphery comprises the following devices: FBF: Fire brigde operting pnel FSD: Fire brigde key depot FAT: Fire brigde indiction pnel FAT with FBF: Fire brigde indiction pnel with fire brigde operting pnel FSE: Relesing element link [ 215] The devices re connected s follows: FSD is ssigned to the fire brigde periphery module FCI2001. FBF cn either be connected vi the fire brigde periphery module FCI2001 or n RS485 interfce. FAT nd FAT with FBF re connected to the 'Sttion' vi n RS485 seril interfce. To configure the devices, the logicl element must be creted in the 'Opertion' tsk crd nd ssigned to the corresponding hrdwre element. Pre-configurtion To crete the logicl element, proceed s follows: 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the FBF, FSD, FAT, or FAT with FBF element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] 3. Enter the customer text(s). In lter step, once the hrdwre hs been red in nd is loded in the SintesoWorks, the element still hs to be ssigned to the hrdwre vi the Assign function

339 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] 14 When the hrdwre hs lredy been red in Figure 161: 'Assign dilog' window for creting nd ssigning the logicl element To crete the device logicl element nd ssign it to the fire brigde periphery module, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 4. Select the corresponding element (FBF, FSD, FAT, FAT with FBF) in the list. The 'Hrdwre tree' is shown. 5. Highlight the relevnt element in 'Fire brig. periphery interf. (FCI2001)'. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The element is creted nd ssigned to the hrdwre

340 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] Connecting with RS485 Figure 162: 'Assign dilog' window for creting nd ssigning to the RS485 interfce To crete the logicl FBF or FAT element nd to ssign it to the RS485 module (FCA2002) element, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion' in the tree view. 3. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 4. Select the corresponding element (FBF or FBF) in the list. The 'Hrdwre tree' is shown. 5. Highlight 'UFP' element in 'RS485 module (FCA2002)'. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The element is creted nd ssigned to the RS485 module (FCA2002). Configuring visibility The following visibilities cn be configured: Fire brigde operting pnel FBF: Visibility on the remote trnsmission control FIRE Visibility on the extinguishing controls Visibility: 'Site': Visibility for the entire site. 'Are': Visibility for one re within control pnel. 'Sttion': Visibility for one 'Sttion' within the site, with ll res in this 'Sttion'. Fire brigde key depot FSD: Visibility on the remote trnsmission control FIRE

341 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] 14 Fire brigde indiction pnel FAT: Visibility: 'Site': Visibility for the entire site. 'Site without res': Visibility for ll events from the Hrdwre tree of the site. 'Sttion': Visibility for one 'Sttion' within the site, with ll res in this 'Sttion'. 'Sttion without res': Visibility for ll events from the 'Hrdwre tree' of the 'Sttion'. 'Are': Visibility on n re within control pnel Fire brigde indiction pnel FAT with fire brigde operting pnel FBF: Sme visibilities s FAT nd/or FBF The visibilities for 'Site', 'Are', nd 'Sttion' cn be restricted further so tht, for exmple, only the lrm nd fult event ctegories re displyed insted of ll events for n re. Figure 163: Configuring visibility of logicl elements To configure the visibility, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the element to be configured, e.g. 'FBF'. 3. Highlight the control 'Visible Extinguishing zones,' for exmple. 4. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Visible Extinguishing zones' is highlighted. 5. Select the corresponding element in the control tree nd click on 'Assign'. 'Visible Extinguishing zones' is ssigned to the selected element. Figure 164: 'FBF' detil editor for selecting certin event ctegories One or more event ctegories cn be selected in the detil editor of the ssigned elements

342 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] Opertion of the fire brigde key depot (FSD) Figure 165: 'FSD', 'Hrdwre' detil editor In the 'FSD' detil editor, there re specil settings for the fire brigde key depot Hrdwre if the checkbox in the 'Operted' field is checked: 'Relese mode'. You cn select when the fire brigde key depot is to be unlocked: 'RT ctive/confirmed' 'Fire lrm or Gs lrm nd RT ctive/confirmed' 'RT ctive/confirmed or RT ctive/unexpected' 'Relesed by Sbotge ALARM': If the box contins checkmrk, the fire brigde key depot is lso unlocked by sbotge lrm. The sbotge lrm is ctivted by door contct fitted in the 'Sttion'. For service purposes, the function cn be switched off t the Person Mchine Interfce before the 'Sttion' is opened. 'Sbotge contct ctive upon 'FSD Sbotge'': If the checkmrk is plced, the specific output for notifiction of n intrusion pnel is ctivted in the event of n FSD sbotge messge Key depot dpter FCI2019 Creting key depot dpter 1. Select > 'FC2080' or 'FG2020' in the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Key sfe dpter' element for 'FC2080' or 'FG2020'. Link [ 77] Sub-elements of the key depot dpter The 'Key sfe dpter' element hs the following sub-elements: 'Visibility': Visibility of the key sfe dpter. The visibility must be ssigned to the 'RT fire control' control. 'Sbotge input': This input is ctivted if the key depot dpter ws sbotged or the lid of the key depot dpter ws opened. 'RT fire ctive': This output is ctivted if the ssigned 'RT fire control' control ws ctivted, but the ctivtion hs not yet been cknowledged. 'RT fire ctive/confirmed': This output is ctivted if the ssigned 'RT fire control' control ws ctivted, nd the ctivtion ws cknowledged. 'Heting ctivtion': Output for the ctivtion of the heting unit of key depot dpter

343 'Opertion' tsk crd Fire brigde periphery [DE] 14 Setting properties of the key sfe dpter Figure 166: Properties of the key depot dpter 'Relese mode': This setting specifies under which conditions the fire brigde key depot is unlocked. 'Relesed by Sbotge ALARM': This setting specifies if the fire brigde key depot is dditionlly unlocked by sbotge lrm. The sbotge lrm is triggered by door contct built into the 'Sttion'. For service purposes, the function cn be switched off t the Person Mchine Interfce before the 'Sttion' is opened. Assigning the key depot dpter 1. Open the 'Key sfe dpter' element in the structure tree. 2. Highlight 'Visibility' nd ssign the visibility of the key depot dpter to 'RT fire control'. 3. Highlight the inputs nd outputs nd ssign them to the corresponding input/output in the 'Hrdwre' tsk crd

344 14 'Opertion' tsk crd ESPA interfce (pger) 14.8 ESPA interfce (pger) The ESPA interfce is used for trnsmitting event messges from the fire detection instlltion to Pger, telephone systems, light signling systems nd other trdes. The ESPA interfce cn be obtined from suppliers. To configure the ESPA interfce the 'Opertion' element must be creted in the 'Pger' tsk crd nd ssigned to the hrdwre. The visibility for events on the site, the re, or the Sttion cn be ssigned to the 'Pger' element. Creting ESPA interfce nd ssigning to hrdwre To crete the 'Pger' element, proceed s follows: 1. Select > 'Sttion' in the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Pger' element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] 3. Enter the customer text. To ssign the 'Pger' element to the 'UFP' RS485 chnnel, proceed s follows: 1. Highlight the 'Pger' element in the tree view. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window nd highlight 'Pger'. The Hrdwre tree is shown. The elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 3. Select 'UFP' element nd click on 'Assign'. 'Pger' is ssigned to 'UFP'

345 'Opertion' tsk crd ESPA interfce (pger) 14 Visibility The following visibilities cn be ssigned using the Assign function: 'Site': Visibility for site events. 'Site without res': Visibility for events from the Hrdwre tree of the site. 'Sttion': Visibility for Sttion events. 'Sttion without res': Visibility for events from the Hrdwre tree of the Sttion. 'Are': Visibility for the res. To ssign the visibility, proceed s follows: 1. In the tree view, open 'Pger' nd highlight 'Visibility'. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Visibility' list nd Hrdwre tree or Detection tree re displyed. 3. Select the site, Assign dilog or Sttion in the 'Are' window nd click on 'Assign' (you cn ssign the visibility on severl elements). 'Visibility' is ssigned to the corresponding element. One or more event ctegories cn be selected in the detil editor of the ssigned elements (remove checkmrk from 'ALL event ctegories visible'). Figure 167: Detil editor 'Sttion', 'Overview', selection of event ctegories

346 14 'Opertion' tsk crd EVAC pnel [NL] 14.9 EVAC pnel [NL] The EVAC pnel is n operting nd indiction unit for mnul evcution control, integrted in the Person Mchine Interfce of the control pnel or remotely connected vi n RS485 interfce. The EVAC pnel consists of mster nd up to four slves. Mster nd slve both hve up to ten indictors for the evcution zones. Both the universl nd two-stge evcution control re suited to utomtic evcution. Creting 'Evc pnel' 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Evc pnel' element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] The 'Evc pnel' element is creted long with the 'Evc mster' element. Assigning the 'Evc mster' to the hrdwre 1. Highlight the 'Evc mster' element in the tree view. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The hrdwre tree is depicted. The 'Evc mster unit (FTO2007)' element tht cn be ssigned is highlighted in the 'Chnnel' element. 3. Click on 'Assign'. 'Evc mster' is ssigned to 'Chnnel'. Setting the properties of the 'Evc mster' element 'Buzzer silenced by FS20 operting terminl': Defines whether silencing the buzzer on the FS20 operting terminl lso silences the buzzer of the Evc pnel. 'Access level of keys 'Strt'/'Stop'': Defines the ccess level required to execute the functions of the 'Strt' nd 'Stop' keys

347 'Opertion' tsk crd EVAC pnel [NL] 14 Creting 'Evc slve' 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Evc pnel' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Evc pnel' element for 'Evc slve'. Link [ 77] Assigning the 'Evc slve' to the hrdwre 1. In the tree view, highlight the 'Evc slve' element tht you hve just creted. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The hrdwre tree is depicted. The 'Evc slve unit (FTO2007)' element tht cn be ssigned is highlighted in the 'Chnnel' element. 3. Click on 'Assign'. 'Evc slve' is ssigned to 'Chnnel'. Assigning EVAC pnel with evc control To ssign n 'Evc zone' element with the evc control, proceed s follows: 1. In the tree view, highlight n 'Evc zone' element in 'Evc mster' or 'Evc slve'. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The control tree is depicted. The 'Universl evc control'/'phsed evc control' elements tht cn be ssigned re highlighted. 3. Click on 'Assign'. 'Evc zone' is ssigned to 'Universl evc control' or 'Phsed evc control'. 4. Repet these steps for ech 'Evc zone' element (ech 'Evc zone' element corresponds to one of the ten evcution zones, from top to bottom)

348 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] The lrming equipment (UGA) is n operting nd indiction unit for four lrm zones. The unit hs its own control for the lrm devices by lrm zone nd its own degrded mode behvior. The lrming equipment is linked to the control pnel vi n RS485 interfce. Up to four lrm zones cn be configured for the lrming equipment. Configuring lrming equipment (UGA) You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges. 1. Crete the 'UGA' nd 'UGA lrm zone' elements. Link [ 348] 2. Assign the 'UGA' element to the RS485 module. Link [ 349] 3. Configure the visibility. Link [ 350] 4. Configure the UGA mster-slve principle. Link [ 351] Creting the 'UGA' nd 'UGA lrm zone' elements 1. Select 'Opertion' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'UGA' element for the 'Sttion'. Link [ 77] 3. Crete the 'UGA' element for 'UGA lrm zone'

349 'Opertion' tsk crd Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] Assigning UGA to the RS485 module Figure 168: Assigning 'UGA' element w In 'Hrdwre tree' the 'RS485 module (FCA2002)' element is vilble. 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'UGA' element in the tree view. 3. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 4. Select 'UGA' t the left in the window. At the right in the window, the 'Hrdwre tree' is displyed. 5. Open the RS485 module nd select 'UFP' element. 6. Click on 'Assign'. 'UFP' is ssigned to 'UGA'

350 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] Configuring visibility Figure 169: Assigning visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'UGA lrm zone' element nd highlight 'Visibility'. 3. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. At the right in the window, the 'Detection tree' is displyed. 4. Select the visibility: 'Are', 'Section', or 'Zone'. 5. Click on 'Assign'. The element is ssigned with 'Visibility'

351 'Opertion' tsk crd Alrming equipment (UGA) [FR] UGA Mster-Slve principle If 'UGA' 1 is connected to 'Sttion' 1, then 'Sttion' 2 which behves like remote 'UGA' 1 cn be connected to 'UGA' 2. 'UGA' 2 displys the sme informtion s 'UGA' 1 nd crrying out n opertion on 'UGA' 2 hs the sme effect s crrying out n opertion directly on 'UGA' 1. Figure 170: Assigning the UGA slve lrm zone to the UGA mster lrm zone To ssign the UGA slve lrm zone to the UGA mster lrm zone, proceed s follows: 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open the second 'Sttion' nd highlight '2:UGA'. 3. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 'Other UGA' is highlighted. 4. In the tree, open the first 'Sttion' nd highlight '1:UGA lrm zone'. 5. Click on 'Assign'. '2:UGA' is linked to '1: UGA lrm zone'

352 14 'Opertion' tsk crd CERLOOP gtewy [FR] CERLOOP gtewy [FR] The CERLOOP gtewy cn exclusively be used in Frnce due to the specil sitution with CERLOOP ring nd STTs. The CERLOOP gtewy is used for sending lrm nd presence messges to the prticipnts (STT) in the CERLOOP network. FS20-'Sttions' re represented s CERLOOP prticipnts with n independent CERLOOP ddress. The telegrms re only sent in one direction vi n RS232 interfce, i.e. from thefs20-'sttion' to the communiction module for CERLOOP nodes K1H061. NOTICE Overvoltge Device defect The RS232 module my only be inserted or removed when the 'Sttion' is current-free. Configuring the CERLOOP gtewy You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges. 1. Crete the 'RS232 module (FCA2001)' element. Link [ 352] 2. Crete nd ssign the CERLOOP gtewy. Link [ 353] 3. Configure the visibility of the CERLOOP gtewy. Link [ 354] 4. Enter the CERLOOP group numbers. Link [ 355] Creting RS232 module 1. In the tsk crd, select 'Hrdwre' > 'Sttion' with the built-in RS232 module > 'Communiction interfces'. 2. Crete the 'Communiction interfces' element with the 'RS232 (FCA2001) / CERLOOP' templte for 'RS232 module (FCA2001)'. Link [ 77]

353 'Opertion' tsk crd CERLOOP gtewy [FR] Creting nd ssigning the CERLOOP gtewy Figure 171: Creting nd ssigning the CERLOOP gtewy 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, highlight the 'Sttion' with the RS232 module. 3. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 4. Highlight 'CERLOOP' t the left of the window. At the right in the window, the 'Hrdwre tree' is displyed. 5. Using 'RS232 module (FCA2001)' select the 'CERLOOP' element. 6. Click on 'Assign'. The 'CERLOOP gtewy' element is creted nd ssigned to the hrdwre. Setting the properties of the CERLOOP gtewy Figure 172: Properties in the detil editor of the CERLOOP Gtewy 1. Select the 'CERLOOP gtewy' element in the tree view. 2. Set the following properties in the detil editor: 'CERLOOP node ddress': Address of the CERLOOP node (K1H061), to which the CERLOOP gtewy is connected. 'Presence telegrm intervl': Intervl for sending the presence messge

354 14 'Opertion' tsk crd CERLOOP gtewy [FR] Configuring visibility Assigning visibility You must configure the visibility of the CERLOOP gtewy for ll 'Sttions', which re defined s CERLOOP prticipnts. Figure 173: Assigning visibility 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'CERLOOP gtewy' element nd highlight 'Visibility'. 3. In the menu br, click on 'Assign'. The 'Assign dilog' window opens. 4. Select the 'Sttion' you wnt. You cn ssign severl 'Sttions' simultneously. 5. Click on 'Assign'. 'Visibility' is ssigned to the 'Sttion'. Setting CERLOOP ddress Figure 174: CERLOOP ddress in detil editor of the ssigned sttion 1. Highlight the ssigned 'Sttion' in the tree view. 2. In the detil editor, in the 'CERLOOP ddress' field, set the CERLOOP ddress of the 'Sttion'. Ech 'Sttion' must hve unique ddress. In the Tooltip of the 'CERLOOP ddress' field, you will find the permitted ddresses

355 'Opertion' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE] Entering CERLOOP group numbers For ech 'Zone' of referenced 'Sttion' the CERLOOP group number must be entered with the corresponding 'Zone' tht should be shown in CERLOOP. Figure 175: Detil editor of 'Zone' To configure the CERLOOP group number, proceed s follows for ech 'Zone' to be shown in CERLOOP: 1. Select the 'Detection' tsk crd. 2. In the tree view, open 'Are' > 'Section' nd highlight 'Zone'. 3. Enter number between 0 nd in the 'Pln no.' field. This number corresponds to the CERLOOP group number Key sfe dpter [DE] Creting 'Key sfe dpter' 1. Select the 'Opertion' tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Key sfe dpter' element for the desired sttion, e.g., using the context menu

356 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE] Assigning 'Key sfe dpter' w An FCI2008 with n vilble input 1 or n FDCIO222/224 with n vilble input 11 is present in the hrdwre tree. 1. Assign the visibility of the 'Key sfe dpter' to the desired element. 2. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Sbotge input' s follows: When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FCI2008: Assignment to input I/O 1 of the FCI2008. Or When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FDCIO222/224: Assignment to input 11 of the FDCIO222/ Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Heting ctivtion' s follows: When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FCI2008: Assignment to output I/O 4 of the FCI2008. When ctivting the 'Key sfe dpter' vi FDCIO222/224: Assignment to output 23 of the FDCIO222/224. The 'Key sfe dpter' is ssigned. The 'RT fire ctive/confirmed' nd 'RT fire ctive' elements do not need to be ssigned. See lso 2 Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls [ 285] 2 Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone [ 230] 2 Assigning LEDs [ 357]

357 'Opertion' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE] Assigning LEDs The 'LED 'Key depot unlocked'' must be configured in order to operte key sfe dpter [DE]. To this end, 'Technicl zone' must be creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone [ 230]'. Then the LEDs on the corresponding Person Mchine Interfces re ssigned to the 'Technicl zone'. Prerequisite The key sfe dpter hs been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE] [ 355]'. The controls for the key sfe dpter hve been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring controls [ 285]'. The 'Technicl zone' hs been creted nd ssigned. See the chpter 'Key sfe dpter [DE]: Configuring the technicl zone [ 230]'

358 14 'Opertion' tsk crd Key sfe dpter [DE] Assigning the 'Key depot unlocked' LED 1. In the 'Opertion' tsk crd, select the Person Mchine Interfce on which you wnt to configure the 'LED 'Key depot unlocked''. 2. Edit the customer text for the LED, e.g., 'Key depot unlocked'. 3. Crete cuse for the LED, e.g., using the context menu. 4. Select the 'LED 'Key depot unlocked'' element s the 'Event filter' on the 'Overview' tb. 5. Select the 'Key depot unlocked' LED nd ssign it s follows using the 'Assign' function: Select the 'All technicl messges' element under 'Events 'Technicl messge'' in 'Mnul type selection' on the left-hnd side of the 'New cuse dilog'. Select 'Technicl zone Key depot unlocked' in the detection tree on the right-hnd side 6. Perform steps 1 to 5 for ll Person Mchine Interfces on which you wnt to configure n 'LED 'Key depot unlocked''

359 'Network' tsk crd Network prmeters 'Network' tsk crd Configure the network settings for the fire detection system in the 'Network' tsk crd. You will find ll permissible networking types nd the required network settings described in detil in document '008843'. You will find pre-conditions for configurtion nd the required work steps in document '009052'. See chpter 'Applicble documents'. The following chpter describes the corresponding configurtion in SintesoWorks. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15] 15.1 Network prmeters You will find detils of the ports in FS20 in document See chpter 'Applicble documents' Network configurtion Creting networked 'Sttions' Networked 'Sttions' must be ssigned to the 'Ethernet' or 'SAFEDLINK' sub-net: 'New sttion'' window, 'Ethernet sttion' or 'SAFEDLINK sttion' option. In the 'Network' tsk crd, references for 'Sttions' re utomticlly creted under the 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet subnet' elements. IP ddresses for Ethernet nd router sttions IP ddresses rnging from to re reserved in FS20 cn cnnot be used. Ethernet 'Sttions' The 'Fx20xx/Ethernet' references for ll Ethernet 'Sttions' cn be found in the 'Connections' element under 'Ethernet sub-net'

360 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion SAFEDLINK 'Sttions' The 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' element is utomticlly creted under 'Ethernet subnet'. The 'Fx20xx/SAFEDLINK' references for ll SAFEDLINK 'Sttions' cn be found in the 'Connections' element underneth it. If the SAFEDLINK 'Sttions' re split into severl sub-nets, more 'SAFEDLINK subnet' elements cn be creted using the 'New element' function. The 'Fx20xx/SAFEDLINK' references cn then be moved to the vrious sub-nets using the 'Drg nd drop', 'Cut' nd 'Pste' or 'Unssign' nd 'Assign' functions. If you crete stndlone 'Sttion' nd then expnd the 'Site' with 'Sttions', the stndlone 'Sttion' utomticlly dopts the network settings of the first 'Sttion' dded

361 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring 'Sttion' s router sttion A SAFEDLINK sttion is configured s router sttion. The router sttion connects the 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' with the 'Ethernet sub-net'. The router sttion is creted by ssigning the 'Functions' element to the 'Fx20xx/SAFEDLINK' reference. The router sttion provides ccess to the privte ddresses of 'SAFEDLINK sub-net'. The Ethernet prticipnts must therefore recognize the router sttion s being the gtewy of the route to the 'SAFEDLINK sub-net'. 'Assign dilog' window to define the router sttion Proceed s follows to define the 'Router' or 'Stndby router': 1. Open the 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion'> 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' elements in the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Functions' nd open the 'Assign dilog' window. 3. Select 'Router' or 'Stndby router' from the list nd the reference for the 'Sttion' you wnt from the tree. 4. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Sttion' is configured s router sttion or stndby router sttion. IP ddresses for Ethernet nd router sttions IP ddresses rnging from to re reserved in FS20 cn cnnot be used

362 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring 'Sttion' s GAP If SAFEDLINK Sttion is configured s 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP', it must lso be configured s router or stndby router; otherwise, locl or generl ccess vi the Ethernet port will not be possible. The GAP sttion is creted by ssigning the 'Functions' element to the 'Fx20xx/Ethernet' or 'Fx20xx/SAFEDLINK' reference. Proceed s follows to configure the 'Sttion' s 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP': w 'Sttion' is configured s router sttion or Ethernet sttion. 1. Open the 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' elements in the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Functions' nd open the 'Assign dilog' window. 3. Select 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP' from the list nd the reference for the 'Sttion' you wnt from the tree. 4. Click on 'Assign'. The 'Sttion' is defined s 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP'

363 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring GAP with DHCP server NOTICE GAP with DHCP server on public network Devices on the public network hve incorrect IP ddresses. A GAP must only be configured on privte networks with DHCP server. A GAP cn be configured with DHCP server. This results in PC utomticlly receiving n IP ddress when connection is estblished to the GAP vi FCnet/LAN. w The 'Sttion' is configured s GAP. 1. Open the 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'Functions' elements in the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Highlight the 'Sttion'. 3. Check the 'DHCP server enbled' checkbox on the 'Overview' tb of the detil editor. The 'Sttion' is configured with DHCP server

364 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Mnul lloction of ddresses in the sub-nets If the 'Ethernet sub-net' is incorported in n existing IT infrstructure, the settings for the sub-net msk nd IP ddress must be mde mnully following the IT dministrtor's instruction. IP ddresses for Ethernet nd router sttions IP ddresses rnging from to re reserved in FS20 cn cnnot be used. 'Ethernet sub-net' Configure the 'Ethernet sub-net' s follows: 1. Open the 'Network' > 'Globl system configurtion' elements in the tree view of the 'FS20 network configurtion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Ethernet sub-net'. 3. Enter the network msk (4 groups of digits, seprted by dots) in the 'Netmsk' field. 4. Open 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'Connections' in the tree view. 5. Highlight ll 'Fx20xx/Ethernet' one fter the other. 6. Enter the IP ddress in the 'Overview' tb of the detil editor

365 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion 15 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' 1. Open the 'Network' > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' elements in the tree view of the 'Ethernet sub-net' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'SAFEDLINK sub-net'. 3. Enter the network msk (4 groups of digits, seprted by dots) in the 'Netmsk' field. 4. Open 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' > 'Connections' in the tree view. 5. Highlight ll 'Fx20xx/SAFEDLINK one fter the other. 6. Enter the IP ddress in the 'Overview' tb of the detil editor. See lso 2 Setting network speed for SAFEDLINK [ 368]

366 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Entering routes for externl ccess to extended networks vi GAP In order tht PC or mngement sttion from n externl network hs ccess to ll 'Sttions' in the extended network vi router nd GAP, routes must be entered in the GAP nd in the Ethernet sub-net. Although ll network ddresses in this chpter re exmples, they re consistent. Function of the route in the GAP The route in the GAP is required for the following situtions: There is 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' router between the extended network in the fire detection system nd the externl network. 'Destintion ddress' of the route is 'SintesoWorks' nd/or the mngement sttions 'Gtewy' is the FS20 ddress of the 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' router Function of the route in the Ethernet sub-net The route in the Ethernet sub-net is required for the following situtions: The extended network in the fire detection system hs stndby router. There is 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' router between the extended network in the fire detection system nd the externl network. 'Destintion ddress' of the route is 'SintesoWorks' nd/or the mngement sttions 'Gtewy' is the Ethernet ddress of the GAP Additionl conditions for ccess GAP must be connected to 'FCnet/LAN'. 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' must be configured

367 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion 15 Entering the route in the GAP Route vi 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' to 'Destintion ddress' 'Destintion ddress': 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Internl IP ddress of the 'Security module (firewll) FN2009- A1' Enter the routes in the GAP s follows: 1. Select the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'Functions' > 'GAP' in the structure tree. 3. Highlight 'Routes'. 4. Enter the network dt. Figure 176: Route in the GAP Entering route in the Ethernet sub-net Route vi GAP to 'Destintion ddress' PC/mngement sttion 'Destintion ddress': 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Ethernet ddress of the GAP Enter the routes in the Ethernet sub-net s follows: 1. Select the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Open 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' in the structure tree. 3. Highlight 'Routes'. 4. Enter the network dt. Figure 177: Route in the Ethernet sub-net

368 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Setting network speed for SAFEDLINK The network speed is set to the 'Stndrd' setting for high cble qulity. If using lower cble qulity or if problems rise with long cbles, the 'Low' speed must be set. Figure 178: 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' detil editor To set the network speed, proceed s follows: 1. Open the 'Network' > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' elements in the tree view of the 'Ethernet sub-net' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'SAFEDLINK sub-net'. 3. Select setting 'Network speed' for 'Low' in the detil editor. The network speed is set for low cble qulities Configuring remote ccess with two GAPs You will find dditionl informtion bout the individul steps on the specified pges. 1. Configure one 'Sttion' s 'GAP' nd one 'Sttion' s 'Secondry GAP'. Link [ 362] 2. Configure the GAP 'Sttion' with DHCP server. Link [ 363] 3. In 'GAP', crete 'Route' element nd enter the following vlues. Link [ 366] 'Destintion ddress': Sub-net of mngement sttion A 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Address of 'Security module (firewll)' A In 'Secondry GAP', crete 'Route' element nd enter the following vlues. 'Destintion ddress': Sub-net of mngement sttion B 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Address of 'Security module (firewll)' B

369 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion In 'Ethernet sub-net', crete two 'Route' elements. 6. Enter the following vlues in the first Route' element. Link [ 366] 'Destintion ddress': Sub-net of mngement sttion A 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Address of 'GAP' Enter the following vlues in the second Route' element: 'Destintion ddress': Sub-net of mngement sttion B 'Netmsk': 'Gtewy': Address of 'Secondry GAP' You will find more informtion bout remote ccess with two GAPs in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. See lso 2 Applicble documents [ 15]

370 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring remote ccess vi crsp To configure remote ccess vi the 'common Remote Service Pltform' (crsp) remote mintennce pltform, you must request the following vlues from your crsp contct: 'Destintion ddress' 'Netmsk' 'Gtewy' You will find more informtion bout remote ccess vi crsp in document See chpter 'Applicble documents'. Configuring remote ccess vi crsp 1. Configure one 'Sttion' s 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP'. Link [ 362] 2. In 'GAP' or 'Secondry GAP', crete 'Route' element. 3. In the 'Route' element, enter the vlues for 'Destintion ddress', 'Netmsk', nd 'Gtewy'. You will get the vlues from your crsp contct. 4. In 'Ethernet sub-net' crete 'Route' element. 5. In the 'Route' element, enter the vlues for 'Destintion ddress' nd 'Netmsk'. You will get the vlues from your crsp contct. Enter the Ethernet ddress of the GAP s the vlue of 'Gtewy'. You will find informtion on entering routes in chpter 'Entering routes for externl ccess to extended networks vi GAP [ 366]'. Estblishing connection 1. Log in on the crsp website. 2. Estblish the FS20 connection to your 'Site' (VPN tunnel). 3. Select the 'Connection to IP ddress' option in the 'Connect' window. 4. Enter 'loclhost' or ' '. 5. Click on 'OK'

371 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring redundncy mngement In the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' element, you cn configure redundncy mngement for Ethernet networks tht hve severl Ethernet switches (modulr) FN2012 [ 171]. You will find the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion'' element in the 'Network' > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' tsk crd. For the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion', the 'Type of redundncy configurtion' cn be configured mnully on the 'Overview' tb. You cnnot mke ny mnul configurtion settings if you opt for the 'Automtic' configurtion. The 'Loop wired network' configurtion requires you to configure the 'Redundncy mnger' mnully. The 'Stub wired network' configurtion requires you to mnully configure the suppression of ring nd port fults for the externl ports. The following chpters describe the vrious configurtion types for 'Redundncy mngement configurtion'

372 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Automtic configurtion For utomtic configurtion, the vlue 'Automtic' is set in the 'Type of redundncy configurtion' field. Automtic configurtion for 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' is the defult configurtion for 'Site'. You cnnot mke ny mnul configurtion settings if you opt for utomtic configurtion. In n utomticlly configured Ethernet network with severl 'Sttions', n FN2012 hs the function of the 'Redundncy mnger' llocted to it by the system. The 'Redundncy mnger' is defined utomticlly in the Ethernet network. Ring fults nd port fults re not suppressed. If 'Site' only hs one 'Sttion' or if the 'Sttion' is not linked to ny other 'Sttion' vi n Ethernet network, ring fults nd port fults re suppressed utomticlly. Automtic configurtion cnnot be used if the fire detection system is configured with 'Stub wired network'. Mnul configurtion is required for 'Stub wired network'

373 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring stub wiring To configure 'Stub wired network' Ethernet network, you hve to set 'Stub wired network' in the 'Type of redundncy configurtion' field. When configuring the 'Stub wired network', you must suppress ring errors nd port errors for the ports locted t the respective end of the stub. A 'Redundncy mnger' cnnot be configured. Configuring 'Stub wired network' 1. Highlight the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' element in the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Check the 'Suppress ring fult' checkbox. The suppression of ring fults is ctivted. 3. Select the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion'. 4. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' s follows: Select the 'Assign dilog' element on the left-hnd side of the 'Ring port fult suppression'. In the hrdwre tree on the right-hnd side of the 'Assign dilog', select the ports locted t the end of the stub in ech cse. You must ssign 'Ring port fult suppression' to the corresponding port twice for the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion'. Suppression of port errors is ctivted for the ports t the respective end of the stub. You hve configured the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' for 'Stub wired network'

374 15 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Configuring loop wiring The 'Loop wired network' must be configured mnully if the function of the 'Redundncy mnger' is to be llocted to specific FN2012. If the function of the 'Redundncy mnger' does not hve to be llocted to specific FN2012, the utomtic configurtion type cn be used for the 'Loop wired network'. To configure 'Loop wired network' Ethernet network with mnully configured 'Redundncy mnger', you hve to set 'Loop wired network' in the 'Type of redundncy configurtion' field. Configuring 'Redundncy mnger' 1. Highlight the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' element in the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd. 2. Use the 'Assign' function to ssign the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' to n FN2012. You hve configured 'Redundncy mnger'. You hve ssigned the function of the 'Redundncy mnger' to n FN2012. You hve configured the 'Redundncy mngement configurtion' for 'Loop wired network'

375 'Network' tsk crd Network configurtion Site-specific configurtion For customer-specific Ethernet network configurtion, you hve to set 'Type of redundncy configurtion' in the 'Site-specific'. For the 'Site-specific' configurtion, you cn configure the following elements mnully: Suppression of ring fults 'Redundncy mnger' Suppression of port fults Proceed s described in the previous chpters to configure the individul elements

376 15 'Network' tsk crd Estblishing connection from PC to FS20 network 15.3 Estblishing connection from PC to FS20 network When the SintesoWorks is instlled, the two routes in the tble below re entered in the PC's network settings. Network ddress Network msk Gtewy ddress Metric Tble 18: Persistent routes A connection from the PC to the FS20 network cn be estblished with the following three vrints: Locl connection The PC is connected to the Ethernet connection of stndlone or SAFEDLINK sttion. The PC utomticlly receives n IP ddress. Connection to GAP The PC is connected to the 'FCnet/LAN'. The PC utomticlly receives n IP ddress when the DHCP is configured on the GAP. Connection to IP ddress The PC is connected to the 'FCnet/LAN'. The PC's IP ddress must be set mnully. If there re externl routers between SintesoWorks nd GAP, the necessry routers must be configured for the FCnet/LAN nd ll SAFEDLINK sub-nets. The connection cn be estblished using the following menu items: For SintesoWorks 'Commissioning' > 'Downlod site' 'Commissioning' > 'Uplod site' 'Commissioning' > 'Uplod site event memory' 'Commissioning' > 'Uplod site log files' For SintesoView 'SintesoView' > 'Connect' The 'Connect' window is opened when commnd is performed

377 'Network' tsk crd Setting up Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU) Setting up Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU) The defult setting for the MTU size is 1500 bytes. If FW updte fils, you cn set lower vlues nd pply them optionlly for the 'Connection to IP ddress'. The defined MTU size must be pplied for remote ccess vi crsp. Set the MTU s shown below: Figure 179: Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU) This setting cn be selected optionlly for 'Connection to IP ddress'. Figure 180: Mximum Trnsmission Unit (MTU)

378 15 'Network' tsk crd Monitoring Ethernet switch (MM) nd sfety module (firewll) 15.5 Monitoring Ethernet switch (MM) nd sfety module (firewll) The 'Ethernet switch (MM) FN2008-A1' nd 'Security module (firewll) FN2009-A1' network elements must be monitored for fults in the Ethernet. To do this, terminls F1 nd F2 (fult) on the connector strip of the detector contct re connected to configurble input/output on the periphery bord or n input/output module. The fult messge is configured in the 'Technicl zone' with the 'Fult network device' templte. Crete the fult messge s follows: 1. Select 'Detection' > 'Detection re' > 'Section' in the tsk crd. 2. Use the 'Fult network device' templte to crete the 'Section' element for the 'Technicl zone'. Link [ 77] The 'Technicl zone' element must be ssigned to the corresponding input. Figure 181: 'Assign dilog' window to ssign the 'Technicl zone' 1. Highlight the 'Technicl zone' element in the tree view. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. 'Input' is highlighted in the list. 3. Select the corresponding 'I/O' element nd click on 'Assign'. The link is creted. See lso 2 'Technicl zone' [ 205]

379 'Network' tsk crd Connecting mngement sttions vi BACnet/Ethernet Connecting mngement sttions vi BACnet/Ethernet Mngement sttions ( BACnet clients) re connected to FS20 vi BACnet / Ethernet. A BACnet client is connected to the FS20 sub-system vi the Ethernet interfce of the Globl Access Point (GAP). Every single 'Sttion' tht is to communicte with the BACnet protocol must be enbled with license key. The license key must support the BACnet function for mngement sttions. SintesoWorks cn export the FS20 configurtion in SiB-X formt so tht BACnet client cn import this dt. BACnet is communiction log nd requires its own logicl IDs (BACnet device ID) for the 'Sttions', so tht ech 'Sttion' is uniquely recognized s BACnet prticipnt. The 'BACnet device ID' is mde up of two prts: the number for the 'BACnet device object' nd the instnce number. In 'SintesoWorks', the entry for 'BACnet device ID' is lwys deciml number for the instnce number. The re type is dded internlly. Device IDs must be configured t the following points: 'BACnet client configurtion': In the 'BACnet device ID' property The configurtion is dependent on 'BACnet client'. 'BACnet device object': In the 'Address' property 'BACnet device ID' is mnged by FS Plnning BACnet configurtion The following informtion is required for BACnet configurtion: IP ddresses for BACnet devices nd GAP Unique BACnet device ID for ech BACnet device There should be one BBMD (BACnet Brodcst Mngement Device) ech per sub-net, with one entry ech for the other BBMDs nd their IP ddresses

380 15 'Network' tsk crd Globl BACnet configurtion 15.7 Globl BACnet configurtion Configuring globl BACnet settings BACnet communiction must be ctive for BACnet settings to be configured. Activte BACnet communiction s follows: 1. Open the 'Network' element in the tree view of the 'Globl system configurtion' tsk crd. 2. Highlight 'Globl BACnet configurtion'. 3. Check the 'Enble BACnet communiction' checkbox on the 'Detils' tb. BACnet communiction is ctivted. More settings cn be configured. Figure 182: Globl BACnet settings The following vlues in the detil editor must mtch the settings of the mngement sttion: The BACnet device ID consists of the 'Device' re type nd the instnce number. 'Address rnge, lower limit' / 'Address rnge, upper limit': Rnge for instnce number vlues for identifying the FS20 sttions in BACnet. The ddress rnge is exported in SiB-X formt. 'BACnet chrcter set': Chrcter set tht is used in the BACnet protocol for text strings. FS20 functions internlly with Unicode in UTF-8 formt. Selectble chrcter sets: UCS-2 (Unicode 2 bytes) ANSI X3.4 (ASCII 7 bits) ISO Ltin 1 (8 bits)

381 'Network' tsk crd Globl BACnet configurtion Disbling switch-off nd switch-on messges In the stndrd setting, messges for switching logicl chnnels off nd on re sent to connected BACnet clients. These messges cn be disbled. Figure 183: Globl BACnet settings Disble switch-off nd switch-on messges s follows: 1. Highlight 'Globl BACnet configurtion'. 2. Select the 'Detils' tb in the detil editor. 3. Check the 'Suppress BACnet mode OFF in chnnels' checkbox. Switch-off nd switch-on messges re disbled Delegting multiple lrms for 'Zones' In the stndrd setting, the pre-lrm nd lrm messges re signled on the 'Zones'. This leds to problems in the BACnet model if it is in the 'Multiple lrms per zone' setting. Figure 184: Globl BACnet settings These BACnet messges cn be delegted to the logicl chnnels nd replce the messges for 'Activtion' there. Activte the 'Multiple lrms per zone on BACnet' s follows: 1. Highlight 'Globl BACnet configurtion'. 2. Select the 'Detils' tb in the detil editor. 3. Check the 'Multiple lrms per zone on BACnet' checkbox. 'Multiple lrms per zone on BACnet' is ctivted

382 15 'Network' tsk crd Globl BACnet configurtion Configuring BACnet client The 'Network' element must be creted in the tree view of the 'BACnet client configurtion' tsk crd so tht the BACnet client cn be configured. This element defines the mngement sttions or third-prty devices tht re ccepted by the FS20 system. The customer text of this element is lso used in the event memory to log ll ctions triggered by mngement sttion. A BACnet client is identified by the 'BACnet device ID'. Creting 'BACnet client configurtion' element 1. Select 'Network' > 'Globl system configurtion' > 'Globl BACnet configurtion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'BACnet client configurtion' element for ech BACnet client. Link [ 77] 3. Enter the customer text. Properties of the 'BACnet client configurtion' element Figure 185: 'BACnet client configurtion' detil editor The 'BACnet client configurtion' tht ws ssigned to the client must be entered in the 'Detils', 'BACnet device ID' detil editor. It must be ligned with the mngement sttion dt. If required for the mngement sttion, the dectivted BACnet input fields cn be ctivted with the 'Check BACnet client ddress' checkbox. This is bsolutely not recommended. The reson for this is tht the 'BACnet client' hs fixed IP ddress nd no DHCP server is used. If 'BACnet device ID', 'BACnet network no.' nd 'BACnet IP ddress' re to be used to identify the BACnet client in ddition to 'BACnet UDP port', these properties cn be set ligned with the mngement sttion dt s follows. Check the 'BACnet client configurtion' checkbox in the 'Detils' tb of the detil editor 'Check BACnet client ddress'. The fields re ctivted. Figure 186: 'BACnet client configurtion' detil editor

383 'Network' tsk crd Globl BACnet configurtion Monitoring BACnet client Sttions cn monitor the connections to BACnet client. To do this, ech sttion must be ssigned 'BACnet client supervision' element for ech BACnet client tht is to be monitored. This element triggers fult messge if the connection to the BACnet client is interrupted. Configurtion for monitoring requires the following points: Creting the 'BACnet client supervision' element Assigning the 'BACnet client supervision' nd 'BACnet client configurtion' elements Determining 'Client supervision timeout' Creting 'BACnet client supervision' element 1. Select 'Network' > 'Sttion' in the tsk crd. 2. Crete the 'Sttion' element for the 'BACnet client supervision' for ech BACnet client tht is to be monitored. Link [ 77] Assigning the 'BACnet client supervision' nd 'BACnet client configurtion' elements 1. Highlight the 'BACnet client supervision' element in the tree view. 2. Open the 'Assign dilog' window. The 'BACnet client configurtion' elements re highlighted in the list. 3. Select the corresponding element nd click on 'Assign'. Figure 187: Window 'Assign dilog' for ssigning the element 'BACnet client supervision'

384 15 'Network' tsk crd Globl BACnet configurtion Determining 'Client supervision timeout' Figure 188: 'BACnet client supervision' detil editor, 'Overview' In the detil editor 'BACnet client supervision' ('Overview'), the time fter which fult messge is displyed is defined in 'Client supervision timeout'. The time period must mtch the BACnet client's query cycle, with which the BACnet client queries the sttion's system sttus. Set vlue 2.2. times tht of the query cycle in the 'Client supervision timeout' field Configuring 'Stndby visibility' for the mngement sttion 'Sttion' cn be ssigned to 'Stndby visibility for Mngement sttion'. If the mngement sttion fils, the ssigned 'Sttion' utomticlly receives this visibility. You will find informtion on configurtion of the stndby view for mngement sttions in chpter 'Stndby visibility [ 316]'

385 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion BACnet device configurtion 'BACnet device object' Overview In the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd, ech 'Sttion' contins 'BACnet device object' element. It is used to identify the 'Sttion'in the BACnet. In the 'BACnet device object' tb of the detil editor, the 'Overview' element contins n ddress nd predefined customer text ('Own device'). The ddress is used directly s 'BACnet device ID' nd must be in the sme ddress rnge tht hs been entered in the globl settings for BACnet. The configurtion of the BACnet stck, including the BBMD function nd the properties of the device object for BACnet trnsction control, cn be found in the 'Detils' tb of the detil editor. Figure 189: 'BACnet device object' detil editor, 'Detils' tb BACnet trnsction control The following properties of the 'BACnet device object' must be set in ll sttions nd be consistent for the entire site. 'APDU timeout' Defines the timeout for the BACnet trnsction control. 'APDU segment timeout' Defines the timeout for the requirement of nother prt of segmented BACnet messge. 'No. of APDU retries' Defines the mximum number of repetitions for BACnet trnsction

386 15 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion Configurtion of the BACnet communictions stck, including BBMD function As rule there is just one vlue tht hs to be defined on ll sttions: 'UDP port no.' Defines the number of the UDP port used for BACnet communiction. The defult (0xbc0) corresponds to the stndrd. All prticipnts, including the BACnet clients, must use the sme number. The BBMD configurtion in contrst needs only be mde for one sttion per IP sub-net. If using sttions on the Ethernet this must be greed with the BACnet clients if they re in the sme IP sub-net. Configurtion includes: 'Enble BBMD' Enbles the BBMD (BACnet Brodcst Mngement Device) functionlity. This is BACnet function for the exchnge of brodcst messges between different IP sub-nets. If BBMD is enbled, then there is 'BDT entry' nd/or 'Enble FDT' is set to ctive. 'Two hops' Selects either 'unicst' s the stndrd procedure for prtner BBMD (ctively set) or 'direct brodcst' if the IP routers re configured such tht they pss on brodcsts for other sub-nets (inctively set). The GAP, for exmple, cnnot do this. 'Enble FDT' Enbles remote BACnet devices to register in the 'Foreign Device Tble' (FDT) of the BBMD. This is required if there is no seprte BBMD in their sub-nets. 'No. of FDT entries' Defines the mximum number of FDT entries ('Foreign Device Tble'). BBMD is BACnet function tht is required exctly once for ech sub-net. One device ssumes this function nd must recognize its prtners in the other subnets (BDT entries). Exception: One single device in sub-net without this BBMD function cn lso register s third-prty device with BBMD in nother sub-net (dynmic FDT entry)

387 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion Configuring 'Sttion' s BBMD A router 'Sttion' cn crry out the GAP, BBMD, nd router functionlities in prllel. Note the following informtion while selecting 'Sttion' for configurtion s BBMD for performnce optimiztion. 1. If stndby router 'Sttion' is set up, this should be ctivted s the BBMD. 2. If no stndby router 'Sttion' is set up, the router 'Sttion' should be ctivted s the BBMD. Configurtion requires the following points: Selection of the 'Sttion' Configurtion of the 'Sttion' s BBMD Selection of the 'Sttion' 1. In the tree view of the 'Network' tsk crd, open the 'Globl system configurtion' > 'FS20 network configurtion' > 'Ethernet sub-net' > 'Connections' elements or 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' > 'Connections'. 2. Highlight 'Fx20xx'/'Ethernet' or 'Fx20xx'/SAFEDLINK' nd select the 'Sttion' vi the 'Network' hyperlink in the detil editor. The 'Sttion' is selected. Configurtion of the 'Sttion' s BBMD The number 'No. of FDT entries' corresponds to the mximum supported by FS Open 'Sttion' in the structure tree. 2. Highlight 'BACnet device object'. 3. Select 'Detils' in the detil editor. 4. Check the 'Enble BBMD' checkbox. 5. Check the 'Enble FDT' checkbox only if BACnet client hs to register to this BBMD. 6. Leve the stndrd setting 'Two hops. This configurtion is tested with the stndrd setting in the 'Brodcst distribution msk' of 'BDT entries'. 'Sttion' is configured s BBMD

388 15 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion Configuring ll sttions The vlue for 'APDU timeout' should be greed with the mngement sttion integrtor. We would recommend 10 seconds with MM8000. The vlue for 'APDU segment timeout' should lso be greed upon. We would recommend 5 seconds. The vlue for 'No. of APDU retries' corresponds to the BACnet stndrd nd does not need to be chnged. The 'UDP port no.' setting corresponds to the stndrd (47808 = 0xbc0). It only needs chnging if the entire system expects it to BBMD entry (BDT entry) 'BACnet device object' elements cn be dded to the 'BDT entry' element when the BBMD function is ctivted. This element defines the mngement sttion or the third-prty device tht hs the BBMD function in its sub-net. A 'BDT entry' element is required for ech subnet with its own BBMD. Creting 'BDT entry' 1. Select 'BACnet device object'. 2. Crete the 'BDT entry' element for ech BBMD. Link [ 77] Configuring 'BDT entry' Figure 190: 'BDT entry' detil editor, 'Detils' To configure 'BDT entry', proceed s follows: 1. Highlight 'BDT entry'. 2. Select 'Detils' in the detil editor. 3. Enter the greed IP ddress for the BACnet client. 4. Leve the predefined vlues for 'UDP port no.' nd 'Brodcst distribution msk' unchnged. The port number of the client must mtch its own, nd the msk vlue mtches the pre-setting for 'Two hops'

389 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion BACnet Notifiction Clss Element All sttions contin list of 25 pre-defined entries under 'BACnet Notifiction Clss element' in the detil editor. Ech entry stnds for BACnet notifiction clss nd hs one unique ddress nd one customer text within sttion. The ddresses re used in the BACnet object ID s instnce numbers. The customer text provides informtion on which elements of the ppliction re represented by this notifiction clss. The internl ssignment cnnot be chnged. The settings should only be chnged ccording to mngement sttion integrtor's specifiction, nd only when the behvior of different sub-systems hs to be dpted to superordinte system. Address Customer text Address Customer text 1 Ares 14 System 2 Sections 15 UGA 3 Zones 16 AVC 4 Sensors 17 IC 5 Control groups 18 Network 6 Controls 19 BACnet client 7 Spre 20 BACnet device 8 Chnnels (log.) 21 Line Summries 9 Sttions 22 Section Summries 10 Module/Submodules 23 Control Groups HVAC 11 Lines 24 Controls HVAC 12 Devices 25 Chnnels (phys.) HVAC 13 Chnnels (phys.) Tble 19: Notifiction clsses To configure 'BACnet Notifiction Clss element', proceed s follows: 1. In the 'Network' tsk crd, highlight ll the 'Fx20xx' sttions one fter the other. 2. Select 'BACnet Notifiction Clss element' in the detil editor. 3. Set the priorities for ech event notifiction. 4. Check the box for 'Acknowledge required' wherever cknowledgement is required for sttus chnges

390 15 'Network' tsk crd BACnet device configurtion The following settings re possible for ech notifiction clss: 'Event notifiction priorities' The priority of n event messge per sttus chnge nd which of these chnges cn be cknowledged t mngement sttion is determined here. The priorities for the event messges should be selected from the 0 to 63 rnge tht is intended for 'LifeSfety' pplictions. The highest priority strts t 0 nd the lowest ends t 255. 'Acknowledge required' Here, the following sttus chnges re defined (in this order): 'to-offnorml': Entry of n event 'to-fult': Entry of fult 'to-norml': Norml opertion re-estblished Internlly the FS20 fire detection system only processes the cknowledgements for the 'to-offnorml' nd 'to-fult' sttus chnges. The 'tonorml' sttus chnge cn lso be supported with cknowledgement for BACnet clients. There re no predefined entries for the recipients of event messges; these must be entered by the BACnet clients t runtime

391 'Network' tsk crd Checklist for network nd BACnet configurtion Checklist for network nd BACnet configurtion The checklists below list settings tht must be entered nd / or checked for BACnet integrtion. Checklist for network configurtion Figure 191: Exmple of network configurtion Element in the structure tree Configurtion in the detil editor Required setting/vlue 'Ethernet sub-net' 'Netmsk' 'GAP' 'DHCP server enbled' Depending on network configurtion 'SAFEDLINK sub-net' 'Netmsk' 'Network speed' Stndrd 'Router' 'Router Ethernet IP ddress' x.x Tble 20: Checklist for network configurtion

392 15 'Network' tsk crd Checklist for network nd BACnet configurtion Checklist for BACnet configurtion Figure 192: Exmple of BACnet configurtion Element in the structure tree 'Globl BACnet configurtion' 'BACnet client configurtion' 'BACnet device object' (on every 'Sttion') 'BACnet device object' (only on one 'Sttion') Configurtion in the detil editor Required setting/vlue 'Enble BACnet communiction' Activted 'BACnet chrcter set' UCS-2 'Address rnge, lower limit' 0 'Address rnge, upper limit' 'Suppress BACnet mode OFF in chnnels' Dectivted Creting 'BACnet client configurtion' Severl clients possible 'BACnet device ID' Enter 'Check BACnet client ddress' Depending on network configurtion 'BACnet network no.' 0 'BACnet IP ddress' Depending on network configurtion 'BACnet UDP port' 'UDP port no.' 'APDU timeout' 00:00:10 'No. of APDU retries' 3 'APDU segment timeout' 00:00:05 'Enble BBMD' Activted 'Enble FDT' Dectivted 'Two hops' Activted 'No. of FDT entries'